Catalog GK-1
Eighth Edition
AZ16
Optional M12
quick-connect
termination
Anatomy of the world’s
best-selling interlock switch
normally-closed
contacts (ensure circuit interruption)
®
Up to 3 contacts,
for dual-channel
reliability with
signalling
3 threaded
knock-out
conduit entry
points for easy
installation
Electricallyinsulated contacts
for added safety (no
potential for crossover)
Difficult-to-defeat
multiple-cam
actuating mechanism
(mechanical life: 10 million)
Integral, non-removable
actuating head resists bypassing
by preventing access to operating
plunger
Internationally accepted
(CE, UL, CSA, BG, SUVA,
SA, NEMKO, TUV, and
others)
And the industry's broadest
range of optional features &
accessories…
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adjustable ball latch
Magnetic door latch
Flex-mounted actuator keys
Individually-coded actuator keys
Solenoid-locking (Model AZM161)
Gold contacts
Signal lamps (Pilot light or built-in LED)
Explosion-proof models (ATEX-compliant)
Key entry closure caps
Optional funnel entry
Optional M12 connector
Self-lifting terminal clamps (for
speedy installation)
Molded-in, easy-to-read terminal
markings (help ensure proper wiring)
IP67 sealed housing
(tolerant to hostile environments)
High-strength, corrosion-resistant
polymeric housing (no ground
connector required)
7 lbs. of built-in key holding
force resists guard opening
due to shock or vibration
(other holding force
options)
4 actuator-key
entry points,
for ease of
mounting
Rugged, tamperresistant, stainless
steel coded actuator
key (Individuallycoded keys available)
Optional “maintained” or
“ejecting” actuator key
(for application
versatility)
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Topic
Page
Alphanumeric Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Pictorial Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 5
About Schmersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Man-Machine Safeguarding Products
Selection Guides
• Keyed Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
• Keyed Interlock Switches with Solenoid Latching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
• Application Accessories
(Safety Door Handles, Enabling Devices, Safety Foot Control, Two-Hand Controls) . . . 105
• Emergency Cable-Pull Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
• Non-Contact Safety Sensors & Compatible Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
• Hinged Safety Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
• Safety-Rated Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
• Safety Light Curtains & Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
• Safety Pressure Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
• Fail-to-Safe Safety Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
• Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Appendices
• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Man-Machine
Safeguarding Requirements & Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Safety Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
• Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
• Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
• Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
• NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Copyright © 2007 by SCHMERSAL All Rights Reserved.
SCHMERSAL is continuously working to improve our product designs. Therefore we reserve the right to change product specifications/ratings and
other information contained in this catalog without notice. Proper installation and use of our products remains the customer’s responsibility.
2
ALPHANUMERIC PRODUCT INDEX
Product
Series
Page
Product
Series
Page
AES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
SDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
AZ15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
SHGV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
AZ16zi
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
SE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
AZ17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SEPK(G) . . . . . . . .e.w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
AZ17zi
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
SLC, SLG & SLB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
!
AZ200 . . . . . . . .e.w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
N
SMS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
AZ335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SRB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
AZ415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ST14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
AZM161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
STS . . . . . . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
AZM170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
T.C 235/236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
AZM200 . . . . . .e.w. !. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TESF . . . . . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
AZM415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
TESZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
AZS2305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
TFA/TFI . . . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
N
!
!
N
!
N
!
N
!
N
B25 . . . . . . . . . .e.w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
TG-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BNS16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
TKF/TKM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
BNS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
TV8S-521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
N
!
BNS33S . . . . . . .e.w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
TVS335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
BNS250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
TZF/TZM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
BNS260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TZG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
BNS30 & BNS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
TZK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
BNS303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Z332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
BNS333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Z/T235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
!
BNS-B20 . . . . . e
.w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
N
Z/T236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
BZ16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Z/T335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
C50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Z/T336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
!
CSS 34 . . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
N
CSS 180 . . . . . . .e.w. !. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
N
ZS71 & ZS71NA* . . . . . . e. w
. .! . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ES95 SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
ZS75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
FWS1205/2205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100/102
ZS75S (Bidirectional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
GFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ZS80 . . . . . . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
N
!
N !
w
S900 . . . . . . . . . e
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
MZM100 . . . . . . e. w
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
*
N
ZS73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
!
N
ZS441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ZSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3
PICTORIAL PRODUCT INDEX
ST14
AZ17 & AZ17zi
AZ15/16 & AZ16zi
Page 12
Page 14 & 18
Page 22 & 28
AZM170
AZM161
Page 60
Page 66
Keyed
Interlock Switches
w!
Ne
AZ 200
Selection Guide:
Page 11
Keyed
Interlock Switches
with SolenoidLatching
Selection Guide:
Page 59
w!
Ne
AZM 200
w!
Ne
MZM 100
B25
Page 76
TG-1
Page 106
Page 112
Page 114
ZS71
ZS73
ZS75
Page 126
Page 130
Page 134
BNS250 & BNS260
BNS33 & BNS33S
BNS303
BNS30 & BNS300
Pages 154 & 156
Pages 158 & 162
Page 164
Page 166
ES95 SB & TVS 335
TV8S-521
T.C 235/236
Pages 208 & 210
Page 212
Page 214
Application Accessories
(Safety Door Handles, Enabling
Devices, Safety Foot Switches)
w!
Ne
STS
Page 70
Page 32
w!
Ne
Selection Guide:
Page 105
Emergency Cable-Pull Switches
Selection Guide:
Page 125
Non-Contact
Safety Sensors &
Compatible
Safety Controllers
Selection Guide:
Page 153
Hinged Safety Interlock Switches
Selection Guide:
Page 207
Safety Light Curtains & Beams
Selection Guide:
Page 273
4
w! SLC, SLG & SLB
Ne
Safety Category 3
Pressure Mats &
Fail-to-Safe
Safety Edges
Page 263
SMS3 Series
Page 311
PICTORIAL PRODUCT INDEX
TZG
SDG
SHGV
AZ335
AZ415
1
Page 40
Page 44
Page 48
TZF/TZM
TKF/TKM
TZK
Page 54
Page 52
AZM415
AZS/FWS
2
Page 82
ZSD
Page 86
Page 94
Page 90
w! SEPK(G)
Ne
GFS
w!
Ne
Page 98
TFA/TFI
3
Page 116
Page 118
Page 122
ZS441
ZS75S Bidirectional
w!
Ne
ZS80
Page 124
w!
Ne
S900
4
Page 138
Page 142
BNS333
BNS16 & BZ16
Page 146
w!
Ne
BNS-B20
Page 150
w!
Ne
CSS 180
w!
Ne
CSS 34
5
Page 168
w! TESF & TESZ
e
N
Pages 170 & 172
Page 174
Page 176
Page 184
Z/T235/236 & Z/T335/336
Z332
C50
Safety-Rated
Limit Switches
6
Selection Guide:
Page 227
Pages 220 & 224
Pages 228, 236, 244, & 250
Page 256
SE Series
AES
SRB “Protect”
General &
Specific
Purpose Safety
Controllers
Page 317
Page 260
7
Page 189
Page 327
5
Turning Workplaces Into Safeplaces®
6
ABOUT SCHMERSAL
K.A. SCHMERSAL GmbH & Co. was founded as a family
business in 1945. The firm initially focused on the design
and manufacture of electromechanical switches for
industrial applications.
Our first products included heavy-duty, cast-encapsulated
limit switches for (post-war) civil engineering and
construction applications. This program quickly expanded
to include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
grey cast iron limit switches
light metal limit switches
robust precision limit switches
spindle limit switches
gear motor switches
elevator switch gears
CENELEC position switches
miniature snap-acting switches, and
command devices for machine and crane control
systems.
With this early post-war product program, the firm quickly
established itself as a specialist in monitoring, switching,
and controlling elevators, material handling systems,
machine tools, and other industrial equipment.
Many of these initial products satisfied unique requirements for safety switches. Such products included:
• explosion-proof switches for gasoline pumps
• door contacts and locks for personnel/freight
elevators
• cable monitoring switches for mountain cablecar
systems, and
• snap-acting limit switches featuring positive-opening
contacts for lignite diggers, construction cranes, and
other machinery.
Today the product range has expanded to include a
broad selection of non-contact electronic presence/position sensing sensors and switches. These are designed
using state-of-the-art inductive, capacitive, magnetic and
photoelectric technologies.
Armed with diverse electronic and electromechanical
capabilities, the firm has continued to welcome unique
customer-specific problems. Operating from their modern headquarters in Wuppertal, Germany, an industrial
suburb of Dusseldorf with a population of 400,000, the
firm’s 400 employees maintain close contact with their
worldwide customer base.
This close contact, coupled with a commitment to
respond to the needs of their customers, continues to
serve as a basis for continued new product development
to meet the constantly changing market.
By 1953 the company had established a reputation as a
leading producer of innovative machine guarding safety
switches.
SYSTEM SAFETY: PROTECTION
FOR MAN AND MACHINE
Recent trends for a safer workplace in many industries
have led the company to give this field even greater
attention. Newest product developments have focused
on advanced safety switches which satisfy the stringent
requirements of the harmonized European Economic
Community and its regulatory agencies.
GLOBAL COVERAGE:
Technical support and
inventory in more than
22 countries.
7
MAN-MACHINE SAFETY
THE SCHMERSAL SYSTEM:
A 360° APPROACH
CHANGING MAN-MACHINE
SAFEGUARDING RULES
For more than 50 years SCHMERSAL has dedicated
itself to understanding machine safety hazards. We have
made it our mission to develop defeat-resistant, fail-tosafe solutions using advanced safety switch technology. This catalog-handbook is a compilation of information that addresses the latest and most stringent industry safety
standards and regulations matched
with a broad selection of dependable solutions.
Today worker safety is an issue of major concern to manufacturers worldwide. OSHA guidelines, more stringent
ANSI standards, and the recently (1996) adopted
European Machinery Directive (EMD) are
evidence of the increased emphasis being
given to employee safety in the
workplace.
The day-to-day study of modern workplace safety is filled
with the minutiae of industry
regulations and standards. But
philosophically we look to a
higher standard in the work of
one of the world’s greatest
engineers, Leonardo da Vinci. A
true Renaissance genius, he was
a man whose fascination for the
human body and the principles of
physics resulted in his meticulous
anatomical drawings, numerous intricate
machines, and even a robotic knight that consisted of a system of cables and pulleys that controlled
the movement of articulated limbs. Arguably the world’s
first ergonomic engineer, Leonardo truly understood man
and his physiological relationship to machinery.
Like Leonardo, we at SCHMERSAL take a 360degree approach to safety. We evaluate
from every angle the potential for accidents and their prevention. We recognize the wide differences in each
work station. We take into account
specific guard design, as well as
the environmental and physical
considerations necessary to support machinery operation and
provide maintenance. We even
understand the frustrations and
all-too-human temptation some
machine operators feel to override
(bypass) the safety system.
Selected industry standards and
guidelines aimed at achieving
higher levels of safety are
reviewed in the section of this
Handbook/ Catalog entitled
“Safety Standards.” Each
defines
minimum
safety
requirements to which manufacturers and employees must
comply.
In so doing, they present new
challenges to the plant safety
specialist and equipment designer
…especially where safety guards
ancillary to the production equipment’s
functional design are required.
NEW SAFETY CONCEPTS
AND TECHNIQUES
The goal of these new and emerging guidelines is to provide heightened levels of
protection to machine operators,
helpers, and maintenance personnel. Toward this goal they have
embraced several new safety
system concepts including:
• positive-break contacts
• greater tamper-resistance
• positive-guided relays
• fault detection
• single component failure
control reliability
Conventional limit switches, proximity
sensors, magnet switches and
Different dynamics mean different soluother
classical
position-sensing and
tions. Different markets are subject to difcontrol
devices
traditionally
used as safety
ferent regulations. Our system of more than
interlocks
do
not
meet
contemporary
require200 interlock, magnetic and rope-pull switches
ments.
Consequently,
when
used
in
such
has earned SCHMERSAL a world-wide
International symbol for
applications,
they
are
regarded
as
unsafe.
reputation for reliability, flexibility, and
Positive-Break contacts
dependable quality.
8
“SAFETY-SPECIFIC” COMPONENTS
New switches, sensors and controls have been designed
specifically for safety applications. Each is intended to
overcome one or more of the limitations of conventional
“non-safety” components … and to satisfy one or more of
the current safety requirements inherent in the latest
industry standards and guidelines.
GUIDE TO APPLICATION SYMBOLS USED
THROUGHOUT THE CATALOG
These safety-specific components are the subject of this
catalog. They include:
• keyed interlock switches
• keyed interlock switches with solenoid latching
• sealed non-contact safety sensors
• safety foot switches
• push/pull operated emergency cable-pull switches
• two-hand controls
Sliding Guard Applications
• positive-break hinged safety switches
• safety light curtains/beams
• fail-to-safe safety edges
• safety pressure mats
• safety-rated limit switches
• safety controllers
Each of these components is designed to help the safety specialist and equipment designers to better address
their responsibility … to ensure that machinery, built or
purchased, does not expose the operators, helpers or
maintenance personnel to hazards.
SATISFYING YOUR NEEDS
We trust that this Catalog-Handbook, its companion catalogs, and our tutorial Manual and videos, will be useful
tools in the selection of suitable components to satisfy
your unique application requirements.Your needs are our
most important concern.
Hinged Guard Applications
We welcome your questions and comments, and would
appreciate your making us aware of any machine safeguarding requirements which cannot be satisfied with
available components.
Lift-off Guard Applications
9
Safer
by
Design
10
KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES
1
SELECTION GUIDE
Switch
Series
Housing
Material
Envelope
Dimensions
Contact
Configurations
Catalog
Page
ST14
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
⁄4" × 11⁄4" × 2"
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
12
AZ17
AZ17zi
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄4" × 11⁄4" × 21⁄2"
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
14
18
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄4" × 2" × 3"
1 NC
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
22
28
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄2" × 83⁄4" × 11⁄2"
2 PNP Safety Outputs
1 or 3 Diagnostic
Outputs
32
TZG
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
13⁄4" × 2" × 33⁄4"
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
40
SDG
Die-cast aluminum
13⁄4" × 2" × 6"
1 NO & 2 NC
2 NO & 1 NC
3 NC
44
48
AZ15/16
AZ16zi
New!
AZ200
3
AZ335
Die-cast aluminum
11⁄2" × 13⁄4" × 41⁄2"
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
SHGV
Die-cast aluminum
13⁄4" × 13⁄4" × 4"
1 NO & 1 NC
52
2 NO & 2 NC
54
(Key Transfer System)
AZ415
Die-cast aluminum
13⁄4" × 31⁄2" × 4"
11
SERIES ST14
Sub-Compact, Tamper-Resistant Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Compact design … only 3⁄4" × 11⁄4" × 2". Ideal where space
is limited.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Tamper-resistant design … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• Watertight design … meets NEMA 4 (IP67) washdown
and immersion requirements.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Top and side key-entry locations … provide installation
flexibility.
• Optional key designs … to meet diverse application
requirements.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
• Optional “side-entry” cable … please consult factory.
Description
The ST14 Series is designed for use with movable machine
guards which must be closed for operator safety. Their twopiece, tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC
contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven switches whose contacts can weld
or stick shut. Their NEMA 4 (IP67) rating make them ideal for
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments. Their
compact design allows use in applications where space is
severely limited.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Actuator key must be ordered separately)
Please see below.
Contacts
Part Number
(with key inserted)
ST14-10/1SK
1 NO & 1 NC
ST14 interlock switch (Sealed
switch. Contact mechanism
embedded in resin.)
2 NC
ST14 interlock switch (Sealed
switch. Contact mechanism
embedded in resin.)
Optional right-angle keys, close-radius keys and mounting
brackets provide application versatility.
Operation
The ST14 is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock
switch. It consists of a rugged, sealed switch mechanism and
a geometrically-unique actuating key. The actuating key is
typically mounted to the movable machine guard or access
gate. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are forced
to open by a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with the
actuating key. These positive-break contacts assure circuit
interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the
actuator key. (The NO contact closes upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contact(s) to close, and the NO contact to re-open. Their
tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,
bent wires or other readily available means.
Typical Applications
The ST14 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Their
compact, sealed (NEMA 4) design makes them ideal where
space is severely limited and/or where equipment is washeddown or subject to other hostile environments (i.e. business
machines, medical equipment, food processing machinery, et
al). Typical applications are the interlocking of protective
gratings, access doors/guards, hinged covers, access panels
and other movable guards.
ST14-20K
Note: All actuator keys feature integral vibration-tolerant mounting
washers.
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
ST14-B1
Standard B1 actuator key
ST14-B3
Close-radius actuator key (for mounting key
close to door hinge)
ST14-B5
Right-angle actuator key
ST14-Bracket
Optional switch or key mounting bracket
Note: All actuator keys feature integral vibration-tolerant mounting
washers.
®
12
Description
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ST14 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
Actuation Head: IP 20
–4°F to +175°F
> 106 operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
5.9" (with ST14-B1 and ST14-B5
actuator key)
1.97" (with ST14-B3 actuator key)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
6A (250VAC)
0.25A (220VDC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay)
Prewired with sealed PVC
UL-style 2464 4x20 AWG
cable one meter long*
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Electrical Connection
1
*Other cable lengths available. Please consult factory.
DIMENSIONS
ST 14-B1 (Standard key)
Right Angle Key
ST 14-B5
Minimum key entry
closing radius 150mm.
ST 14-Bracket Switch or
Key Mounting Bracket
mm
inch
Note: Side-entry cable available
(Please consult factory)
Angle view
24
0
36
1.42
7
.28
16
.63
9
23-24
11-12
5
8
5
8
ø 4,2
.17
ø8
.31
23
.91
ST14-10/1S
11 = red
12 = orange
23 = black
24 = brown
26
1.02
37
1.46
12
23
3,5
.14
ST 14-B3
Close Radius Key
SWITCHING SYMBOLS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
(Colors identify factory prewiring)
11
Side view
11
12
21
22
ST14-20
11 = red
12 = orange
21 = black
22 = brown
0
11-12
21-22
5
8
10°
11
.43
For close radius keys for mounting key
close to (within 50 mm) door hinge, order ST 14-B3.
13
SERIES AZ17
Compact Tamper-Resistant Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Compact design … only 11⁄4" × 11⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space
is limited.
• Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) … facilitates
fast, easy installation.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Eight optional key entry locations … depending upon
mounting arrangement.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of
safety circuit upon actuator key removal.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre
reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile
environments.
• “Padlockable” key for added security during
maintenance.
• Meets rigid IEC, BG, VDE, UL & CSA standards.
• Three styles of actuator key … accommodates a wide
variety of movable guards.
Description
The compact Series AZ17 is designed for use with movable
machine guards/access gates which must be closed for
operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in
hostile environments.
SPACE-SAVING
IDC CONTACTS
& CONNECTOR
Operation
The AZ17 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists
of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard. Upon
opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are forced to open
through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with the
actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assure circuit
interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the
actuator key. (The NO contact closes upon key removal.)
Note: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect.
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.
Typical Applications
The AZ17 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable
guards.
®
14
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ17 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Actuator key must be ordered separately)
Part Number
Contacts (with
actuator key inserted)
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
AZ17/170-B1
Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)
AZ17/170-B5
Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing
radius)
AZ17-B6
Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimum
closing radius)
AZ17/170-B11
Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimum closing radius)
Individually-coded key models available (Model AZ17zi)
(For extra security in “high-risk” applications)
AZ17/170-B15
Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimum
closing radius)
Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. Add
suffix “2243” for front of unit cable entry or suffix “2243-1” for
rear cable entry.
AZ17/170-B1-2245 Standard straight key with vibration-resistant
mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)
Note: Optional “quick-connect” ... add suffix “ST”
(e.g. AZ17-11zk-ST).
MS AZ 17-P
(See installation
on Page 20)
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting.
AZ17-B6 key required.
MS AZ 17-R/P
(See installation
on Page 20)
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or
perpendicular mounting. AZ17-B6 key
required.
Suffix “-ST”
Optional M12x1 quick-connect
AZ17-11zk
1 NO & 1 NC
AZ17-11zrk
1 NO & 1 NC
AZ17-02zk
2 NC
AZ17-02zrk
2 NC
Solenoid-latching models available. (Model AZM170)
1
SELECTED ACTUATOR KEYS
AZ17/170-B1
AZ17/170-B5
AZ17-B6
15
AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel, 1.4301
IP67
zk models: 1.2 pounds
zrk models: 7 pounds
8 mm (0.315 inches)
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)
–22°F to +175°F
> 106 operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET, pr EN 1088
UL & CSA
1.97" (with AZ17-B6 actuator key)
7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15
actuator key)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
4A/230VAC
2.5A/230VA (with “ST” quickconnect)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
6A (time-delay)
250V
Insulation displacement contacts
& connector for 18AWG flexible
stranded wire (0.75 mm2)
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Isolation Voltage
Type Terminals
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
AZ17-11z
AZ17-02z
13
21
0
4,2
7,6
13-14
21-22
8
11
MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT
16
11
21
14
22
0
12
22
4,2
8
11
11-12
21-22
8
11
AZ17 TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS
24
.94
1
23
.91
31
1.22
Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)
8,2
.32
22
.87
60
2.36
ø 4,2
.17
22
.87
ø 19
.75
8
.31
BLUE
BROWN
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
BLACK
AZ17-02z
Connections
AZ17-11z
AZ17-02z
AZ17-11z
same polarity; type four enclosure
30
1.18
22
.87
BLACK
20
.79
5
.2
M169
Pg
BLACK
0.
67
(1 0"
7)
ø 4-8
.16-.31
mm
inch
30
1.18
(Remove outer sleeve
from cable)
ACTUATOR KEYS
30
1.18
22
.87
20
.79
22
.87
20
.79
12
.47
37,5
1.48
33
1.30
60,5
2.38
33
1.30
36
1.41
10
.40
13
.51
4,3
.17
7,5
.30
20
.79
4,3
.17
22
.87
AZ17/170-B11
AZ17/170-B5
30
1.18
5,5
.27
30
1.18
4,3
.17
AZ17/170-B1
2
.08
8
.31
23
.91
2
.08
23
.91
2
.08
23
.91
20
.79
ø11
.43
ø 4,2
.17
12
.47
18
.71
6
.24
12
.47
4,3
.17
36
1.42
11
.43
2
.08
23
.91
a
b
28
1.10
20
.79
22
.87
30
1.18
13
.51
a
7
.28
b
23
.91
30
1.18
48
1.89
24
.94 8
.31
25
.98
22
.87
AZ17/170-B1-2245
8
.31
AZ17-B6
30
1.18
16
.63
30
1.18
4,2
.18
AZ17/170-B15
23
.91
17
SERIES AZ17zi
Individually-Coded Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
INDIVIDUALLY-CODED
ACTUATOR KEYS
(15,000 CODES)
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces
liability exposure.
• Individually-coded actuator key (15,000 codes) …
provides extra security in high-risk applications.
• Compact design … only 11⁄4" × 11⁄4" × 3". Ideal where space
is limited.
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation
flexibility.
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit
interruption upon actuator key removal.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL and
CSA.
Description
The compact Series AZ17zi are designed for use with
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator
safety. Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC
contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can
weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Operation
SPACE-SAVING
IDC CONTACTS
& CONNECTOR
The AZ17zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock
switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an
individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The
key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.
Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)
contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break
NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine
stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO
contacts close upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The
tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,
bent wires or other readily available means.
Typical Applications
The AZ17zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged
covers, access panels and other movable guards.
®
18
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ17zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE MODELS
(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and
1
⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)
Part Number
AZ17-11zi-B1
Description
Standard unit
Contacts (with
actuator key inserted)
1 NO & 1 NC
AZ17-11zi-B5
AZ17-11zi-B6R
AZ17-11zi-B6L
AZ17-02zi-B1
Standard unit
2 NC
AZ17-02zi-B5
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
MS AZ 17-P
(See installation
on Page 20)
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel
mounting
MS AZ 17-R/P
(See installation
on Page 20)
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or
perpendicular mounting
1
Mounting kits require use of the -B6 key
AZ17-02zi-B6R
AZ17-02zi-B6L
Note: Standard units feature 1.2 pounds of key retention force. For
unit with 7 pounds of key retention force, please add suffix “r”
to part number. Example: AZ17-11zir-B1
19
AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Key Retention Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel, 1.4301
IP67
zi models: 1.2 pounds
zir models: 7 pounds
8 mm (0.315 inches)
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)
–22°F to +175°F
> 106 operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET, pr EN 1088
UL & CSA
1.97" (with B6L or B6R actuator key)
7.87" (with B1 or B5 actuator key)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Isolation Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
4A/230VAC
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
6A (time-delay)
250V
Insulation displacement contacts
& connector for 18AWG flexible
stranded wire (0.75 mm2)
Note: Pre-wired (5 meter length) cable entry models available. See
optional accessories.
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
AZ17-11zi
13
21
14
22
0
4,2
7,6
13-14
21-22
8
11
8
11
AZ17-02zi
11
21
MS AZ 17 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT
(Eases installation and facilitates
adjustments due to guard misalignment)
MS AZ17-P
(for parallel
mounting)
20
MS AZ17-R/P
(for parallel or
perpendicular mounting)
12
22
0
4,2
11-12
21-22
8
11
AZ17zi TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS
1
Rm
in.
5.5
1" (
140
0.866"(22)
)
0.078"
(2)
0.216"
(5.5)
0.905"
(23)
22
.89
60
2.36
8,2
.32
B5 Actuator Key
0.314"
(8)
Rm
in.
5.5
1" (
140
1.18"(30)
0.866"(22)
0.787"(20)
)
8
.31
0.472"
(12)
0.169"
(4.3)
Rm
in.
7.87
" (2
00)
20
.79
5
.20
M169
Pg
0.59"
(15)
1.42" (36)
0.177"
(4.5)
ø 19
.75
0.216"
(5.5)
22
.87
0.511
(13)
23
.91
ø 4,2
.17
31
1.22
24
.94
0.787"(20)
0.169"
(4.3)
0.314"
(8)
0.393"
(10)
0.59"
(15)
1.18"(30)
Rm
in.
7.87
" (2
00)
1.30" (33)
0.177"
(4.5)
B1 Actuator Key
0.078"
(2)
30
1.18
mm
inch
30
1.18
0.787"(20)
0.866"(22)
0.169"
(4.3)
0.314"
(8)
22
.87
0.905"
(23)
ø 4-8
.16-.31
1.18"(30)
B6L Actuator Key
Switching Symbols (Colors identify -2243 factory prewired models)
B6R Actuator Key
0.866"(22)
GRN
RED
WHT
BLK
WHT
BLK
AZ17-02zi
Connections
0.165"
(4.2)
0.433"
(11)
0.944" (24)
0.905"
(23)
0.078"
(2)
AZ17-11zi
0.236"
(6)
GRN
0.157"
(4)
RED
0.787"(20)
0.314" 0.472" (12)
(8)
0.944"(21)
1.18" (30)
0.590"
(15)
AZ17-02zi
7
0.433"
(11)
Rm
1.9
in.
)
50
"(
Rm
1
in.
.97
50
"(
0.590"
(15)
)
R
mi
n.
1.9
7"
(50
)
0.314"
(8)
R
mi
n.
1.9
7"
(
50
)
0.314"(8)
AZ17-11zi
same polarity; type four enclosure
67
0.
(1
7)
0"
(Minimum radius: 50mm)
(Remove outer sleeve
from cable)
All dimensions in
inches (mm)
21
SERIES AZ15/16
Tamper-Resistant Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The Series AZ15/16 is designed for use with movable
machine guards/access gates which must be closed for
operator safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in
hostile environments.
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces
liability exposure.
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation
flexibility.
• Individually-coded actuator key option (15,000 codes)
… provides extra security in high-risk applications. See
AZ16zi.
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit
interruption upon actuator key removal.
• High key-retention force (7 pounds) … eliminates
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL and
CSA.
• Explosion-proof model and M12x1 quick-connect (“ST”)
available (Please consult factory).
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
Operation
The AZ15/16 electromechanical safety interlock switch
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes
upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to close and the NO contacts to re-open.
Typical Applications
The AZ15/16 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other movable
guards.
22
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ15/16 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE MODELS
ACCESSORIES
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter**
Actuator Key Sold Separately)
for AZ15/16 Keyed-Interlock Switches
Part Number
Contacts (with
actuator key inserted)
Part Number
AZ15-zvk (key spring returned)
1 NC
AZ15-zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*
1 NC
AZ16-zvk (key spring returned)
1 NO & 1 NC
AZ16-zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)*
1 NO & 1 NC
AZ16-02zvk (key spring returned)
2 NC
AZ16-02zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)* 2 NC
AZ15/16-BI-2024
Gasketed key caps
AZ15/16-CAP
Key entry closure caps
(for unused entry slots)
M20-CG
Cord grip (cable gland)
M20-1⁄2"P
Plastic 1/2" NPT adapter
M20-1⁄2"M
Metal 1/2" NPT adapter
AZ15/16-BI-1747
AZ15/16-B3-1747
Door holding magnet kit
(7 pound holding force)
(for use with AZ16…zvr-2254
models)
PL-M20-24V
24VAC/DC pilot light kit
PL-M20-120V
120VAC/DC pilot light kit
Add suffix -1637 to basic
part number when ordering
Gold contacts
(for AZ15/16zvr)
AZ15/16-BI-2053
(for use with AZ16...zvrk)
Ball latch kit
(Adjustable holding force up to
22 pounds)
#6-3⁄8SPH (Package of 6)
#6-3⁄8 Spanner Pan Head
Tamper-resistant sheet metal
screws (for actuator key mounting
or switch contact cover)
#10-32×1⁄2" OWOH
(Package of 6)
#10-32 One-Way Oval Head
Tamper-resistant machine screws
SZ16/335
Actuator Key Lockout Device
(Accepts up to 6 padlocks)
AZ15/16-AP
Alignment Pins (Set of 2)
MS AZ 15/16-P
(See illustration Page 29)
Adjustable mounting kit for
parallel mounting
MS AZ 15/16-R/P
(See illustration Page 29)
Adjustable mounting kit for
parallel and perpendicular
mounting
Suffix “-ST”
Optional M12x1 quick-connect
(2 contact models only)
AZ15/16-B2-1747
AZ16-12zvk (key spring returned)
1 NO & 2 NC
AZ16-12zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)* 1 NO & 2 NC
AZ16-03zvk (key spring returned)
3 NC
AZ16-03zvrk (key maintained upon insertion)* 3 NC
*Feature 7 pound key retention force. For lighter key retention force
(1-2 pounds) add suffix "2254".
**To order unit with cordgrip instead of 1⁄2" NPT adapter, add suffix
"CG" to part number...eg. AZ15-zvk-CG.
Short-radius actuator keys available. See below.
ACTUATOR KEYS
Part Number
Description
AZ15/16-B1
Standard Key (5.9" minimum closing radius)
AZ15/16-B2
Small radius actuating key (1.8" minimum
closing radius)
AZ15/16-B3
Small radius actuating key (1.3" minimum
closing radius)
AZ15/16-B6
Flexible-movement actuating key
AZ15/16-B1-2177
Funnel entry adapter with elongated
straight actuating key
AZ15/16-B6-2177
Funnel entry adapter with elongated
flexible-movement actuating key
AZ15/16-B1-KRH
Key Removal Hand-Grip Assembly with Key
Retention Chain (for use with AZ15...zvrk
and AZ16...zvrk)
Description
1
MS mounting kits require the use of the -B6 key
AZ15/16-2053 with ball catch
Holding force up to 22 pounds
AZ15/16-1747 with holding magnet
Holding force 7 pounds
Actuator Key Removal Handle
AZ15/16-B1-KRH
Lockout Device SZ16/335
(padlock not included)
23
AZ15/16 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Key Ejection Force
Key Retention Force
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel (defeat-resistant
design)
IP67
8 mm (0.315 inches)
"-zv" models: 3N ( 0.7 pounds)
"-zvr-2254 models: 5N (1.2 pounds)
"-zvr" models: 30N (7 pounds)
Approx. 15N (3.4 pounds)
–22°F to +175°F
> 1 million operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET-15
UL & CSA (A600, P300)
TUV
1.3" (with B3 actuator key)
1.8" (with B2 actuator key)
5.9" (with B1 actuator key)
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Isolation Voltage
Rated Impulse Withstand
Voltage
Type Terminals*
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2×2mm (minimum)
4A/230VAC (A600)
2.5A/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)
Slow-action, positive-break
NC contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay)
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible
stranded wire (2.5mm2)
* Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.
(Please consult factory).
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
AZ16z
DIMENSIONS
13
21
14
22
“Make before
break”
0
2,3 5,2
13-14
21-22
5,5
8
5,5
8
AZ16-02z
11
21
12
22
2,3
0
11-12
21-22
5,5
8
AZ16-12z
13
21
31
14
22
32
0
2,3 5,2
13-14
21-22
31-32
5,5
8
5,5
8
AZ16-03z
11
12
21
22
31
32
0
2,3
11-12
21-22
31-32
5,5
AZ15/16-2053 Ball Latch Kit
24
8
AZ15/16-2024 Gasketed Key Caps
AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key
Minimum
actuating radius
with actuator B1/B1-1747
AZ15/16-B1 Actuator Key
with AZ15/16-1747
Holding Magnet Kit
1
1
5
ø5,5
.22
56
2.24
16
.64
2
0.08
34,3
1.37
11
.43
40
1.58
5
.2
AZ15/16-B1-2177 Actuator Key
Minimum
actuating radius
with actuator
B1/B1-1747
23,3
0.93
27
1.08
4
Actuator B1 is standard for AZ15/16; it allows a
minimum actuating radius of 150 mm. Please note
that the center of rotation must be in the same
plane as the upper edge of the safety switch.
AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key
Ordering example:
Switch, holding magnet and
actuator: AZ16-zv/B1-1747
AZ15/16-B2 Actuator Key
with AZ15/16-1747
Holding Magnet Kit
mm
inch
Minimum
actuating
radius with
actuator
B2/B2-1747
Actuator B2 is particularly suitable for small
actuating radii over the wide edge of the
actuator (R=45 to 150mm). The basic setting
(angle 15°) provides a minimum radius of
45mm=1.8 in. For larger radii, the angle has
to be adjusted correspondingly by turning the
set screw counter-clockwise.
AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key
AZ15/16-B3 Actuator Key
with AZ15/16-1747
Holding Magnet Kit
Minimum actuating
radius with actuator
B3/B3-1747
Actuator B3 is particularly suitable
for small actuating radii over the narrow edge of the actuator (R=32 to
150mm). The basic setting (angle
10°) provides a minimum radius of
32mm=1.3in. For larger radii, the
angle has to be adjusted correspondingly by turning the set screw
clockwise.
25
AZ15/16 ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
AZ15/16-B1-2177 Funnel Entry Adapter
(with straight actuating key)
AZ15/16-B6 Flex Actuator Key
10
.4
16
.64
16
.64
2
0.08
a
56
2.24
b
ø 5,5
.22
40
1.6
7
0.28
ø5,5
.22
16
0.63
34,3
1.37
11
.43
11
.43
40
1.58
5
.2
56
2.2
75°
27,3
1.09
79°
23,3
0.93
27
1.08
27
1.08
52
208
6
.24
31,4
1.26
14
.56
8
.32
16
64
10,9
.44
26
28
1.12
1
Safer
by
Design
27
SERIES AZ16zi
Individually-Coded Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces
liability exposure.
• Individually-coded actuator key (15,000 codes) …
provides extra security in high-risk applications.
• Non-removable actuating head … heightens tamperresistance.
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation
flexibility.
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit
interruption upon actuator key removal.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant key mounting screws … deter
bypassing.
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL and
CSA.
Description
The Series AZ16zi are designed for use with movable
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.
Their tamper-resistant design, and positive-opening NC
contacts, provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional spring-driven switches whose contacts can
weld/stick shut. Their IP67 rating makes them ideal for
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Operation
The AZ16zi is a two-piece, electromechanical safety interlock
switch. It consists of a rugged switch mechanism and an
individually-coded, geometrically-unique actuating key. The
key must be directly hard-mounted to the movable guard.
Upon opening of the guard, the normally-closed (NC)
contact(s) are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The positive-break
NC contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine
stoppage) upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO
contacts close upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to re-close, and any NO contacts to re-open. The
tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple tools,
bent wires or other readily available means.
Typical Applications
The AZ16zi is intended for use as a safety interlock on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, hinged
covers, access panels and other movable guards.
Patented geometrically-unique tumbler
configuration
®
28
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZ16zi AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE MODELS
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
(Includes Individually-Coded Actuator Key and
1
⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter)
Part Number
AZ16-12zi-B1
Description
Contacts (with
actuator key inserted)
Standard unit
AZ16-03zi-B1
AZ16-12zi-B1-1747
AZ16-03zi-B1-1747
AZ16-12zi-B1-2024
AZ16-03zi-B1-2024
AZ16-12zi-B1-2053
AZ16-03zi-B1-2053
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
Standard unit with
built-in key actuator
magnet latch
Standard unit with
built-in slot rubber
seals on key actuator
Standard unit with
built-in ball-latched
key actuator
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
3 NC
Description
Cord grip (cable gland)
Spare Plastic 1⁄2" NPT adapter
(One supplied with each unit)
M20-1⁄2"M
AZ15/16-CAP
(3 per kit)
#6-3/8 SPH
(package of 6)
Metal 1⁄2" NPT adapter (optional)
Key entry closure caps
(for unused entry slots)
#6-3/8 Spanner Pan Head
Tamper-Resistant Sheet Metal Screws
(For use on AZ16zi housing terminal cover)
#10-32 One-Way Oval Head
Tamper-Resistant Machine Screws
(For use in mounting actuator key)
#10-32 × 1⁄2" OWOH
(package of 6)
1 NO & 2 NC
MS AZ 15/16 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT
(Eases installation and facilitates
adjustments due to guard misalignment)
Part Number
M20-CG
M20-1⁄2"P
AZ-SZ
1
AZ16zi Lockout Device
(accepts up to 6 padlocks)
PL-M20-24V
24VAC/DC LED Pilot Light Kit
PL-M20-120V
110VAC/DC Pilot Light Kit
MS AZ 15/16-P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting
MS AZ 15/16-R/P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or
perpendicular mounting
Suffix “-2177”
Funnel entry adapter (Must be ordered with
base switch for factory assembly…see
page 30)
TYPICAL INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS
EXAMPLE OF INDIVIDUALLY-CODED KEYS
15,000 codes provide extra security
in high-risk applications
MS AZ 15/16-R/P
(for parallel or
perpendicular mounting)
w!
Ne
MS AZ 15/16-P
(for parallel mounting)
29
AZ16zi TECHNICAL DATA
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Key Ejection Force
Insertion Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Key Withdrawal Speed
Minimum Closing Radius
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing plastic
Stainless steel
IP67
0.315 inches (8 mm)
3 N (0.7 pounds)
Approx. 15N (3.3 pounds)
–22°F to +175°F
1 million operations
UL & CSA, BG
A600, P300
2 meters/second (maximum)
9.8" (250mm)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Switching Action
Contact Rating
Rated Insulation Voltage
Thermal Current Rating
Current Rating
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Short Circuit Protection
Type Terminals*
AZ16-12zi
13
21
31
0
14
22
32
5,5
13-14
21-22
31-32
5,6
8
5,5
8
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
2 × 2 mm
Slow-action, positive-break
NC contacts
A600
500VAC
10A (300VAC)
6A @ 120VAC
4A @ 230VAC
2.5V/230VAC (with M12x1 quickconnect)
6kV
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 2.5 mm2
(AWG13) wire
*Optional plug-in M12x1 quick-connect available. Please consult
factory.
AZ16-03zi
11
12
21
22
31
32
0
11-12
21-22
31-32
5,5
“-2177” Funnel Entry Adapter
8
(Order as part of base switch…
e.g. AZ16-02z1-B1-2177)
5
.2
10
.4
DIMENSIONS
40,7
1.63
11
.43
5,5
.22
mm
inch
23
.9
40
1.58
56
2.24
52
208
6
.24
31,4
1.26
14
.56
8
.32
16
64
10,9
.44
30
28
1.12
AZ16zi INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
1
Applications: harsh environments
(coarse dirt, chips, flour…)
For holding light to medium-weight guards closed
31
SERIES AZ 200
Pulse-Echo Based
Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
• Tamper resistant … frequency-matched switch and
actuator required for operation.
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.
• Dual purpose handle … modern, ergonomic design—no
additional door handles are needed.
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …
satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.
*See Note Below.
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be
left quickly and safely.
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door
opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding
actuator.
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.
w!
e
N
AVAILABLE AZ 200 MODELS
(Actuator ordered separately below)
Model Number
Description
The AZ 200 pulse-echo based non-contact safety interlock is
designed for use with movable machine guards/access gates
which must be closed for operator safety.
The AZ 200 consists of an interlock switch and actuator unit
with door handle and optional emergency exit handle. The
actuator is always inserted into its housing, protecting the
actuator and the operator against damage and injury. Utilizing
pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator and interlock can
have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator still engages the
interlock. A sensor stimulates a coil in the actuator, which in
turns sends a signal back to the sensor. The pulse-echo
technology provides diagnostic information and detects and
indicates any misalignment at an early stage. Two different
actuator designs accommodate both sliding or hinged guards.
Description
AZ200SK-1P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, one diagnostic output
AZ200SK-T1P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, one diagnostic output
AZ200SK-3P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, three diagnostic outputs
AZ200SK-T3P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, three diagnostic outputs
Sensors available with M23 quick disconnect—Replace SK with ST in
catalog number.
Part number: SZ200
Description: Lockout tag, up to 5 padlocks
The AZ 200 interlock is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up
to 250 mA. It features a choice of one or three electronic
diagnostic outputs. These diagnostic outputs signal errors
before the safety outputs are switched off, thus enabling a
controlled shutdown of the machine.
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,
AZ 200 safety interlocks with one diagnostic output can be
wired in series without detriment to the control category.
Series wired AZ 200s continue to fulfill the requirements of
Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1 with door detection
sensors (without the need of a second switch).
Typical Applications
The AZ 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access
panels and other movable guards. The AZ 200 is suitable for
both sliding guards and hinged guards.
32
Safety Control Module Requirements
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor
outputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause the
outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. This
must be tolerated by the control module. The following
SCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommended
for this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES AZ 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS
AZ 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORS
AZ/AZM 200-B1-
AZ 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORS
AZ/AZM 200-B30-
A
G1
Leave blank (without emergency
exit handle)
P0 (with emergency exit handle)
Leave blank (without
door detection sensor)
T (with door detection sensor)
Leave blank (without
door detection sensor)
T (with door detection sensor)
L (Door hinge on left side)
L (Door hinge on left side)
R (Door hinge on right side)
R (Door hinge on right side)
Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a left
hand door, with door detection sensor and emergency
exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0
Leave blank (without
emergency exit handle)
P1 (with emergency
exit handle)
Ordering example: To order an AZ 200 actuator handle assembly for a left
hand door, with door detection sensor and emergency
exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1
DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 HANDLE
AZ/AZM 200-B1
for sliding doors
33
SERIES AZ 200 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Response Time
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life
Mounting
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
IP67
30N (7 pounds)
–25°C to +60°C
–25°C to +85°C
≤ 60ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
30g/11ms
1 million operations
40-45mm profiles
CE
BG
EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA Pending
EN 954-1
IEC 61508
Mode of Operation
Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Operating Current
No Load Current
Residual Current
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Rated Insulation Voltage
Safety Outputs
Safety Output
Operating Current
Safety Output
Operating Voltage
Signaling Output
Signaling Output
Operating Current
Signaling Output
Operating Voltage
Type Terminals
Inductive
24 VDC -15%/+10%
0.6A
0.1A
≤ 0.5mA
0.8kV
32 VDC
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof
0.25A per output
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
PNP, short-circuit proof
Max. 0.05A
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
Screw Terminals for up to 15
AWG flexible stranded wire
(1.5 mm2)
DIMENSIONS OF AZ 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE
A
Door hinge on
left-hand side
Door hinge on
right-hand side
Legend
A = Front and rear manual release
B = Cable entry M20 x 1,5
C = Emergency exit P1
D = Door handle G1
AZ/AZM 200-B30
for hinged doors
B
34
C
C
D
D
SERIES AZ 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs
Diagnostic Outputs
LED
Safety
Outputs
State AZ 200
AZ200...-3P2P
AZ200...-1P2P
OUT
OUT2
OUT3
OUT
Green
Door open
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Green
Door closed
0V
0V
0V
24 V
0V
Yellow & Green
Door closed and actuator inserted
24 V
24 V
0V
24 V
24 V
Blinking red (1–9 impulses)
Error: see blinking codes
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
0V
Diagnostic LED error codes
The blinking sequence of the red
LED of the AZ 200 identifies the
active error. The following errors
are indicated:
Blinking Codes (red)
Indication (red)
Meaning
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
5 blinking impulses
Target error
6 blinking impulses
Error target combination
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
Continuous red
Error
Meaning
Autonomous switch-off after
Cause
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although
the output is switched off
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although
the output is switched off
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
30 min.
Cross-wire between the output cables or error at
both outputs
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
30 min.
Temperature measurement indicates too high an
inner temperature
5 blinking impulses
Target error
0 min.
The difference between the code (frequency) of the
detected target and the set value is too large, false target
6 blinking impulses
Error target combination
0 min.
An invalid combination of targets was detected at
the 4 coils of the AZ200 T. (Current setting: latching
bolt detected & door target not detected => latch
breakage or tampering attempt)
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
30 min.
Internal hardware error
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
0 min.
Supply voltage too low or defective internal voltage
control
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
0 min.
Data comparison between the channels leads to
differences in the signal evaluation because of an
internal hardware error
35
SERIES AZ 200 WIRING EXAMPLES
WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING
WIRING COMPARTMENT
Meaning
Terminal
Supply Voltage
24 V
Supply Voltage
24 V
Safety Input 1
X1
Safety Input 2
X2
Ground
GND
Ground
GND
Safety Output 1
Y1
Safety Output 2
Y2
Diagnostic Output
OUT
Note: In case of single device wiring, the
bridge between the “24 V” terminal and
the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be
established; for series wiring, this bridge
must only be established in the first
device of the series.
WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZ 200
Only interlocks with one
diagnostic output can be
wired in series.
36
COMPATIBLE AZ 200 SAFETY CONTROLLER – SRB 301 LCB
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Fuse (Input Power)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Auxilliary Contacts)
Application Category
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type & Materials
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
Monitored Contact
Configuration
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
Number & Type Auxilliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling
Output)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
Feedback Monitoring
LED Displays
Conformity to Standards
Stop Category
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
24 V AC/DC
1 (Single or Dual channel)
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Contact Resistance
Air Cleaner &
Creepage Distance
Cable Connections
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA
Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
24 VDC, 2 A
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
≤ 30 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning,
positive-guided
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
• Screw terminals for
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
Terminal Labeling
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)
• Automatic
Yes
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
0
4
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Mechanical Life
Expectancy
Weight
Mounting
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
>107 switching cycles
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)
DIN rail (35mm)
Terminal Connections For Use With AZ 200
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
Monitored Input #1
(N.C.)
24
Monitored Input #2
(N.C.)
S12
Safety Output #3
(N.O.)
33
34
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic or
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset
X1
X2
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Auxiliary Output
(N.C.)
41
42
37
COMPATIBLE AZ 200 SAFETY CONTROLLER – SRB 324 ST
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Fuse (Input Power)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs Stop 0)
Switching Capacity
(Auxilliary Contacts)
Application Category
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type & Materials
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
Monitored Contact
Configuration
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
Number & Type Auxilliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling
Output)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
Feedback Monitoring
LED Displays
Conformity to Standards
Stop Category
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
24 V AC/DC
1 (Single or Dual channel)
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
3-PNP
Contact Resistance
Air Cleaner &
Creepage Distance
Cable Connections
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)
• Automatic
Yes
Green LEDs for:
• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
0 (3 safety outputs)
1 (2 safety outputs)
4
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)
• Internal glass fuse F1,
tripping current > 2.5 A
(reset approx. 1 second)
• Internal hybrid fuse F2,
tripping current > 1.0 A
(reset after interruption of
supply voltage)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)
61/62: 24 VDC, 2A max. (Dry)
AC-15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
≤ 30 ms
≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)
AgSnO, self cleaning,
positive-guided
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Mechanical Life
Expectancy
Weight
Mounting
45mm x 100mm x 121mm
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
>107 switching cycles
480 gm
DIN rail
Terminal Connections For Use With AZ 200
Supply Voltage
A1
Monitored Input #1
A2
S12
Safety Output #2 (NO)
23
X1
38
X2
33
X3
X4
13
Safety Output #4
Stop Category 1 (NO)
34
Monitored-Manual Reset
Safety Output #1 (NO)
S22
Safety Output #3 (NO)
24
Feedback Monitoring
Monitored Input #2
47
Automatic Reset
X4
X5
Safety Output #5
Stop Category 1 (NO)
48
57
Jumper
S31
14
S32
58
Auxiliary PNP Output
Y1
Y2
Y3
Safer
by
Design
39
SERIES TZG
Movable Machine Guard
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The Series TZG is designed for use with movable machine
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in
hostile environments.
Operation
The Series TZG electromechanical safety interlock switch
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes
upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.
Typical Applications
The Series TZG is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on movable machine guards which, when open,
expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine
hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective
gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels
and other movable guards.
40
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces
liability exposure.
• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator
head provides installation versatility.
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit
interruption upon actuator key removal.
• High key retention force (5 pounds) … eliminates
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.
• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.
• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.
TZG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter.
Actuator Keys Sold Separately)
Part Number
Contacts
TZG01.103
1 NO & 1 NC
TZG01.110
2 NC
Description*
Keyed interlock switch
with front* key entry and
slow action contacts.
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS
Part Number
Description
TZ/CO
Standard straight actuator key
(13" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CW
Right-angled straight actuator key
(11.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/COR
Radial entry actuator key
(11.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CK
Short straight actuator key
(6.3" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CWR
Right-angled bent actuator key
(11.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/COF/HIS.1
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)
(13.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/COF/HIS.2
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)
(13.8" minimum closing radius)
*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear.
1
TZ/CORF/HIS.1 Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)
(7.1" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CORF/HIS.2 Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)
(5.9" minimum closing radius)
DIMENSIONS
Dimensional base for actuator
41
TZG TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
42
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Galvanized steel
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
20N (4.8 pounds)
12.5mm
Approx. 20N (4.8 pounds)
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)
–13°F to +158°F
1 million operations (minimum)
>30g / 18ms
>15g / 10…200Hz
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-100
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
Dependent upon actuator key used.
Please see actuator key selection
chart.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2 × 3.5 mm
8A (250VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts (TZG models)
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (TZGP models)
10A (slow-blow) – TZG models
6A (slow-blow) – TZGP models
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid
wire (2.5mm2) or 13 AWG
stranded (1.5mm2) wire
TZG ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
ACTUATOR KEYS
TZ/CO
TZ/CW
TZ/COR
TZ/CWR
TZ/COF/HIS.1
TZ/COF/HIS.2
TZ/CORF/HIS.1
TZ/CORF/HIS.2
TZ/CK
1
43
SERIES SDG
Movable Machine Guard
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The Series SDG is designed for use with movable machine
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple
tools, bent wires or other readily available means. Their IP67
rating makes them ideal for interlocking safety guards in
hostile environments.
Operation
The Series SDG electromechanical safety interlock switch
consists of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometricallyunique actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable
guard. Upon opening of the guard the NC contact(s) are
forced to open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical
linkage with the actuating key. These positive-break NC
contacts assure circuit interruption (and machine stoppage)
upon removal of the actuator key. (The NO contact closes
upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contacts to close and the NO contact to re-open.
Typical Applications
The Series SDG is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on movable machine guards which, when open,
expose the operator/maintenance personnel to machine
hazards. Typical applications are the interlocking of protective
gratings, access doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels
and other movable guards.
44
• Highly tamper-resistant actuating mechanism … difficult
to defeat with simple tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces
liability exposure.
• Four optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator
head provides installation versatility.
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … assure circuit
interruption upon actuator key removal.
• Built-in retention force (1.2 pounds) … eliminates
inadvertent opening of guard due to shock/vibration.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical
abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates
the most hostile environments.
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.
• Funnel-shaped key entry … forgiving of key misalignment.
• Other 2-contact configurations available … please
consult factory.
SDG AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter.
Actuator Keys Sold Separately)
Part Number
Contacts
SDG01.1044
2 NO & 1 NC
SDG01.1103
1 NO & 2 NC
SDG01.1110
3 NC
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS
Part Number
Description*
Keyed interlock switch
with front* key entry and
slow action contacts.
*Field-rotatable for key entry from right, left or rear. Units are supplied with tamper-resistant (one-way) screws to replace the standard screws after rotating the actuator head for desired direction
of key entry.
Description
BO
Standard straight actuator key
(20" minimum closing radius)
BOW
Right-angled straight actuator key
(20" minimum closing radius)
BOR
Radial entry actuator key
(10" minimum closing radius)
BOWR
Right-angled bent actuator key
(10" minimum closing radius)
BOF/HIS.1
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)
(13.8" Minimum closing radius)
BOF/HIS.2
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)
(13.8" Minimum closing radius)
1
DIMENSIONS
M20x1
M20x1
5.5mm
M20x1
45
SDG TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
46
Cast aluminum with enamel paint
Steel (chromated)
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67 (Switch housing)
IP00 (Reversing and locking head)
5N (1.2 pounds)
12.5mm
Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)
Approx. 5N (1.2 pounds)
–13°F to +158°F
1 million operations (minimum)
>30g / 18ms
>15g / 10…200Hz
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-100
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
Dependent upon actuator key used.
Please see actuator key selection
chart.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2 × 3.5 mm
8A (250VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
10A (slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid
wire (2.5mm2) or 13 AWG
stranded (1.5mm2) wire
SDG ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
ACTUATOR KEYS
BO
BOW
BOR
BOWR
BOF/HIS.1
BOF/HIS.2
1
47
SERIES AZ335
Tamper-Resistant Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant die-cast aluminum housing
… tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Eight optional key entry locations … depending upon
mounting of rotatable mounting head.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerant to
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Tapered key entry ports … tolerant to key misalignment.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
• Lockout accessory … prevents key entry and switch
actuation.
• Optional M12x1 quick-connect … please consult factory.
®
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Description
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Adapter. Actuator keys sold separately)
The AZ335 Series is designed for use with movable machine
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
the switch’s tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with
simple tools, bent wires or other readily available means.
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal
for interlocking safety guards in industrial and hostile
environments.
Part Number
1 NO & 2 NC
AZ335-03ZRK
3 NC
Note: Available with optional M12x1 quick-connect.
Please consult factory.
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS
Part Number
AZ335/355-B1
Operation
The AZ335 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists
of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.
Upon opening of the guard, the NC contact(s) are forced to
open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with
the actuating key. These positive-break NC contacts assure
circuit interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of
the actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)
When the guard is closed, the actuating key forces the NC
contact(s) to close, and the NO contacts to re-open.
Contacts (with key inserted)
AZ335-12ZRK
Description
Straight actuator key.
AZ335/355-B1-2245 Standard actuator key with rubber
grommeted mounting holes.
AZ335/355-B5
Right angle actuator key.
AZ335/355-B6
Adjustable short-radius actuator key.
AZ335/355-B5-Flex Floating standard actuator key (tolerant to
x and y axis misalignment of ±5mm).
AZ335/355-B6-Flex Floating standard short-radius actuator key
(tolerant to x and y axis misalignment of
±5mm).
ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Typical Applications
The AZ335 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access
doors/panels, perimeter access gates, hinged covers and
other movable guards on textile machinery, packaging
equipment, machine tools, assembly machinery, robot work
cells and food/chemical processing equipment.
48
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Description
AZ335/355-1990
Key entry port covers (two-part package).
SZ16/335
Lockout device (prevents key entry and
switch actuation). Accepts up to six padlocks.
AZ335 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Key Holding Force
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diecast aluminum with baked
enamel finish
Stainless steel
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
10.7 mm (0.4 inches)
Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)
–22°F to +195°F
> 107 operations
30 N (7 pounds) (“R” models only)
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET-15
UL & CSA
B1 & B5 keys: 150mm
B6, B5-Flex & B6-Flex keys: 100mm
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2 × 1.25mm (minimum)
4A (230VAC)
25A/230VAC (with optional
M12x1 quick-connect)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay)
500VAC
6kV
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
1
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG
flexible stranded wire (2.5mm2)
DIMENSIONS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
36
1.42
AZ335-12zrk
14
22
32
35
1.38
13
21
31
114
4.49
AZ335-03zrk
12
21
22
31
32
5,3
0.21
7,3
0.29
60
2.36
30,5
1.20
11
30
1.18
40,5
1 59
17
0.67
M20
38
1.50
49
AZ335 INDIVIDUALLY-CODED ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
ø
ACTUATOR KEYS
50
AZ335/355-B1
AZ335/355-B1-2245
AZ335/355-B5
AZ335/355-B5-Flex
AZ335/355-B6
AZ335/355-B6-Flex
1
Safer
by
Design
51
SERIES SHGV
Cable-less Keyed Mechanical Safety Guard
Interlock with Key Transfer System
Features & Benefits
• Highly tamper resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, thereby reducing liability exposure.
• Four optional key entry positions … provides installation
versatility.
• Three optional locking cylinder locations … provides
installation versatility.
• Corrosion resistant … tolerates hostile environments.
• Funnel shaped entry … forgiving of mechanical actuator
key misalignment
• Low cost guard locking … eliminates wiring at the guard.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards …
Selector switch: UL, CSA, IEC, BG, VDE
Mechanical key locking device: IEC, BG, VDE
Description
The SHGV Series consist of a guard-mounted mechanical
locking device and a 2-position key operated selector switch
for control panel mounting. This unique key transfer system
assures the removal of power before allowing the access
control guard to be open … without the need for electrical
wiring at the interlocked machine guard location.
AVAILABLE MODELS
Part Number
Description
SHGV/L1 (*) ESS21S2/103
Lock Barrel Left
Operation
SHGV/R1 (*) ESS21S2/103
Lock Barrel Right
When the machine guard is open the transfer key (for
operating the 2-position selector switch) cannot be withdrawn
from the guard locking mechanism.
SHGV/B1 (*) ESS21S2/103
Lock Barrel Rear
SHGV/LD1 (*) /
(*) ESS21S2/103
Lock Barrel Left & Lock Barrel
in Front Cover
SHGV/RD1 (*) /
(*) ESS21S2/103
Lock Barrel Right & Lock Barrel
in Front Cover
Upon closing of the guard, the mechanical actuator key
permits the transfer-key to be turned (locking the guard) and
withdrawn. The transfer-key can now be removed and inserted
into the 2-position selector switch, allowing it to be operated
(e.g. power to be turned on) … trapping the transfer key in the
“on” position.
To unlock (open) the guard, the selector switch must be
turned to the off position. The transfer-key can now be
withdrawn and inserted into the guard-locking mechanism for
release of the mechanical actuator key and opening of the
guard.
The two lock barrel version allows the removal of a second
transfer key when the mechanical actuator key has been
released. This second transfer key prevents the removal of the
“power control” transfer key from the keyed interlock. Thus it
can be removed from the interlock by the operator to protect
against the inadvertent start-up of the equipment.
Includes guard device SHGV with standard BO actuator
element, keyed selector switch ESS21S2, and contact block
EF103 ( 1NO/1NC)
(*) Individual key identification code stamped on selector
switch cylinder.
Note:
This system is recommended for applications in which there
is no residual motion or hazard after the removal of power.
For applications in which there is residual motion or the
presence of a hazard immediately following the removal of
power, a solenoid-locking console ( Model SVE) is recommended. Please consult factory.
Typical Applications
Recommended for use where wiring directly to the movable
guard is cost prohibitive or subject to damage due corrosive
chemicals or other harsh environmental conditions.
®
52
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES SHGV TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protection Class
Actuating Forces
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Material
Housing
SHG Cover
Mechanical life
Shock resistance
Vibration resistance
Climatic resistance
IP 65 (Housing)
IEC/EN 60529
IP 00 (Control Head) IEC/EN 60529
Insertion of actuating element - 15 N
Withdrawal of actuating element - 5 N
- 25 °C to + 70 °C
- 40 °C to + 80 °C
ALsi 12 painted signal red (RAL 3000)
Steel passivated with
Perbunan seals(oil and gasoline resistant)
2 x 106 operating cycles
> 30 x g / 18ms
> 15 x g/10 ... 200 Hz
40/91 to DIN 50015 FW 24 to DIN 50016
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Conformity to Standard
Protection Class
Contacts
Rated breaking capacity
Rated operating current
Rated insulation voltage
Thermal test current
Utilization Category
Max. fuse rating
Ambient temperature
Switching frequency
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529
Fine silver
230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A
230Vac/6A - 400VAC/4A
400VAC / 450VDC
10 A
AC-15; DC-13
10 A (slow blow)
- 25 °C to + 80 °C
6000 s/h
1
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR SHGV GUARD LOCKING DEVICE
53
SERIES AZ415
Tamper-Resistant Movable
Machine Guard Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon key removal.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical
abuse without damage.
• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds
… permits use of switch as door latch.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … UL, CSA, IEC,
BG and VDE.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Actuator key sold separately … see below)
Description
The AZ415 Series is designed for movable machine
guards/access gates which must be closed for operator
safety. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut. And
their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with simple
tools, bent wires or other readily available means.
Part Number
Contact Configuration
(AZ415 - Switch Block S1*/
with actuator key inserted
Switch Block S2)
(Switch Block S1*/Switch Block S2)
AZ415-11/11zpk
(formerly p/n AZ415-22zpk)
2 NO / 2 NC
AZ415-11/02zpk
1 NO & 1 NC / 2 NC
AZ415-02/11zpk
2 NC / 1 NO & 1 NC
AZ415-02/02zpk
2 NC / 2 NC
*Only Switch Block S1 has positive-break contacts.
Operation
ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIES
The AZ415 electromechanical safety interlock switch consists
of a rugged switch mechanism and a geometrically-unique
actuating key. The key is mounted to the movable guard.
Upon opening of the guard, the NC contacts are forced to
open through a direct (non-resilient) mechanical linkage with
the actuating key. These NC contacts assure circuit
interruption (and machine stoppage) upon removal of the
actuator key. (The NO contacts close upon key removal.)
In the closed position, the guard is held shut by an adjustable
ball catch integral to the AZ415 housing.
Typical Applications
The AZ415 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch on
movable machine guards which, when open, expose the
operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards. Typical
applications are the interlocking of protective gratings, access
doors/gates, hinged covers, access panels and other
movable guards.
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
54
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Part Number
Description
AZM415-B1
Linear entry actuator key
AZM415-B2
Small radius x-axis entry actuator key (9.8"
minimum closing radius)
AZM415-B3
Small radius y-radius entry actuator key (9.8"
minimum closing radius)
AZ/AZM415-B4PS
Slide bolt actuator key
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Actuator Key
Holding Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum with blue
enamel finish
Die-cast aluminum
IP67
0.2 inches (5mm)
Depending upon ball catch setting
(3.5 pounds minimum)
Adjustable, 2.2 to 110 pounds
-13°F to +175°F
1 million operations
IEC 947-5-1
BG-GS-ET-19
VDE 0660-200
9.8" (250 mm) with B2 or B3
actuating key
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2mm x 2mm
4A (230VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand
Type Terminals
1
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 1.5mm2
(15AWG) flexible stranded wire
8
.315
22
.87
60,5
2.38
ø6,5
.26
105
4.13
46
1.81
26
1.02
15
.59
86
3.39
8,6
.34
DIMENSIONS (mm)
ø11
.43
8,6
0.34
36,5
1.44
88
3.46
M20
mm
inch
WIRING DIAGRAM
(AZ415-11/11 shown)
55
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS
B2 Actuating radii
For hinged doors over the wide edge
of the actuator
B3 Actuating radii
For hinged doors over the small edge
of the actuator
Dowel holes are also provided in the
actuator body. With the use of dowel
pins the removal of the actuator can be
prevented.
By turning the adjusting screw “a,” the
actuator can be brought into any
desired position.
Both actuators can also be used on
sliding doors.
Recommended key clearance
greater than 3 mm
> 3 mm
56
AZ415 TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS
55
2.17
1
56
2.20
21
.83
35
1.38
20
.79
0-6
0-.24
15
.59
7
.28
30
1.18
6,5
.26
19
.75
mm
inch
B1 Actuator
69,5
2.74
125
4.92
18,5
9
.35
8
.35
22
.87
237
9.33
60
2.36
24
.94
44
1.73
10<3
17
.67
6,4
.25
6
.24
165
6.50
B4pS actuator for hand operated locking
Hand operated locking actuator
The hand operated lock bolt has the
following advantages:
1. No further mechanical expenditures
such as handles or levers are necessary.
2. The shearing forces on the actuator
is 25,000 N (5,500 lbs.).
3. Simple installation of the unit.
4. Observing the actuating radius is
not necessary.
5. An open guard door cannot fall shut
and lock, causing the switch to be
actuated. The door must be manually closed and locked.
6. To insure personal safety when hazardous conditions are present,
three holes are provided for padlocking which prevents the door
from being locked.
57
Safer
by
Design
58
KEYED INTERLOCK SWITCHES
WITH SOLENOID LATCHING
New!
2
New!
SELECTION GUIDE
Switch
Series
Housing
Material
Envelope
Dimensions
Contact
Configurations
Catalog
Page
AZM170
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄4" × 21⁄2" × 5"
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
60
AZM161
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄4" × 31⁄2" × 51⁄8"
2 NO & 4 NC
3 NO & 3 NC
66
New!
AZM200
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
13⁄4" × 9" × 2"
2 PNP
70
New!
MZM100
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
13⁄4" × 71⁄4" × 13⁄4"
2 PNP Safety Outputs
1 Diagnostic Output
76
TZF/TZM
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
11⁄2" × 4" × 5"
2 NO & 1 NC
82
TKF/TKM
Die-cast aluminum
21⁄2" × 31⁄2" × 8"
2 NO & 2 NC
86
TZK
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
13⁄4" × 2" × 7"
1 NO & 2 NC
90
AZM415
Die-cast aluminum
2" × 5" × 51⁄2"
2 NO & 2 NC
3 NO & 3 NC
94
AZS 2305 Fail-to-Safe Timer & FWS Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitors
98
59
SERIES AZM170
Solenoid-Latching Machine Guard
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The AZM170 Series is designed for machines/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
• Compact design … only 11⁄4" × 3" × 41⁄4". Ideal where space
is limited.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure interruption of
safety circuit upon actuator key removal.
• Two key entry locations … provide mounting flexibility.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, high-impact glass-fibre
reinforced housing … tolerates the most hostile
environments.
• High-strength stainless steel actuator key … tolerant to
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Three styles of actuator key … accommodate a wide
variety of movable guards.
• Easy-to-wire screw terminals … facilitates fast installation.
• “Power-on” or “Power-off” latching option … for
application versatility.
• Built-in manual unlatching release (via special
triangular key) … for easier installation.
• “Padlockable” key … for added security during
maintenance.
• Meets rigid IEC, UL, CSA, BG, VDE standards.
• Units available with M12x1 quick-connect.
(Please consult factory).
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position
and solenoid-latching pin position contacts. These permit the
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.
The AZM170 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock
switch joined to a solenoid-latching mechanism. Both the
safety switch and solenoid mechanism feature “positive-break”
contacts. In addition the actuator key features a built-in latch
(unlocked key holding force of 7 pounds), and an auxiliary
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).
Each unit is supplied with a cord grip and a cap to seal the
unused key entry port in the solenoid-latching mechanism.
Typical Applications
The AZM170 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical
applications are textile machines, stamping presses,
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.
Two optional key entrances
®
60
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZM170 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
(Order desired actuator key separately)
Part Number
Available Contacts
(with actuator key inserted)
Locking via spring. Unlocking via energizing of solenoid.
AZM170SK-11zrk-2197-*
1 NO & 1 NC
AZM170SK-02zrk-2197-*
2 NC
AZM170SK-12/00zrk-2197-*
1 NO & 2 NC
AZM170SK-11/11zrk-2197-*
2 NO & 2 NC
AZM170SK-02/01zrk-2197-*
3 NC
AZM170SK-02/10zrk-2197-*
1 NO & 2 NC
Locking via energizing of solenoid. Unlocking via spring.
(See Note 1 below)
AZM170SK-11zrka-*
1 NO & 1 NC
AZM170SK-02zrka-*
2 NC
AZM170SK-12/00zrka-*
1 NO & 2 NC
AZM170SK-11/11zrka-*
2 NO & 2 NC
AZM170SK-02/01zrka-*
3 NC
AZM170SK-02/10zrka-*
1 NO & 2 NC
Individually-coded key models available. (Model AZM170zi).
(For extra security in “high-risk” applications.)
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via the addition of one
of the following suffix codes:
Voltage
24VAC/DC
115VAC
230VAC
Part Number
Description
AZ17/170-B1
Standard key (7.87" minimum closing radius)
AZ17/170-B5
Right-angle key (7.87" minimum closing
radius)
AZM170-B6
Flexible, close-radius key (1.97" minimum
closing radius)
AZ17/170-B11
Elongated standard straight key (7.87" minimum closing radius)
AZ17/170-B15
Elongated right-angle key (7.87" minimum
closing radius)
AZ17/170-B1-2245
Standard straight key with vibration-resistant
mounting (7.87" minimum closing radius)
AZM-KEY
Solenoid latch bypass/override key
(for locking via spring models only)
MS AZM 170-P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting
MS AZM 170-R/P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or
perpendicular mounting
AZS2305
Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 98)
FWS1205B
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 100)
2
MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys
MS AZM 170 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT
(Eases installation and facilitates
adjustments due to guard misalignment)
Add Suffix
-24VAC/DC
-115VAC
-230VAC
Note: AZM170SK-xx/yy versions are available as 24VAC/DC only.
Example: AZM170sk-11zrk-24VAC/DC designates a switch with
a 24VAC/DC solenoid which unlocks upon energizing
of solenoid.
MS AZM 170-P
(for parallel mounting)
Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be
opened in the event of a power failure. Generally
accepted safety standards/practices suggest this
model only be used after conducting a thorough
risk evaluation in the context of the application.
MS AZM 170-R/P
(for parallel or
perpendicular mounting)
Solenoid-latch bypass/override key
(for locking via spring models only)
61
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Key Holding
Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Closing Force
Locking Force
Operating Temperature
Solenoid Operating
Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel
IP67
30N (7 pounds)
11 mm (0.440 inches)
Approx. 12N (2.7 pounds)
Approx. 1000N (225 pounds)
–22°F to +175°F
–7°F to +140°F
> 106 operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET, EN 1088
UL & CSA
1.97" (with B6 actuating key)
7.87" (with B1, B5, B11 and B15
actuating key)
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Isolation Voltage
Type Terminals*
Solenoid Supply Voltages
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
4A/230VAC
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
6A (time-delay)
250V
Screw terminals
24VDC/AC
110VAC 40-60 Hz
230VAC 40-60 Hz
Max. 10 Watts
*Optional insulation displacement connection (IDC) or M12x1
quick-connect terminations available. Please consult factory.
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
(Power-to-unlock)
(Power-to-lock)
AZM 170SK-11
AZM 170SK-11
A1
14
22
A2
13
21
32
AZM 170SK-02
AZM 170SK-02
A1
12
22
A2
11
21
32
Note:
Above diagrams are with actuator key
inserted and solenoid de-energized.
62
Note:
Above diagrams are with actuator key
inserted and solenoid de-energized.
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
(Power-to-unlock)
(Power-to-lock)
AZM 170SK-12/00zrk
AZM 170SK-12/00zrka
2
AZM 170SK-11/11zrk
AZM 170SK-11/11zrka
AZM 170SK-02/01zrk
AZM 170SK-02/01zrka
AZM 170SK-02/10zrk
AZM 170SK-02/10zrka
Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.
63
AZM170 TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS
108
4.25
8
.31
ø 4,2
.17
76,5
3.01
8,2
.32
31
23 1.22
.91
17
.67
24
.94
ca. 24
.94
22
.81
15
.59
90
3.54
ø 4-10
.16-.39
30
1.18
45
1.77
mm
inch
M16
M20
ACTUATOR KEYS
7,5
.30
30
1.18
22
.87
20
.79
22
.87
20
.79
12
.47
37,5
1.48
33
1.30
60,5
2.38
33
1.30
36
1.41
10
.40
13
.51
4,3
.17
20
.79
4,3
.17
22
.87
AZ17/170-B11
AZ17/170-B5
30
1.18
5,5
.27
30
1.18
4,3
.17
AZ17/170-B1
2
.08
8
.31
23
.91
2
.08
23
.91
2
.08
23
.91
AZ17/170-B15
AZM170-B6
AZ17/170-B1-2245
30
1.18
4
.16
22
.87
ø 4,2
.17
24
.94
32
1.26
b
7
.28
a
18
.71
13
.51
48
1.89
12
.47
25
.98
20
.79
ø11
.43
8
.31
16
.63
30
1.18
a
64
b
28
1.10
20
.79
22
.87
30
1.18
30
1.18
12
.47
4,3
.17
11
.43
36
1.42
2
.08
23
.91
23
.91
2
08
23
.91
2
Safer
by
Design
65
AZM161
Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The AZM161 Series is designed for machines/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. There is a mechanical linkage preventing the solenoid position contacts from
changing unless the key is inserted (guard closed).
The AZM161 consists of an electromechanical safety interlock
switch section with “positive-break” NC contacts and an
actuator key. In addition, the solenoid mechanism features 1
NO and 2 NC solenoid-latching monitoring contacts, and an
auxiliary manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid
in installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).
Operation
The AZM161 electromechanical safety interlock switch
assembly consists of a rugged switch-solenoid-latching
mechanism and a geometrically-unique locking actuator key.
The switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable
machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position
by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts
close upon key removal.
The machine is prevented from starting until the actuating key
is inserted (guard is closed) and the solenoid has locked it in
the closed position.
66
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous
areas until safe conditions exist.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before
“closed” safety signal is provided.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental
requirements.
• High-strength, stainless-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Four optional key entry locations … provide installation
flexibility.
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree
of safety.
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking” models … for application versatility.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, UL
and CSA.
• Wide selection of accessories … to meet diverse
application requirements.
Typical Applications
The AZM161 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical
applications are textile machines, stamping presses,
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.
Optional Safety Controller (see page 328) and
Standstill Monitor (see pages 100 & 102).
AZM161 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
AVAILABLE KEYS & ACCESSORIES
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Plastic Adapter. Actuator
key sold separately)
for AZM161 Keyed-Interlock Switches
Part Number
Contacts
AZM161SK-12/12rk-
AZM161SK-12/12rka-
2NO & 4 NC
2NO & 4 NC
Standard actuating key
Actuating key locked by
spring and unlocked by
energizing solenoid.
AZM161-B1E
Standard actuating key with heavy-duty
mounting bracket
AZM161-B6
Small radius actuating key
Actuating key locked by
energizing solenoid and
unlocked by spring. (See
Note 1 below)
AZM161-B6-2177
Funnel entry adapter with elongated
flexible-movement actuating key
AZM-Key
Solenoid-latch bypass key
M16-CG
Cord grip (cable gland)
M16-1⁄2"P
Plastic 1⁄2" NPT adapter
M16- ⁄2"M
Metal 1⁄2" NPT adapter
PL-M16-24V
24VAC/DC pilot light kit
Add Suffix
-24VAC/DC
-110/230VAC
Example: AZM161SK-12/12rk-24VAC/DC
Add suffix “T” after the “k” for Manual Emergency Release
Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be opened
in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted
safety standards/practices suggest this model
only be used after conducting a thorough risk
evaluation in the context of the application.
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
MS AZM 161 ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING KIT
(Eases installation and facilitates
adjustments due to guard misalignment)
MS AZM 161-R/P
(for parallel or
perpendicular mounting)
Description
AZM161-B1
Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the
following suffix codes:
Voltage
24VAC/DC
110/230VAC
Part Number
Description
1
PL-M16-120V
120VAC/DC pilot light kit
Add suffix -1637
to basic part
number
Gold contacts
MS AZM 161-P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel mounting
MS AZM 161-R/P
Adjustable mounting kit for parallel or
perpendicular mounting
AZS2305
Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 98)
FWS1205B
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 100)
2
MS mounting kits require the use of -B6 keys
Solenoid-latch bypass key
(for locking via spring models)
MS AZM 161-P
(for parallel mounting)
67
AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Solenoid Locking Force
Key Return Force
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Stainless steel
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
30N (7 pounds)
8mm (0.315 inches)
10N (Approx. 2.4 pounds)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals*
Approx. 15 N (3.4 pounds)
–13°F to +104°F
1 million operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
Available Solenoid
Supply Voltages (Vs)
2,000N (440 pounds)
0N
5.9" (150mm) with B1 and B1E
actuating key
3.7" (95mm) with B6 actuating key
Solenoid Power
Consumption
Solenoid Duty Cycle
Solenoid Pull-in Voltage
Solenoid Drop-out Voltage
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2 × 2 mm (minimum)
4A (230VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay)
250VAC
6kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible
stranded wire (2.5mm2)
24VDC, 110VDC, 230VDC
24VAC/50Hz
115VAC/60Hz
230VAC/50Hz
10W (maximum)
100%
(0.85 to 1.1) Vs
(0.2 to 0.75) Vs
*Optional cage clamp terminations available.
Please consult factory.
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Solenoid-mechanism not energized)
AZM 161SK-12/12rk
AZM 161SK-12/12rka
68
Note: Above diagrams are with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.
AZM161 TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (Switch & Actuator Keys)
Ø4
.18
72
2.83
18
.71
8
.31
40
1.57
90
3.54
2
7
.28
29
1.14
78
3.07
5,5
.22
M16
(AZM161SK-12/12… only)
M16
30
1.18
30
1.18
M16
56
2.20
130
5.12
AZM161-B1
mm
inch
AZM161-B1E
AZM161-B6
b
56
2.20
ø 5,5
.22
2
.08
a
30
1.18
14
.55
10
.39
30
1.18
ø5,5
.22
ø10,5
.41
27
1.06
2
.08
16
.63
27
1.06
2
.08
ø5,5
.22
32,7
1.29
32,7
1.29
5
.20
16
.63
11
.43
5
.2
40 +- 0
1.57
56
2.20
a
b
40
1.57
69
SERIES AZM 200
Pulse-Echo Based
Non-Contact Solenoid Interlock
Features & Benefits
• Solenoid locking design … controls access to hazardous
areas until safe conditions exist.
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.
• Dual purpose handle … unlatches and opens guard—no
additional door handles are needed.
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …
satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.
*See Note Below.
• One-hand emergency release … hazardous area can be
left quickly and safely—even during a power failure.
• Switch and actuator do not protrude into door
opening … no risk of injury or damage from a protruding
actuator.
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.
AVAILABLE AZM 200 MODELS
(Actuator ordered separately below)
Model Number
Description
Lock by Spring, Power to unlock
AZM200SK-1P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, one signaling output
AZM200SK-T1P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, one signaling output
AZM200SK-3P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, three signaling outputs
AZM200SK-T3P2P
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, three signaling outputs
Description
The AZM 200 Series is designed for machine/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
The AZM 200 consists of a solenoid-latching interlock and
actuator unit with door handle and optional emergency exit
handle. The actuator is always inserted into its housing,
protecting the actuator and the operator against damage and
injury. Utilizing pulse-echo sensor technology, the actuator
and interlock can have an offset of ±5 mm and the actuator
still engages the interlock.
Due to the one-hand operation of the emergency exit handle,
the hazardous area can be left quickly and safely—even during a power failure (when using the “unlock by power” model).
The solenoid interlock is a dual channel design with two
short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can
switch up to 250 mA.
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,
AZM 200 solenoid interlocks with one diagnostic output can
be wired in series without detriment to the control category.
Series wired AZM 200s continue to fulfill the requirements of
Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1 with door detection
sensors (without the need of a second switch).
Typical Applications
The AZM 200 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical
applications are textile machines, stamping machines,
metal working equipment, printing presses and
70 packaging machines.
Power to lock
AZM200SK-1P2Pa
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, one signaling output
AZM200SK-T1P2Pa
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, one signaling output
AZM200SK-3P2Pa
2-PNP safety outputs, without door
detection sensors, three signaling outputs
AZM200SK-T3P2Pa
2-PNP safety outputs, with door
detection sensors, three signaling outputs
Sensors available with M23
quick disconnect—Replace
SK with ST in catalog number.
Note: If switch is ordered with
door detection sensor
(T) the actuator must
also be ordered as the
T version.
Part number: SZ200
Description: Lockout tag, up
to 5 padlocks
Safety Control Module Requirements
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor
outputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause the
outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. This
must be tolerated by the control module. The following
SCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommended
for this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES AZM 200 AVAILABLE KEYS AND DIMENSIONS
AZM 200-B1 ACTUATOR FOR SLIDING DOORS
AZ/AZM 200-B1-
AZM 200-B30 ACTUATOR FOR HINGED DOORS
AZ/AZM 200-B30-
A
G1
Leave blank (without emergency
exit handle)
P0 (with emergency exit handle)
Leave blank (without
door detection sensor)
Leave blank (without
door detection sensor)
T (with door detection sensor)
T (with door detection sensor)
L (Door hinge on left side)
L (Door hinge on left side)
R (Door hinge on right side)
R (Door hinge on right side)
Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for a
left hand door, with door detection sensor and
emergency exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B1-LTP0
Leave blank (without
emergency exit handle)
P1 (with emergency
exit handle)
Ordering example: To order an AZM 200 actuator handle assembly for a left
hand door, with door detection sensor and emergency
exit handle, order p/n AZ/AZM200-B30-LTAG1P1
2
DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B1 HANDLE
AZ/AZM 200-B1
for sliding doors
71
SERIES AZM 200 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Solenoid Holding Force
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Response Time
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life
Mounting
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
IP67
30N (7 pounds)
2300N (506 pounds)
–25°C to +60°C
–25°C to +85°C
≤ 30ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
30g/11ms
1 million operations
40-45mm profiles
CE
BG
EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA
EN 954-1
IEC 61508
Mode of Operation
Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Operating Current
No Load Current
Residual Current
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Rated Insulation Voltage
Safety Outputs
Safety Output
Operating Current
Safety Output
Operating Voltage
Signaling Output
Signaling Output
Operating Current
Signaling Output
Operating Voltage
Type Terminals
Inductive
24 VDC -15%/+10%
1.0A
0.5A
≤ 0.5mA
0.8kV
32 VDC
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof
0.25A per output
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
PNP, short-circuit proof
Max. 0.05A
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
Screw Terminals for up to 15
AWG flexible stranded wire
(1.5 mm2)
DIMENSIONS OF AZM 200 & AZ/AZM 200-B30 HANDLE
A
Door hinge on
left-hand side
Door hinge on
right-hand side
Legend
A = Front and rear manual release
B = Cable entry M20 x 1,5
C = Emergency exit P1
D = Door handle G1
AZ/AZM 200-B30
for hinged doors
B
72
C
C
D
D
SERIES AZM 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs
Diagnostic Outputs
LED
State AZM 200
Safety Outputs
AZM200...-3P2P
AZM200...-1P2P
OUT
OUT2
OUT3
OUT
Green
Supply voltage
0 V or 24 V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Yellow
Actuator inserted and locked
24 V (if X1=X2=24 V)
0V
0V
24 V
0V
Blinking yellow
Actuator inserted and not locked
0V
24 V
0V
24 V
24 V
Blinking red (1–9 impulses)
Error: see blinking codes
See table below
24 V
24 V
24 V
0V
Diagnostic LED error codes
The blinking sequence of the red
LED of the AZM 200 identifies the
active error. The following errors
are indicated:
Blinking Codes (red)
Indication (red)
2
Meaning
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
5 blinking impulses
Target error
6 blinking impulses
Error target combination
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
Continuous red
Error
Meaning
Autonomous switch-off after
Cause
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although
the output is switched off
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although
the output is switched off
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
30 min.
Cross-wire between the output cables or error at
both outputs
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
30 min.
Temperature measurement indicates too high an
inner temperature
5 blinking impulses
Target error
0 min.
The difference between the code (frequency) of the
detected target and the set value is too large, false target
6 blinking impulses
Error target combination
0 min.
An invalid combination of targets was detected at
the 4 coils of the AZM. (Current setting: latching bolt
detected & door target not detected => latch breakage
or tampering attempt)
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
30 min.
Internal hardware error
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
0 min.
Supply voltage too low or defective internal voltage
control
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
30 min.
Data comparison between the channels leads to
differences in the signal evaluation because of an
internal hardware error
73
SERIES AZM 200 WIRING EXAMPLES
WIRING EXAMPLE: SINGLE DEVICE WIRING
WIRING COMPARTMENT
Meaning
Terminal
Supply Voltage
24 V
Supply Voltage
24 V
Safety Input 1
X1
Safety Input 2
X2
Solenoid Input
IN
Ground
GND
Ground
GND
Safety Output 1
Y1
Safety Output 2
Y2
Diagnostic Output
OUT
Note: In case of single device wiring, the
bridge between the “24 V” terminal and
the “X1” and “X2” terminals must be
established; for series wiring, this bridge
must only be established in the first
device of the series.
WIRING EXAMPLE: SERIES WIRING OF 3 AZM 200
+24VDC
X1
24V
24V
GND
GND
Y1
I1
I2
I3
X2
IN
24V
24V
Y2
OUT
GND
GND
AZM 200
X1
X2
IN
24V
24V
Y2
OUT
GND
GND
AZM 200
Y1
X1
X2
IN
Y2
OUT
AZM 200
Y1
0V
Reset
Q1
Q2
KB
+24VDC
PLC
Q3
KA
A1
S12
S22
X1
X2
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
SRB 301 LC/B
A2
0V
74
Only interlocks with one
diagnostic output can be
wired in series.
KA
KB
N
2
Safer
by
Design
75
SERIES MZM 100
Non-Contact Magnetic-Latching Interlock
Features & Benefits
• Magnetic-latching design … controls access to hazardous
areas until safe conditions exist (100 lbs. locked holding
force).
• Forced-closed operating principle … no mechanical wear
due to non-contact design.
• Integral LED diagnostics … indicates operating states
• Integral self-monitoring and door detection sensors …
satisfy requirements of Safety Control Category 4.
*See Note Below.
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200 m.
• Automatic magnetic latch (35 N) … no mechanical
latching required (“r” version only).
• Smooth surfaces allow for easy cleaning … ideal where
high hygienic standards need to be maintained.
• Dual PNP 250 mA safety outputs … for application versatility.
AVAILABLE MZM 100 MODELS & ACCESSORIES
(Accessories ordered separately)
Model Number
Description
Power to lock
MZM100ST-1P2Pa
2-PNP safety outputs,
1 diagnostic output
MZM100ST-1P2Pra
2-PNP safety outputs,
1 diagnostic output, with latching
Description
The MZM 100 Series is designed for machine/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their magnetic-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated.
The MZM 100 consists of a magnetic-latching interlock and
actuator unit. An electromagnet is utilized to generate a 500 N
holding force. An integrated pulse-echo based sensor detects
and monitors the position of the safety guard. This sensor
technology permits an offset between the actuator and interlock of ±5 mm vertical and ±3 mm horizontal.
The MZM100 magnetic-latching interlock is a dual channel
design with two short-circuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of
which can switch up to 250 mA. The holding force is permanently electronically measured and monitored. If the holding
force drops below 500 N, the safety outputs are not enabled,
recognizing a dirty interlock.
With continuous internal function tests, the monitoring of
the safety outputs and the use of door detection sensors,
MZM 100 magnetic-latching interlocks can be wired in series
without detriment to the control category. Series wired MZM
100s continue to fulfill the requirements of Control Category 4
according to EN 954-1 (without the need of a second switch).
Typical Applications
The MZM 100 is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on movable machine guards which must not be opened until
dangerous conditions, which may exist after the removal of
power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel overrun,
spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc. Typical
applications are textile machines, stamping machines, food
processing equipment, metal working equipment, wood working and packaging machines.
76
Accessories
MZM100-B1
Actuator
MS MZM 100-W
Mounting Set
M23-9P
M23x1, 9 pin female connector
M23-9P-5m
M23x1, 9 pin female connector,
5 m cable
Safety Control Module Requirements
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor
outputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause the
outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond. This
must be tolerated by the control module. The following
SCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommended
for this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES MZM 100 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Solenoid Holding Force
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Response Time
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life
Mounting
Conformity to Standards
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
IP67
35N (7 pounds) (“r” version only)
500N
–25°C to +55°C
–25°C to +85°C
≤ 100ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
30g/11ms
1 million operations
40mm profiles
CE
BG
EN 60947-5-1 UL/CSA
EN 954-1
IEC 61508
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mode of Operation
Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Operating Current
No Load Current
Residual Current
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Rated Insulation Voltage
Safety Outputs
Safety Output
Operating Current
Safety Output
Operating Voltage
Signaling Output
Signaling Output
Operating Current
Signaling Output
Operating Voltage
Termination
Magentic & Inductive
24 VDC -15%/+10%
1.0A
0.5A
≤ 0.5mA
0.8kV
32 VDC
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof
0.25A per output
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
PNP, short-circuit proof
Max. 0.05A
2
Max. 4V below rated
operating voltage
Connector M23x1
DIMENSIONS
Switch
Actuator
Mounting Set
Exploded View
77
SERIES MZM 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs
LED
green
State MZM 100
Safety outputs
yellow
red
Diagnostic output
Y1, Y2
OUT
Guard open
on
off
off
0V
0V
Guard closed, unlocked
on
blinks
off
0V
24 V
Guard closed and locked
on
on
off
24 V
24 V
Warning, door locked
on
on
blinks**
24 V*
0V
Error, door locked
on
off
blinks**
0V
0V
* after 30 min. 0V
** see blinking code
Diagnostic LED error codes
The blinking sequence of the red
LED of the MZM 100 identifies the
active error. The following errors
are indicated:
Blinking Codes (red)
Indication (red)
Meaning
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
5 blinking impulses
Target error
6 blinking impulses
Error holding force
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
10 blinking impulses
Magnet is too hot
Meaning
Autonomous switch-off after
Cause
1 blinking impulse
Error output Y1
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y1”, although
the output is switched off
2 blinking impulses
Error output Y2
30 min.
Error in output test or voltage at output “Y2”, although
the output is switched off
3 blinking impulses
Cross-wire
30 min.
Cross-wire between the output cables or error at
both outputs
4 blinking impulses
Temperature too high
30 min.
Temperature measurement indicates too high an
inner temperature
5 blinking impulses
Target error
0 min.
The difference between the code (frequency) of the
detected target and the set value is too large, false target
6 blinking impulses
Holding force error
0 min.
The required holding force is not obtained (misalignment/soiling). The holding force is < 500 N.
7 blinking impulses
Error AD values
30 min.
Internal hardware error
8 blinking impulses
Error transmission voltage
0 min.
Supply voltage too low or defective internal voltage
control
9 blinking impulses
Channel error
30 min.
Data comparison between the channels leads to
differences in the signal evaluation because of an
internal hardware error
10 blinking impulses
Magnet temperature
0 min.
The magnet is too hot: Temperature is too high T>70°C
78
SERIES MZM 100 WIRING EXAMPLE
Safety Sensors in large systems
The sensors have separate input
and output cables. The output of one
sensor can be directly wired into the
input of the next sensor. The sensor
chain can be built up over a length of
two hundred meters.
The supply voltage is wired in both
safety inputs of the last solenoid
interlock of the chain (starting from
the control relay). The safety outputs
of the first interlock are wired to the
control relay.
SERIES CONNECTION OF MZM 100
2
Safety outputs -> Control relay
WIRING OF THE INTEGRATED CONNECTOR MZM 100
Solenoid interlock with diagnostic output
A1
A2
X1
X2
Y1
Y2
OUT
IN
Pin configuration
Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 1
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 3
safety input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 2
safety input 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 6
safety output 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 4
safety output 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 7
diagnostic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 5
magnet control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pin 8
79
COMPATIBLE AZM 200 & MZM 100 SAFETY CONTROLLER – SRB 301 LCB
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Fuse (Input Power)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Auxilliary Contacts)
Application Category
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type & Materials
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
Monitored Contact
Configuration
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
Number & Type Auxilliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling
Output)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
Feedback Monitoring
LED Displays
Conformity to Standards
Stop Category
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
24 V AC/DC
1 (Single or Dual channel)
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Contact Resistance
Air Cleaner &
Creepage Distance
Cable Connections
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA
Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
24 VDC, 2 A
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
≤ 30 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning,
positive-guided
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
• Screw terminals for
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
Terminal Labeling
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)
• Automatic
Yes
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
0
4
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Mechanical Life
Expectancy
Weight
Mounting
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
>107 switching cycles
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)
DIN rail (35mm)
Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
80
Monitored Input #1
(N.C.)
24
Monitored Input #2
(N.C.)
S12
Safety Output #3
(N.O.)
33
34
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic or
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset
X1
X2
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Auxiliary Output
(N.C.)
41
42
COMPATIBLE AZM 200 & MZM 100 SAFETY CONTROLLER – SRB 324 ST
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Fuse (Input Power)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs Stop 0)
Switching Capacity
(Auxilliary Contacts)
Application Category
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type & Materials
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
Monitored Contact
Configuration
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
Number & Type Auxilliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling
Output)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
Feedback Monitoring
LED Displays
Conformity to Standards
Stop Category
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
24 V AC/DC
1 (Single or Dual channel)
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
3-PNP
Contact Resistance
Air Cleaner &
Creepage Distance
Cable Connections
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)
• Automatic
Yes
Green LEDs for:
• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
0 (3 safety outputs)
1 (2 safety outputs)
4
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)
• Internal glass fuse F1,
tripping current > 2.5 A
(reset approx. 1 second)
• Internal hybrid fuse F2,
tripping current > 1.0 A
(reset after interruption of
supply voltage)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)
61/62: 24 VDC, 2A max. (Dry)
AC-15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
≤ 30 ms
≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)
AgSnO, self cleaning,
positive-guided
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
2
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Mechanical Life
Expectancy
Weight
Mounting
45mm x 100mm x 121mm
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
>107 switching cycles
480 gm
DIN rail
Terminal Connections For Use With AZM 200
Supply Voltage
A1
Monitored Input #1
A2
S12
Safety Output #2 (NO)
23
X1
X2
33
X3
X4
13
Safety Output #4
Stop Category 1 (NO)
34
Monitored-Manual Reset
Safety Output #1 (NO)
S22
Safety Output #3 (NO)
24
Feedback Monitoring
Monitored Input #2
47
Automatic Reset
X4
X5
Safety Output #5
Stop Category 1 (NO)
48
57
Jumper
S31
14
S32
58
Auxiliary PNP Output
Y1
Y2
Y3
81
SERIES TZF/TZM
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The TZF/TZM Series is designed for machines/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.
The TZF/TZM Series consists of an electromechanical safety
interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking
actuator key. In addition, the TZFS model features an auxiliary
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).
Operation
The TZF/TZM Series of electromechanical safety interlock
switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique
actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to
a movable machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position
by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by
energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the
latching mechanism.
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts
close upon key removal.
The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and a
NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC
contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety
switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting
until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the
solenoid has locked it in the closed position.
®
82
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls
access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before
“closed” safety signal is provided.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental
requirements.
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator
head provides installation versatility.
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree
of safety.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Special types for food industry … please consult factory.
Typical Applications
The TZF/TZM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on movable machine guards which must not be
opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.
SERIES TZF/TZM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Plastic Conduit Adapter and TZ/CO Standard Actuator key)
Part Number
Contacts
Description
TZFCS/96-*
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
Actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid
with right-side key entry. (Field-rotatable for entry from front or rear).
TZMC/96-*
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
Actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring
with right-side key entry. (Field-rotatable for entry from front or rear).
(See Note 1 below)
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via
addition of one of the following suffix codes:
Voltage
24VDC
115VAC
230VAC
Add Suffix
No Suffix
-115
-230
Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be
opened in the event of a power failure.
Generally accepted safety standards/practices suggest this model only be used
after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the context of the application.
2
Example: TZMC/96-115
OPTIONAL ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
TZ/CO
Standard straight actuator key (13" minimum
closing radius)
TZ/CW
Right-angled straight actuator key (11.8" minimum
closing radius)
TZ/COR
Radial entry actuator key (11.8" minimum closing
radius)
TZ/CK
Short straight actuator key (6.3" minimum closing
radius)
TZ/CWR
Right-angled bent actuator key (11.8" minimum
closing radius)
TZ/COF/HIS.1
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)
(13.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/COF/HIS.2
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)
(13.8" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CORF/HIS.1
Pivoting straight actuator key (rear-mounted)
(7.1" minimum closing radius)
TZ/CORF/HIS.2
Pivoting straight actuator key (top-mounted)
(5.9" minimum closing radius)
TZ-69
Straight safety interlock auxiliary release key (for
TZFCS/96 models only)
TZ-75
Right-angled safety interlock auxiliary release key
(for TZFCS/96 models only)
AZS2305
Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 98)
FWS1205B
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 100)
83
SERIES TZF/TZM TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Solenoid Locking Force
Minimum Closing Radius
Glass-fibre reinforced selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Galvanized steel
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
20N (4.8 pounds)
14.5 mm
20N (Approx. 4.8 pounds)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)
–13°F to +104°F
2 million operations (minimum)
30g / 11ms
20g / 10…55Hz
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-100
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
1,700N (380 pounds)
Dependent upon actuator key used.
Please see actuator key selection
chart.
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
WIRING DIAGRAM*
12
21
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Available Solenoid
Voltages
Solenoid Power
Consumption
Solenoid Duty Cycle
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
Guard monitoring: 2 × 3.5 mm
Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 3 mm
8A (250VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
10A (slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid
wire (2.5mm2) or 13 AWG
stranded (1.5mm2) wire
24VDC
115VAC
230VAC
8.8W (maximum)
100%
DIMENSIONS
34
33
E2
(-)
E1
(+)
24VDC
21
43
43
44
22
44
11
33
12
34
* Actuating key not inserted and solenoid unlocked.
M20x1
TZ/69
Three-square socket
wrench for versions
TZFCS…(supplied)
84
SERIES TZF/TZM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
ACTUATOR KEYS
TZ/CO
TZ/CW
TZ/COR
2
TZ/CWR
TZ/COF/HIS.1
TZ/COF/HIS.2
TZ/CORF/HIS.1
TZ/CORF/HIS.2
TZ/CK
85
SERIES TKF/TKM
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The TKF/TKM Series is designed for machines/work cells
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
The unit features independent actuator key (guard) position
and solenoid-latching monitoring contacts. These permit the
prevention of machine restart until the guard is closed and
the solenoid-latching pin is in the locked position.
The TKF/TKM Series consists of an electromechanical safety
interlock switch with “positive-break” contacts and a locking
actuator key. In addition, the TKFS model features an auxiliary
manual unlocking device … the latter provided to aid in
installation and for use in the event of a power failure (when
using the “unlocking by solenoid” model).
Operation
The TKF/TKM Series of electromechanical safety interlock
switch assembly consists of a rugged switch, a solenoidoperated latching mechanism, and a geometrically-unique
actuator key. The switch actuating key is typically mounted to
a movable machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position
by the latching mechanism. The guard may only be opened by
energizing or de-energizing (depending upon model) the
latching mechanism.
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s “positive-break” NC
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts
close upon key removal.
The solenoid-latching mechanism circuit features a NO and a
NC contact which permit monitoring its status. This NC
contact is wired in series with the NC contact in the safety
switch circuit. Thus the machine is prevented from starting
until the actuating key is inserted (guard is closed) and the
solenoid has locked it in the closed position.
®
86
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
• Solenoid-locking & spring-locking designs … controls
access to hazardous areas until safe conditions exist.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Conditional “safe” outputs … actuating key must be fully
inserted and solenoid must be actuated to lock key before
“closed” safety signal is provided (Series TKM).
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental
requirements.
• High-strength, galvanized-steel actuator key … tolerates
mechanical abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant metal housing … tolerates
hostile environments.
• Three optional key entry locations … rotatable actuator
head provides installation versatility.
• Independent actuator key position and locking pin
position monitoring contacts … provide a higher degree
of safety.
• Padlockable key … for added security during equipment
maintenance.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL, CSA.
• Wide selection of actuating keys … to meet diverse
application requirements.
• Special types available for concealed installation …
please consult factory.
Typical Applications
The TKF/TKM Series is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on movable machine guards which must not be
opened until dangerous conditions, which may exist after the
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, metal working
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.
SERIES TKF/TKM AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Conduit Adapter. Actuator key sold separately)
Part Number
Solenoid Operating Voltage
Contacts
Description
24VDC
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Series” actuating key locked by spring and unlocked by
energizing solenoid
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Series” actuating key locked by energizing solenoid and
unlocked by spring (See Note 1 below)
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion) locked
by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Parallel” actuating key (for right-hand insertion)
locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring
(See Note 1 below)
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion) locked
by spring and unlocked by energizing solenoid
2NC & 2 NO
(NC contacts
in series)
“Parallel” actuating key (for left-hand insertion)
locked by energizing solenoid and unlocked by spring
(See Note 1 below)
TKF/90
TKF/ */90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
TKM/90
24VDC
TKM/ */90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
TKF/R/90
24VDC
TKF/R*/90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
TKM/R/90
24VDC
TKM/R*/90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
TKF/L/90
24VDC
TKF/L*/90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
TKM/L/90
24VDC
TKM/L*/90
115/230VAC (50/60Hz)
2
* Insert 115 for 115VAC model
Insert 230 for 230VAC model
Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be opened in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted safety standards/
practices suggest this model only be used after conducting a thorough risk evaluation in the context of the application.
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
TK/R/90
Standard “Series” actuator key (For sliding guards
only)
TK/RF/90
“Series” actuator key with telescopic section (For
sliding guards only)
TK/P/90
“Parallel” actuator key for right- or left-hand
insertion (10” minimum closing radius)
TK/PF/90
“Parallel” actuator key (with telescopic section) for
right- or left-hand insertion (10” minimum closing
radius)
AZS2305
Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 98)
FWS1205B
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 100)
87
SERIES TKF/TKM TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key &
Locking Bolt
Degree of Protection
Unlocked Holding Force
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Closing Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Solenoid Locking Force
Minimum Closing Radius
DIMENSIONS
88
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cast aluminum, enamel finish
Steel, chromated
(defeat-resistant design)
IP67
5N (1.2 pounds)
72 mm (“Series” actuator)
38 mm (“Parallel” actuator)
5N (Approx. 1.2 pounds)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Approx. 10 N (2.4 pounds)
32°F to 120°F
1 million operations (minimum)
30g / 18ms
20g / 2…100Hz
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-100
BG-GS-ET-15
UL
CSA
2,000N (450 pounds)
250mm (“Parallel” actuator)
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Available Solenoid
Voltages
Solenoid Power
Consumption
Solenoid Duty Cycle
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
Guard monitoring: 2 × 3 mm
Solenoid monitoring: 2 × 2 mm
8A (250VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
10A (slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG solid
wire (2.5mm2) or 13 AWG
stranded (1.5mm2) wire
24VDC
115VAC/230VAC
12.0W (maximum)
100%
SERIES TKF/TKM ACTUATOR KEY SPECIFICATIONS
ACTUATOR KEYS
“Series” TK/R/90
(For sliding guards only)
“Series” TK/RF/90 (With telescopic section)
(For sliding guards only)
2
(For sliding guards only)
“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/P/90
“Parallel” Actuator Key TK/PF/90 (With telescopic section)
89
SERIES TZK
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Description
The TZK Series is designed for machines/work cells where
access to a hazardous work area must be controlled until safe
conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature permits
locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions, which
may exist immediately after removal of power, have abated.
Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time delay, motion
detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
The unit’s contact arrangement permits the prevention of a
machine restart until the guard is closed and in the locked
position.
Each unit is supplied with a 1⁄2" NPT conduit adapter.
Operation
The TZK Series electromechanical safety interlock switch
consists of a rugged switch with a solenoid-latching
mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The
switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable
machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the actuating key is held in position
by the solenoid-latching mechanism. The guard may only be
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.
Upon opening of the guard, the switch’s ”positive-break” NC
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts
close upon key removal.
®
90
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous
areas until safe conditions exist.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat with simple
tools, tape, bent wires, etc. Reduces liability exposure.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit interruption upon key removal.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental sealing
requirements.
• Positive locking … integral mechanical interlock prevents
solenoid latching until actuating key is fully inserted.
• High-strength steel actuator key … tolerates mechanical
abuse without damage.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking” models … for application versatility.
• Optional “floating” actuator key … tolerates up to 5mm of
guard misalignment without damage.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG (UL and
CSA pending)
• Rotatable actuating head … four user-selectable 90°
positions for installation flexibility.
• Funnel entry … forgiving of minor guard misalignment.
• Optional spring-loaded actuator keys … tolerates axial
misalignment of guard.
• Built-in key entry dust cover … prevents ingress of dirt
and dust when key is removed.
Typical Applications
The TZK Series is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on movable machine guards which must not be
opened until dangerous conditions, that may exist after the
removal of power, have abated. Such conditions are flywheel
overrun, spindle momentum, unstable rest positions, etc.
Typical applications are textile machines, stamping presses,
articulating robot arms, mixing machines, heavy working
equipment, printing presses and packaging machinery.
SERIES TZK AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1⁄2" NPT Adapter. Order desired actuator
key separately)
Part Number*
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
TZKF/CS*
1 NO & 2 NC
Actuating key locked by
spring and unlocked by
energizing solenoid
TZKM/C*
1 NO & 2 NC
Actuating key locked by
energizing solenoid and
unlocked by deenergizing solenoid
(See Note 1 below)
Part Number
Description
TZK/CO
Standard straight actuating key
TZK/CW
Standard right-angle actuating key
TZK/COF
Spring-loaded actuator key tolerates axial
movement of +7.5°/-15° or -7.5°/+15°
depending upon mounting orientation
Description
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the
following suffix codes:
Voltage
24VDC
115VAC
230VAC
ACTUATOR KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Add Suffix
No Suffix
-115VAC
-230VAC
Example: TZKF/CS-115VAC
Note 1: Use of this model permits the guard to be opened
in the event of a power failure. Generally accepted safety standards/practices suggest this model
only be used after conducting a thorough risk
evaluation in the context of the application.
TZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key
tolerates axial movement of +7.5° or -7.5°
depending upon mounting orientation
TZK/CORF/15 Pre-tensioned, spring-loaded actuator key
tolerates axial movement of +15° or -15°
depending upon mounting orientation
TZK/APL
Mounting adapter plate facilitates easy
alignment between actuating key and interlock
TZ-69
Standard straight auxiliary release key
TZ-75
Right-angle auxiliary release key
AZS2305
Fail-to-Safe Timer (Please see page 98)
FWS1205B
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor (Page 100)
2
TZ-75
TZ-69
Auxiliary release keys
(for locking via spring models)
91
SERIES TZK TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Key Insertion Force
Key Holding Force
(without solenoid-latching)
Solenoid Locking Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Mounting Orientation
Solenoid Override
Slack Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Switching Frequency
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
Galvanized steel
IP67
2.3mm
10 N (2.2 pounds)
20 N (4.4 pounds)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
2,000N (440 pounds)
+32°F to +122°F (0°C to +50°C)
2 x 106 Operations (minimum)
Any position
Manual release from front surface
30g / 11ms
20g / 10-55Hz
120 cycles/hour (maximum)
IEC 947
EN 60947
DIN VDE 0660
EN 1088
UL & CSA
6.9" (175mm) for CO and CORF
actuating key
9.8" (250mm) for CW actuating key
5.9" (150mm) for COF actuating key
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse Withstand
Voltage
Type Terminals
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Available Solenoid Voltages
Solenoid Power
Consumption
Solenoid Duty Cycle
Silver-plated, gold
Double-pole, double-break,
electrically-separated contact
bridges
8A/115VAC, 15A/250VAC (AC 15)
13A/24VDC (DC13)
Slow-action, positive-break
NC contacts
10A
250VAC
2.5 KV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
cable clamps for up to 13AWG
flexible stranded wire (1.5mm2)
24VDC
115VAC/50-60 Hz
230VAC/50-60 Hz
10W (maximum)
100%
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS (Actuator key inserted and no power to solenoid)
TZKF/CS
TZKM/C
12
12
0
5
1,5
11
0
0
2,3
5
1,5
11
11-12
5
11-12
0
2,3
5
21-22
33-34
21-22
33-34
3,5
E1
92
E2
3,5
E1
E2
21
22
21
22
33
34
33
34
SERIES TZK TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (Basic Switch & Optional Mounting Adapter Plate)
89
3.50
2,3
.09
TZK/APL
Mounting Adapter Plate
6
.24
50
1.97
32
1.26
12
.47
70
2.76
2
14,5
5.7
M6
72
2.83
193
7.60
206
8.11
6
.24
M20x1
22
.87
12
.47
24
.94
4,5
.18
178
7.01
6,5
.26
116
4.57
6
.24
178
7.01
45
1.77
30
1.18
12
.47
22,5
.89
6
.24
29,5
1.16
17,5
.69
mm
inch
12
.47
41
1.61
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS
TZK/CW Right-Angle Actuating Key
TZK/CO Straight Actuating Key
52
2.07
53,5
2.11
40
1.57
13,5
.53
13
.51
11
.43
3
.12
8
.31
30
1.18
13,5
.53
20
.79
6,5
.26
30
1.18
45
1.77
4,3
.17
TZK/CORF/15 Flexibly-Mounted “Floating”
Actuator Key
8,5
.33
57,5
2.26
48
1.89
6,5
.26
8,5
.33
3
.12
32
1.26
13,5
.53
16,5
.65
25
.98
3
.12
15 °
25
.98
60
2.36
57,5
2.26
7,5°
6,5
.26
32
1.26
48
1.89
TZK/CORF/7.5 Pre-Tensioned
Flexibly-Mounted Actuator Key
48
1.89
13,5
.53
16,5
.65
93
SERIES AZM415
Heavy-Duty Solenoid-Latching
Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
Latching may occur upon energizing or de-energizing the
solenoid — depending upon model. In addition the AZM415
features “positive-break” NC contacts, and an adjustable-force
ball latch which maintains a holding force on the guard when
the key is in the unlocked state.
A two-key model is also available for guards which may be
open in two directions (Model AZM415-33zpdk).
Operation
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Actuator key sold separately … see chart below)
AZM415 XX
/
YY
Switch insert S2 –
key position
The AZM415 Series is designed for movable machine guards
where access to a hazardous work area must be controlled
until safe conditions exist. Their solenoid-latching feature
permits locking a machine guard until dangerous conditions,
which may exist immediately after removal of power, have
abated. Solenoid-latching may be controlled by a time-delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other suitable component.
Switch insert S1 –
solenoid position
Description
• Solenoid-locking design … controls access to hazardous
areas until safe conditions exist.
• Highly tamper-resistant … difficult to defeat.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon actuator key removal.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• High-strength, metal actuator key … tolerates mechanical
abuse without damage.
• Rugged, enamel-coated metal housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Adjustable actuator key holding force up to 110 pounds
… permits use of switch as door latch.
• Available in “solenoid-locking” and “solenoidunlocking” models … for application versatility.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … UL, CSA, IEC,
BG and VDE.
• Industrial-strength locking force … up to 560 pounds.
• Patented toggle-lever locking system … facilitates easy
unlocking of (even heavily misaligned) guards.
• Two-key model … for double-sided guards (AZM415-33zpdk).
• Optional B4 Actuator Key … prevents unintentional guard
closure.
ZPK
T
(manual
override)
11
(1 NO/1 NC)
Leave blank
(power to unlock)
A
(power to lock)
02 (2 NC)
The AZM415 two-piece electromechanical safety interlock
switch consists of a rugged switch and solenoid-latching
mechanism and a geometrically-unique actuating key. The
switch actuating key is typically mounted to a movable
machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the actuator key is locked in
position by a toggle-lever system. The guard may only be
opened by energizing or de-energizing (depending upon
model) the solenoid-latching mechanism.
Upon opening of the guard the switch’s “positive-break” NC
contacts are forced to open through a direct (non-resilient)
mechanical linkage with the actuating key. The NO contacts
close upon key removal.
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Pages 84, 86,
88 and 328.
20 (2 NO)
11
(1 NO/1 NC)
02
(2 NC)
*Please specify solenoid operating voltage via addition of one of the
following suffix codes:
Voltage
24VAC/DC
120VAC
Add Suffix
-24VAC/DC
-120VAC
ACTUATING KEYS & ACCESSORIES
Description
Part Number
Linear entry actuator key
(For sliding lift-off guards)
AZM415-B1
Small radius (250mm) x-axis entry actuator
key (For hinged guards)
AZM415-B2
Small radius (250mm) y-radius entry actuator
AZM415-B3
key (For hinged guards)
94
Slide bolt actuator key (For sliding guards)
AZ/AZM415-B4pS
Fail-to-Safe Timer
AZS2305 (Page 98)
Fail-to-Safe Standstill Monitor
FWS1205B (Page 100)
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Actuator Key
Degree of Protection
Travel for Positive-Break
Force to Reach
Positive-Break
Solenoid Locking Force
Actuator Key
Holding Force
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Closing Radius
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum with blue
enamel finish
Die-cast aluminum
IP67
5mm (0.2 inches)
Depending upon ball catch setting
(3.5 pounds minimum)
560 pounds
Adjustable, 2.2 to 110 pounds
-13°F to +175°F
1 million operations
IEC 947-5-1
BG-GS-ET-19
VDE 0660
UL
CSA
9.8" (250mm)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand
Type Terminals
Available Solenoid
Supply Voltages (Vs)
Solenoid Power
Consumption
Solenoid Duty Cycle
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically separated contact
bridges
2mm x 2mm
4A (230VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13AWG
flexible stranded wire (1.5 mm2)
24VAC/DC
115VAC/60Hz
230VAC/50Hz
10W (maximum)
2
100%
DIMENSIONS
M20
95
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA
WIRING SCHEMATICS
AZM415xx/yyZPK (Power-to-unlock)
96
WIRING SCHEMATICS
AZM415xx/yyZPKA (Power-to-lock)
11/11
11/11
11/02
11/02
11/20
11/20
02/11
02/11
02/02
02/02
02/20
02/20
Contacts shown with actuator key inserted and solenoid de-energized.
AZM415 TECHNICAL DATA
ACTUATOR KEY DIMENSIONS
B4pS Actuator for Hand Operated Locking
125
4.92
B1 Actuator
56
2.20
0-6
0-.24
69,5
2.74
55
2.17
9
.35
18,5
21
.83
35
1.38
20
.79
8
.35
10<3
6,5
.26
30
1.18
60
2.36
24
.94
44
1.73
15
.59
7
.28
19
.75
2
22
.87
237
9.33
6,4
.25
6
.24
17
.67
165
6.50
B2 Actuating radii
For hinged doors over the wide edge
of the actuator
B3 Actuating radii
For hinged doors over the small edge
of the actuator
Dowel holes are also provided in the
actuator body. With the use of dowel
pins the removal of the actuator can be
prevented.
By turning the adjusting screw “a,” the
actuator can be brought into any
desired position.
Both actuators can also be used on
sliding doors.
97
AZS 2305
Fail-To-Safe Timer
Safety Category (EN954-1):
Features • Time can be set between 0.1s and 99min.
• To EN 1088
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 3 enabling circuits
• Recognition of short-circuit between
connections
• 2 short-circuit proof additional
transistor outputs
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)
• 2 channel microprocessor control
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
55 x 75 x 110 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety
controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Short-circuits between the input connections
• Interruption of the input connections
• Difference in time setting between channel I and
channel II
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the timer
AZS 2305-24VDC
AZS 2305-110VAC
AZS 2305-230VAC
Function
Table
Additional semiconductor output Y
AZS 2305
Approvals
98
BG
UL
Y1
Y2
CSA
Function of output Y
Enable, enabling circuits closed
No Enable, enabling circuits open
AZS 2305
Typical
Applications
2
AZM 160
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
13 14 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6
H1
N
0V
L1
L1
0V
+24 VDC
0
+24 VDC
E
H2
A1
S13
S14
X3
X1
S22
X2
Y1
Y2
13
23
33
X4
X5
Y1
A1
S
Y2
13
23
33
14
24
34
max. 100mA
100mA
max.
A2
S21
X6
X7
K1
K1
K2
K2
X8
14
24
34
A2
S13
S14
S21
S22
0V
AES 3335/3336
AZS 2305
K3
0V
K4
M
3
N
SK1
Application • The arrangement in the wiring
diagram fulfills Control Category 1
Notes
to EN 954-1.
• Control Category 3 can be
achieved. Exclusion of faults due
to “Breakage or release of the
actuator, fault in the solenoid
interlock” is to be substantiated
and documented.
• Monitoring of a sliding, hinged or
removable guard device using an
AZM range solenoid interlock (A).
• The solenoid interlock releases the
guard device only when the set
time has elapsed. The time begins
to run when the power contactors
have dropped out.
• The AES range guard door controller checks the position of the
guard device.
• The coil of the solenoid interlock is
energized by operation of the pushbutton E
• After release has taken place, the
guard device must be opened if H1
is not connected.
• The wiring diagram is with the
guard device closed and shows
the de-energized condition.
99
FWS 1205
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors
Safety Category (EN954-1):
Features
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
22.5 x 75 x 110 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety
controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Interruption of the connections to one of the
inductive proximity switches
• Failure of the proximity switches
• Failure of one channel being evaluated
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety
controller
FWS 1205A-24VDC
(Execution A)
FWS 1205B-24VDC
(Execution B)
FWS 1205C-24VDC
(Execution C)
Standstill
Frequencies
Input X1
Input X2
Approvals
100
• Confirmation of standstill using 2 impulse
sensors
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• Operational voltage 24 VDC
• Reset input
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)
• 2 channel microprocessor control
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies
possible
• 2 enabling paths
BG
UL
Execution A
Execution B
Execution C
1Hz
2Hz
2Hz
2Hz
1Hz
1Hz
CSA
Function
Table
Additional
transistor output Y
Function of
output Y
Y1
Enable, Enabling
circuits closed
Y2
Fault
FWS 1205
Typical
Applications
2
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
FWS 1205
Application • The solenoid interlock can be
Notes opened when the FWS 1205 has
registered standstill of the motor by
means of the two PNP inductive
proximity switches. The coil of the
solenoid interlock is then energized
by operation of the pushbutton E
• The AES controller checks the
position of the guard device.
• Monitoring of the guard device
using a solenoid interlock and a
safety switch with separate
actuator.
• Control Category 3 can also be
achieved without using the safety
switch by connecting the NO and
NC contacts of solenoid interlock to
the guard door monitor. Exclusion
of faults due to “Breakage or
release of the actuator, fault in the
solenoid interlock” is to be substantiated and documented.
• Release is only possible when the
run-down movement has come to
an end.
• After release has taken place, the
guard device must be opened.
• The wiring diagram is with the
guard device closed and shows
the de-energized condition.
101
FWS 2505
Fail-To-Safe Standstill Monitors
Safety Category (EN954-1):
• Confirmation of standstill using 2 impulse
sensors
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 4 enabling circuits
• Available for various operational voltages
• Reset input
• 2 short-circuit proof semiconductor outputs
• 1 N/C auxiliary contact
• Integral System Diagnostics (ISD)
• 2 channel microprocessor control
• Customer-specific standstill frequencies
possible
• 24-230VAC/DC
Features
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
45 x 100 x 121 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Interruption of the connections to the inductive
proximity switches
• Short-circuit between connections
• Failure of the proximity switches
• Failure of one channel being evaluated
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Faults on input or relay control circuits of the safety
control unit
FWS 2505A 24-230V AC/DC
Standstill
Frequencies
102
1Hz
Y1
Enable, Enabling
circuits closed
1Hz
Y2
Fault condition
Input X2
1Hz
Input X4
2Hz
UL
CSA
(Execution C)
Function of
output Y High (24V)
Execution C
BG
FWS 2505C 24-230V AC/DC
Additional
transistor output Y
Execution A
Other frequencies on request.
Approvals
(Execution A)
Function
Table
FWS 2505
Typical
Applications
2
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
Application
Notes
• The solenoid interlock can be
opened when the FWS 2505 has
registered standstill of the motor by
means of the two PNP inductive
proximity switches. The coil of the
solenoid interlock is then energized
by operation of the pushbutton E
• The AES guard door controller
checks the position of the guard
device.
• Monitoring of the guard device
using a solenoid interlock.
• To achieve Control Category 3 the
exclusion of faults due to “Breakage
or release of the actuator, fault in
the solenoid interlock” is to be
substantiated and documented.
• Release is only possible when the
run-down movement has come to
an end.
• After release has taken place, the
guard device must be opened.
• The wiring diagram is with the
guard device closed and shows
the de-energized condition.
103
Safer
by
Design
104
APPLICATION ACCESSORIES
w!
e
N
w!
e
N
STS Safety Handle
Assembly
B25
Safety Door Handle
TG-1
Safety Door Handle
Page 106
Page 112
Page 114
3
w!
e
N
ZSD
Enabling Device
GFS Safety
Foot Control
SEPK(G) Two-Hand
Control Consoles
Page 116
Page 118
Page 122
w!
e
N
TFA/TFI
Guard Alignment Aid
Page 124
105
SERIES STS
Safety Guard Door-Handle System
(with Emergency Release Option)
Features & Benefits
• Suited for all types of guards ... for application versatility.
• Dual-purpose handle ... unlatches and opens guard.
No additional door handles are needed.
• Optional inside “emergency” release handle available ...
heightens system safety level.
• Interlock switch mountable from inside or outside
guard … for application flexibility.
• Rugged, durable design ... actuator designed for 15,000 N
(3,400 pounds) of shear force.
• Mechanical design facilitates easy actuator key
withdrawal ... without “sticking” or “binding.”
• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... provides for
emergency egress.
w!
e
N
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Please see page 93
Description
The STS door handle system consists of one safety interlock
switch (ordered separately), an actuator key and handle
assembly (with or without emergency release handle),
mounting plates, and an optional lockout/tagout device. An
optional red interior release handle is available which opens
the guard from the inside in case of an emergency.
Operation
Should someone find themselves in a hazardous area and
the guard is accidentally closed, the guard can be opened
from the inside by turning the optional emergency handle (2).
Locking of the guard from the inside is not possible.
When using the optional emergency handle with a solenoidlatching keyed interlock switch, always order the version with
an emergency unlocking feature. In this case the emergency
latching release button or knob (1) provided with this model
must be actuated before operating the emergency release
handle (2).
106
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
MP TG-01
Handle mounting plate for
inside mounted actuators
TFA-010
Alignment aid for outside mounting
(for hinged guards)
TFI-010
Alignment aid for inside mounting
(for hinged guards)
TFA-020
Alignment aid for outside mounting
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)
TFI-020
Alignment aid for inside mounting
(AZ 16 & AZM 161 ONLY)
SZ 415-1
Lockout tag for STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
SZ 415-2
Lockout tag for STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
SERIES STS
SELECTION TABLE & ORDERING GUIDE: SAFETY DOOR-HANDLE SYSTEM
Actuator
Outside
Right
XX-STS30-01*
Left
➛
Inside
Door Hinge
➛
With
emergency handle
Mounting Position
Actuator
XX-STS30-02*
Right
XX-STS30-05
➛
3
XX-STS30-06
➛
Left
XX-STS30-03*
Left
XX-STS30-04*
Right
XX-STS30-07
➛
Outside
Right
➛
Inside
➛
Without
emergency handle
Left
➛ ➛
View from outside the hazardous area
➛
*For actuators mounted on the inside, mounting plate MP TG-01
(ordered separately) must be used to mount the door handle
when the door frame width is smaller than the handle.
XX-STS30-08
View from inside the hazardous area
107
SERIES STS
TO ORDER COMPLETE STS DOOR HANDLE SYSTEM
1. Complete catalog number by replacing XX with the desired safety
interlock switch. Please see Catalog GK-1.
AZ 16
AZ 3350 (See below)
AZ 415
AZM 161
AZM 415
2. Order Safety Switch separately (see Catalog GK-1).
NOTE: AZ3350 is an AZ335 switch with an actuator head with
a funnel shaped key entry (SDG head, see Catalog GK-1).
Available only with STS Door Handle System.
AVAILABLE MODELS
Model
Description
AZ3350-12zuek-U90
Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left
AZ3350-12zuek-U270
Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right
AZ3350-03zk-U90
Actuated head rotated 90° for door hinge left
AZ3350-03zk-U270
Actuated head rotated 270° for door hinge right
Example: To order a safety door handle system with a right-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,
for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 415-22XPKT-24 VAC/DC safety inerlock switch,
order SCHMERSAL part numbers:
• AZM 415-STS30-01
• AZM-22XPKT-24 VAC/DC
Note: If door frame is smaller than the handle assembly, also order the MP TG-01 Mounting Plate
Example: To order a safety door handle system with a left-hand door hinge, an emergency release handle,
for inside mounting and equipped with an AZM 161SK-24rkT safety inerlock switch, order
SCHMERSAL part numbers:
• AZM 161-STS30-02
• AZM 161SK-24rkT
108
SERIES STS DIMENSIONS
AZ 16-STS30-…
AZ 16 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
AZ 3350-STS30-…
AZ 3350 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
AZ 415-STS30-…
AZ 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
3
AZ 16 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
AZ 3350 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
AZM 161-STS30-…
AZ 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
AZM 415-STS30-…
AZM 161 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
AZM 415 STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
AZM 161 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
AZM 415 STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
AZ 16 Handle Dimensions
109
SERIES STS ACCESSORIES
MP TG-01 Handle Mounting Plate
Lockout Accessory
ORDERING DETAILS
Lockout Tag
for … STS30-02/-04/-06/-08
for … STS30-01/-03/-05/-07
SZ 415-1
SZ 415-2
TFA Hinged Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting outside
Self-centering of the guard door
End stop
Suitable for all types of actuators
Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted
TFI Hinged Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting inside
Self-centering of the guard door
End stop
Suitable for all types of actuators
Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted
110
3
Safer
by
Design
111
SERIES B25
Safety Door Handle System
for AZ17 and AZM170 Interlock Switches
Features & Benefits
• Ergonomically-designed door handles … for easy
operation.
• Pre-machined mounting plates … for easy installation.
• Dual-purpose handle … releases interlock acutator key
and opens guard.
• Low-profile design … minimizes protruding handle.
• No protruding actuator … recessed actuator key when
guard is open makes for safer installation.
• User flexibility … actuator can be supplied without
handle. Users can mount their own handle design on the
integral, pre-tapped (M6) 8mm square shaft.
w!
e
N
AZ17…zrk Installation
AZM170…zrk Installation
Description
The Series BN25 is designed to allow easy realization of a combination door handle and safety interlock for use on light to
medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each unit consists of a door handle assembly with integral handle and
safety interlock actuator key for operating a Series AZ17…zrk or AZM170…zrk interlock switch.
Operation
Upon manual turning of the star-grip or T-grip handle, the safety interlock switch actuator key is withdrawn from the
switch body … opening the positive-break, normally-closed switch contacts (and, if so equipped, closing the normally-open
switch contact).
Opening the normally-closed safety contact(s) removes power to the machine hazard. Upon operation, the actuator key is
withdrawn into the door handle housing … thus eliminating the potential hazard represented by a protruding key.
Typical Applications
The low-profile ergonomically-designed door handle is ideal for use on light- to medium-weight movable machine guards.
112
SERIES B25
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES
Compatible
Safety Interlock*
(order separately)
Part Number
Description
AZ17-B25-L-G1
AZ17-B25-L-G2
AZ17-B25-R-G1
AZ17-B25-R-G2
Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard
T-grip for left-hand hinged guard
Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard
T-grip for right-hand hinged guard
Series AZM170…zrk
AZM170-B25-L-G1
AZM170-B25-L-G2
AZM170-B25-R-G1
AZM170-B25-R-G2
Star-grip for left-hand hinged guard
T-grip for left-hand hinged guard
Star-grip for right-hand hinged guard
T-grip for right-hand hinged guard
Series AZ17…zrk
Series AZM170…zrk
MP-B25*
Series AZ17…zrk
*Note: The AZ17 or AZM170
Safety Interlock Switch
and the mounting plates
are not included in the
delivery and must be
ordered separately.
Please note the assembly
requires the interlock with
the latching (“r”) option.
See Catalog GK-1.
To order unit without
Star-grip or T-grip handle,
please change suffix to
G0. For example …
AZ17-B25-L-G0.
Mounting plates for switch & handle assembly
3
Mounting Plates MP-B25
Order separately
Star-Grip
T-Grip
DIMENSIONS
AZ17…zrk Installation
AZM170…zrk Installation
113
SERIES TG-1
Door Handle For Use With
Solenoid Locking Switches
Features & Benefits
• Integrated door release … eliminates wiring to a console
push-button.
• LED status indicators … door status is known at a glance.
• Optional integrated push-button
• Optional integrated Emergency-Stop … eliminates wiring
to a remote console.
• Longer solenoid life … solenoid energized only while
release button is pushed.
• Tapered key entry ports … tolerant to key misalignment.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE.
• Lockout accessory … prevents key entry and switch
actuation.
Description
The TG-1 handle has an integrated button for unlocking
spring-to-lock solenoid switches. There are two LEDs
indicating if the door is locked (green) or unlocked (red).
Operation
Pushing the button will energize the solenoid, allowing the
door to be opened using the same hand. Releasing the
handle and button will de-energize the solenoid, allowing the
door to lock when closed.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
Description
TG-WGR
No top button
TG-WGR10
With top-mounted emergency-stop
TG-WGRS
With top-mounted push button
Note: Other variations are available. Please consult factory.
ACCESSORY
Part Number
M12-8P-5M
114
Description
Matching cable set.
SERIES TG-1 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Termination
Switching Voltage for
Enabling Switch and
Emergency Stop Button
Switching System
Rated Operating Voltage
LED
WIRING DIAGRAMS
PA and POM
IP65
Plug-in connector M 12 x 1, 8 pole
24VDC; max 30VAC/36VDC
Slow action, positive-break NC
contacts
LEDs
Enabling Switch
5 / (GY)
3 / (GN)
(BN) / 2
8 / (RD)
LED
red
LED
green
24VDC
(WH) / 1
4 / (YE)
View of Plug-in Connector
Emergency Stop Button or
Push Button
8 / (RD)
(BN) / 2
1 / (WH)
(GN) / 3
7 / (BU)
(YE) / 4
6 / (PK)
(BU) / 7
6 / (PK)
3
5 / (GY)
30
DIMENSIONS
green
LED
red
LED
10
150
200
Switch
4
8,5
30
Plug-in
connector
48
M12x1
60
80
115
SERIES ZSD
3-Position Hand-Held Enabling Device
Features & Benefits
• Redundant contacts ... allows use in up to safety control
category 4 systems.
• Auxiliary contact ... for status signalling.
• Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3 ...
enhances safety.
• 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF) design ... provides for machine
stop control when operator squeezes or releases actuator
from center “on” position.
• Rugged IP65 rating ... withstands harsh industrial
environments.
• Optional normally-open top-mounted pushbutton ...
enables machine jog/start control.
• Meets ANSI/RIA R15.06 safety standards ... to satisfy
enabling device requirements.
Description
The ZSD is a hand-held “dead man” switch with 3 operating
positions — OFF-ON-OFF. The machine/robot can be
operated in the “on” position. It provides safety based on
normal human behavior of either releasing or squeezing the
actuator in an emergency situation.
Operation
Machine/robot operation is only allowed when the enabling
device is held in the middle (“on”) position. Releasing the
switch (position 1) or squeezing the switch (position 3) shuts
down the equipment.
Typical Applications
Used in robotic cells and automated manufacturing systems
to provide operator safety during set-up, maintenance,
or troubleshooting.
SWITCHING DIAGRAM FOR ZSD5
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(INCLUDES M20 STRAIN RELIEF)
Operating Characteristics
Position
1
2
Normally open contact 1–2*
Normally open contact 3–4*
3
Part Number
ZSD5
3-Position Enabling Switch (OFF-ON-OFF)
ZSD6
3-Position Enabling Switch (but with
top-mounted pushbutton - 1NO contact)
ZSD-H
Metal Holding Bracket
Auxiliary contact 5–6
Open:
, Closed:
* Positive-break contacts from position 2 to position 3
Description
Note: For factory installed cable, add length in meters,
e.g. ZSD5-5m.
Use of a SCHMERSAL safety controller with cross short monitoring
is required (SCHMERSAL models SRB301ST-24 or SRB301SQ).
116
ZSD TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature
–25°C to +60°C (no freezing)
Operating Humidity
45% to 85% RH maximum
Storage Temperature
–40°C to +80°C (no freezing)
Contact Resistance
100mΩ maximum
Insulation Resistance
Between live & dead metal parts:
100MΩ maximum (at 500VDC)
Between positive & negative live parts:
100MΩ minimum (at 500VDC)
(no condensation)
Operating Frequency
1,200 operations/hour
Mechanical Life
Position 1•2•1: 1,000,000 minimum
Position 1•2•3•1: 100,000 minimum
Impulse Withstand
Voltage
2.5kV
Shock
100m/s
Electrical Life
100,000 cycles (min.) @max. load
Operating Extremes
2
Resistance Damage Limits
1000m/s2
Recommended Wire Size 16 - 26 AWG
Vibration
5 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5mm minimum
Recommended Cable .275 - .512 inch diameter
Resistance Damage Limits
16.7Hz, amplitude 1.5mm minimum
Terminal Pulling Strength
20N minimum
Conditional
Short Circuit Current
Terminal Screw Torque
0.5 to 0.6Nm
Degree of Protection
IP65
Weight
Approx. 240g (ZSD6)
Approx. 210g (ZSD5)
Conforming to Standards
IEC60947-5-1, EN60947-5-1,
JIS C8201-5-1, ANSI/RIA R15.6
Approvals
UL, CSA, BG
Operating Extremes
ACCESSORIES
Part Number
50A (250V)
Recommended Short
Circuit Protection
250V/10A fast-blow fuse (IEC 60127-1)
Contact Rating
2A @ 30V, 4A @ 125V
3
DIMENSIONS (mm)
Description
ZSD5/6
46
ZSD-H
Metal holding bracket
(for mounting/holding a
ZSD enabling device)
86
174
9
54 58
C
x 1.5
Note: Model with top-mounted pushbutton shown.
117
SERIES GFS
Safety Foot Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Positive-Break Contacts ... assure circuit interruption upon
complete foot pedal actuation.
• Automatic latching following an emergency stop signal ...
meets EN 418 standard for E-Stop switches.
• Unique design with protective shield ... avoids unintentional
actuation due to falling debris or dropped items.
• Release modes ... only manually by pushing the button on the
top of the pedal.
• Heavy duty aluminum shield ... tolerates mechanical abuse
without damage.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards ... UL, CSA, IEC, BG,
VDE.
Description
Typical Applications
Extensive accident prevention research has shown that in the
event of pain/distress, the foot is frequently not removed
from the foot pedal that is enabling equipment operation.
Paradoxically, weight is often shifted forward and pressure on
the foot pedal is increased (rather than removed).
The GFS foot switch is intended for use in machines or areas
where operation using the hands is not possible. Typical
applications are profile and tube bending machines, bar
turning machines, thread cutting, and wire drawing machines.
Recognizing this, the series GFS safety foot switch features
3-stage operation. It is designed to stop hazardous movements in machinery whether released or fully-depressed in an
emergency situation.
It’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts provide a
significantly higher level of safety than conventional springdriven contacts which can weld/stick shut. Their glass-fiber
reinforced pedal and aluminum protective shield make them
ideal for heavy-duty applications in hostile environments.
AVAILABLE MODELS
Part Number
Contacts
GFS 1 S D 1 O VD
1 NC
GFS 2 S D 2 O VD
2 NC
All Enclosures include PG to
1/2" NPT metal conduit adapter
Operation
The results of accident prevention research has been
translated into a specific product according to the research.
In the event of pain, the foot is frequently not removed from
the switching pedal, but paradoxically pressure is increased,
and the weight shifted forward. The solution to this problem
is provided by a 3-stage safety foot switch.
Position 1. The pedal is not actuated in the upper position.
→ Machine “ OFF ”
Position 2. The operation circuit contact closes after
actuating the foot pedal (the pedal is in contact
with the tangible pressure-point stop).
→ Machine “ ON ”
Position 3. The pressure point is overcome in the event of
danger or sensing pain, the circuit contact opens
and is automatically latched.
→ Machine “ Emergency Stop ”
Operation to position 3 requires manual reset using the
integral push button actuator
Optional safety controllers for E-Stop applications are
available. Please consult factory.
®
118
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Signal Output
0ff
On
0ff
Position 1
(Pedal not
actuated)
Position 2
(Pedal depressed
to pressure point)
Position 3
(Pedal fully
depressed)
GFS SERIES TECHNICAL DATA
3
CONTACT DIAGRAMS
GFS 1SD/1OVD
GFS 2SD/2OVD
1 NO
1 NC
2 NO
2 NC
Position
1
Position
2
Position
3
Each contact
(Same as GFS 1SD/10VD)
Latched
(Release
via topmounted
pushbutton
119
GFS SERIES TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure
Protecting Hood (shield)
Pedal
Degree of Protection
Ambient temperature
Mechanical life
Conformity to Standards
Aluminum (die casting)
Aluminum (die casting)
Glass-fiber reinforced
thermoplastic ( nylon 66)
IP 65 to IEC/EN 60529
–25 °C to + 80 °C
> 1 million operations
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, EN 418
BG-GS-ET-15
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
Withstand Voltage
Thermal test current
Max. fuse rating
16 A / 400VAC
Slow-action NC
Positive break contacts
500 V
Screw terminals,2.5 mm2 max.
(including conductor ferrules)
6 kV
10 A
16 A (slow-blow)
GFS SERIES DIMENSIONS (mm)
72
265
220
ø 33
82,5
14,5
70
156
120
43
136
3
Safer
by
Design
121
SERIES SEPK(G)
w!
e
N
2-Hand Control Consoles
(with light force actuators)
Features & Benefits
• Choice of console material … rugged Lexan or die-cast
aluminum.
• Optional control functions … consoles designed to
accept up to 8 additional control and signalling devices.
• Hinged console covers … facilitate easy wiring and
assembly.
• Ergonomically-designed shelf to support hands during
actuation (SEPG model) … minimizes stress.
• Protective safety hoods … protect against accidental
actuation of pushbuttons.
• Integral E-stop mushroom pushbutton … for easy
emergency stop control
• IP65 ingress protection rating … tolerates hostile, wet
environments.
• Meets EN574 standard (SEPG model) … safety of
machinery for two-hand control consoles.
• Available adjustable stands (optional) … to optimize user
comfort.
• Available optional accessories … e.g., safety controllers,
foot pedals, rollers, special paint finishes for application
flexibility.
• Custom units available … please consult factory.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Model Number
Plastic (Lexan), hooded console with
one red, 38.5mm E-stop mushroom
button (1NO & 1NC contact) and two
light force (2.3 lbs.) black, 55mm
mushroom pushbutton actuators (each
with 1NO & 1NC contact)
SEPK02.0.L.22
Empty plastic (Lexan) hooded console
(gray) with 3 bore holes for actuators
SEPG05.3.4.0.22/95.E1
Powder-coated (gray) aluminum
hooded console with one red, 38.5mm
E-stop mushroom button (1NO & 1NC
contacts) and two light force (2.3 lbs.)
black, 55mm mushroom pushbutton
actuators (each with 1NO & 1NC
contact)
SEPG05.3.L.22
Empty powder-coated (gray) aluminum
hooded console with 3 bore holes for
actuators
Description
Schmersal’s family of two-hand control consoles have an
ergonomic design that require the operator to use both hands
to initiate a control action. Thus they insure that the operator’s
hands are kept away from the hazardous area of a machine
during operation.
The units are designed such that simultaneous operation
(within 0.5 seconds) of both control buttons is required to
initiate the machine cycle. The control buttons must remain
actuated to complete the machine cycle.
Each is equipped with an integral E-stop mushroom
pushbutton to facilitate emergency stoppage.
Units are available with a wide choice of options and
accessories, such as adjustable stands, auxiliary control
buttons, foot pedals, special colors, etc. for optimizing safety
and functionality.
Typical Applications
Two-hand control consoles are used as protective devices in
setting up and operating single-stroke equipment, and other
applications where it is desired to keep both of the operator’s
hands safe from a hazardous area during machine operation.
Applications are typically found in the metal working, rubber,
plastics and chemical industries as well as in semi-automatic
assembly equipment.
122
Description
SEPK02.0.4.0.22/95
Note: Also available as custom control panels with up to 8 control
and/or signalling devices in the central portion of the console
(in addition to the E-stop actuator) and adjustable height floor
stands (with or without rollers). Please consult factory.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
SRB201ZH-24VDC
Two-hand control safety controller
(Please see page 268 for details)
EDRR40RT
E-stop actuator
EFR
Spring element for E-stop
EF303.1
E-stop actuator contact block with
1NO & 1NC contact
AF02
Control actuator contact block with
1NO contact
AF10
Control actuator contact block with
1NC contact
SERIES SEPK(G)
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Console Material
Lexan (SEPK02…)
Die-cast aluminum (SEPG05…)
Console Color
RAL 7035, light gray (SEPK02…)
RAL 7004, signal gray (SEPG05…)
Ingress Protection
IP65
Mechanical Life
Expectancy of
Contact Blocks
Type A Contacts:
5 million cycles (minimum)
Type B Contacts:
10 million cycles (minimum)
Temperature Range
Type AF Contacts: -25°C to +60°C
Type EF Contacts: -25°C to +80°C
Mushroom Button
Actuating Force
2.3 lbs. (SEPK02…)
2.3 lbs. (SEPG05… EI)
DIMENSIONS SEPK
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Contact Blocks)
Specification
Rated Operating
Current (Ie)
Contact Type
Type AF
Type EF
(Operating
(E-stop Button)
Pushbuttons)
6A, 250VAC (AC15) 8A, 250VAC (AC15)
3A, 24VDC (DC13) 5A, 24VDC (DC13)
Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V@Test Voltage 440V@Test Voltage
of 2,500V
of 2,500V
Short Circuit
Protection
10A, Slow-blow
10A, Slow-blow
Wire Size
2 x 0.5 to 2.5mm2
(2 x 20AWG to
13AWG)
2 x 0.5 to 1.5mm2
(2 x 20AWG to
15AWG)
3
DIMENSIONS SEPG
123
Series TFA/TFI
Guard Alignment Aid
Features & Benefits
w!
e
N
• Self-aligning … self-centering design helps align guard.
• End-stop … functions as end-stop to protect guard from
excessive shock on closing.
• Easy-to-install … on inside or outside of guard.
• Reduces maintenance … minimizes risk of downtime due
to misaligned guard.
• Suitable for retrofit … on existing guards.
TFA Guard Alignment Aid (for outside mounting)
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting outside
Self-centering of the guard door
End stop
Suitable for all types of actuators
Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted
TFI Guard Alignment Aid (for inside mounting)
•
•
•
•
•
Mounting inside
Self-centering of the guard door
End stop
Suitable for all types of actuators
Actuator can be easily inserted or extracted
124
EMERGENCY CABLE-PULL SWITCHES
w!
e
N
4
SELECTION GUIDE
Switch
Series
Housing
Material
Maximum
Span
Contact
Configurations
ZS71
Die-cast
aluminum
65 feet
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
(Optional)
126
ZS73
Die-cast
aluminum
165 feet
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
(Optional)
130
ZS75
Die-cast
aluminum
165 feet
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
2 NO & 2 NC
4 NC
(Optional)
134
ZS441
Die-cast
aluminum
80 feet
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
No
138
Bidirectional
ZS75S
Die-cast
aluminum
165 feet
(Each Direction)
2 NO & 2 NC
4 NC
(Optional)
142
Die-cast
aluminum
165 feet
(50m)
2 NO & 2 NC
1 NO & 3 NC
4 NC
No
146
New!
ZS80
New!
S900
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
Rated
Catalog
Page
150
125
ZS71
Emergency Cable-Pull Switch (Meets EN418)
Features & Benefits
®
Description
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum
housing … tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contact … assures circuit interruption
upon pulling of trip wire.
• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.
• Push/pull operation … actuates if trip-wire is pulled or
goes slack.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements, equipped
with watertight collar.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wire
spans up to 65 feet (20m).
• Meets rigid safety standards … UL, CSA.
• Low actuating force … operates with only 13.5 lbs of
force. Ideal for short-run applications.
• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proof
models available.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
• Optional integrated emergency-stop button … for easy
actuation when in proximity to switch.
The ZS71 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop
along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which
present hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. Unlike
E-stop pushbuttons, emergency-stop cable-pull systems can
be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”
The unit features a positive-opening NC contact which is
forced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design also
assures actuation if the operator falls into, leans on, or is
pushed against the trip-wire.
In addition, the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire is
cut or goes slack.
Their rugged metal housing, small size and watertight design
(IP65) make them ideal for use in hostile environments where
space is limited.
Operation
The ZS71 features an axial actuating shaft and a double-pole
contact block with either 1 NO & 1 NC or 2 NC contacts (with
trip-wire pre-tensioned).
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact is
forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuating
shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC
contact opens – resulting in equipment stoppage.
Manual (key or pushbutton) reset mechanisms assure the
equipment cannot be restarted until the reset is actuated.
Optional integrated emergency-stop button on face of switch
assures complete emergency stop.
Typical Applications
The ZS71 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete E-stop
pushbuttons or achieving a continuous immediately
accessible emergency stop … especially where space is
limited. Typical applications include conveyor lines, textile
machinery, packaging machinery, turret lathes, and transfer
lines.
126
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS71 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Contact
Configuration
Type
Reset
Pre-Tensioned
Force
Typical
Actuating
Force (F)
Maximum
Cable
Length
ZS71-10/1S WVDA-55N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
ZS71-10/1S WVDA*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-10/1S WVSA-55N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
Part Number
ZS71-10/1S WVSA*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-20 WVDA-55N
2 NC
Pushbutton
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
ZS71-20 WVDA
2 NC
Pushbutton
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-20 WVSA-55N
2 NC
Key
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
2 NC
Key
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-10/1S WVD-NA-55N▲
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
ZS71-10/1S WVD-NA▲
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-20WVD-NA-55N
2 NC
Pushbutton
12.5 lbs (55N)
1.4 lbs (6N)
32.5 ft (10m)
ZS71-20WVD-NA
2 NC
Pushbutton
45.5 lbs (200N)
6 lbs (25N)
65 ft (20m)
ZS71-20 WVSA
▲
▲
*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.
▲
Equipped with integral emergency stop button.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
PL-M20-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M20-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for cable "cornering")
New!
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(see page 150)
S900
4
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 141.
ZS71-10/1S WVD-NA
Emergency pushbutton option
127
ZS71 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Maximum Supported
Span
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
Minimum Cable Tension
Typical Deflection (S)
Required for Operation
-10
0
10
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum with fiberglassreinforced thermoplastic cover
IP65 (pushbutton reset)
IP54 (key reset)
65 feet (20m)
–13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)
1 million operations
EN418, UL, CSA
6.7 lbs. (30N)
4.4" (11cm)
20 30 40
50
60
70 T(°C)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
l (m)
Cable length vs. temperature range
At 3m distance, intermediate wire
supports are required,
DIMENSIONS
see accessories.
128
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Type Terminals
Fine silver
1 NO & 1 NC or 2 NC doublepole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
6A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (with wire pulling). Snapaction NO contact.
6A (external)
Screw terminals with clamping
washers
ZS71 TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS
40
1.57
ø10
.39
10
.39
56
2.20
6
.24
ø 25
.98
53,5
2.11
30
1.18
8
.31
18
.71
24
.94
12
.47
22
.87
33
1.30
56
2.20
105
4.13
48
1.89
M20
52
2.05
15
.59
17,5
.69
mm
inch
42
1.65
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
4
129
ZS73
Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switches Meet EN 418
Features & Benefits
®
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum
housing … tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon pulling of trip wire.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wire
spans up to 164 feet (50m).
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418
• Available in two operating force models … for application
compatibility.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
• Satisfies OSHA push/pull operating requirements …
trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.
• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proof
models available.
• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latched
condition.
Description
The ZS73 is designed to provide a continuous emergency
stop along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which
present hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. Unlike
E-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems can
be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”
The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which are
forced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design also
assures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,
or is pulled against the trip wire.
In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire is
cut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safety
regulations, the ZS73 features a manual mechanical reset
which must be actuated before the controlled equipment can
be restarted.
Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)
make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stop
safety in industrial and hostile environments.
Operation
The ZS73 features an axial actuating shaft and a double-pole
contact block with 1 NO and 1 NC contact or 2 NC contacts
(with trip-wire attached). When installed, the trip-wire is pretensioned until the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm, closing
the NO contact(s).
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact(s)
are forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the
actuating shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is
cut) the NO contact, closed during pre-tensioning, opens –
resulting in equipment stoppage.
Manual pushbutton reset assures the equipment cannot be
restarted until the reset is actuated.
Typical Applications
The ZS73 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal for
replacing multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving a
continuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typical
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,
packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravel
processing and transfer lines.
®
130
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS73 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
Contact
Configuration
Type
Reset
Pre-Tensioned
Force
Typical
Actuating
Force (F)
Recommended
Cable Length
(Minimum & Maximum)
ZS73-10/1S WVD-98N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS73-10/1S WVD-177N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS73-10/1S WVD-275N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS73-10/1S WVD*
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS73-10/1S WVS-98N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS73-10/1S WVS-177N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS73-10/1S WVS-275N*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS73-10/1S WVS*
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS73-20 WVD-98N
2 NC
Pushbutton
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS73-20 WVD-177N
2 NC
Pushbutton
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS73-20 WVD-275N
2 NC
Pushbutton
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS73-20 WVD
2 NC
Pushbutton
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS73-20 WVS-98N
2 NC
Key
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS73-20 WVS-177N
2 NC
Key
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2 -5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS73-20 WVS-275N
2 NC
Key
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS73-20 WVS
2 NC
Key
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.
4
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
PL-M20-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M20-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for cable "cornering")
New!
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(see page 150)
S900
Explosion-proof option
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 141.
Pilot light option
131
ZS73 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Die-cast aluminum, color-painted
Thermoplastic cover
IP65 (pushbutton reset)
IP54 (key reset)
164 feet (50m)
Degree of Protection
Maximum Supported
Span
Typical Deflection (S)
Required for Operation
Mechanical Life
Operating Temperature
Conformity to Standards
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
6A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (with wire pulling)
6A (Slow blow)
400VAC
Screw terminals with clamping
washers
Contact Rating
Switching Action
5.1" (13cm)
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
1 million operations
–13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)
CE
UL
BG
CSA
EN 418
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
E Ex dll CT6 (“Ex” models only)
Explosion Protection
Note: Hard-coated housing available with stainless steel accessories.
Please consult factory.
Note: Bi-directional unit available, up to 50m each direction. Please
consult factory.
DIMENSIONS
Pushbutton Reset
Key Reset
33,4
1.31
25
.98
5
.20
30
1.18
75
2.95
105
4.13
48
1.89
30
1.18
30
1.18
M20
6,5
.26
15
.59
35
1.38
170
6.69
15
.59
M20
56
2.20
28
1.10
70
2.76
mm
inch
98
3.86
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
-10
0
10 20
30
40 50
60
70
10
0
10
10
23-24
11-12
4
4
23
11
24
12
20
30
40
50
l (m)
Cable length vs. temperature range
At 5m distance, intermediate wire supports are
required. See accessories.
132
80 T(°C)
ZS73 INSTALLATION DETAILS
PRE-TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT
To ensure positive-break operation, the switch
should be pinned through the holes shown (1). The
trip-wire should be pre-tensioned to the point where
the linear switch actuating cam is in the middle
position (3). The standard 395N axial pulling force
required for pre-tensioning can be reduced by
adjusting the grooved nut (2). For trip-wire spans of
less than 30m, the unit can be supplied with lighter
force pre-tensioning springs.
PRE-TENSIONING FORCE VS. ACTUATION FORCE
The actuating force is a function of the:
• trip-wire span
• pre-tensioning spring
• set pre-tensioning force
as shown. Units are available with lighter springs for
trip-wire spans of less than 30m. Please see
ordering details under AVAILABLE OPTIONS.
4
133
ZS75
Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switches Meet EN 418
Features & Benefits
®
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum
housing … tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon pulling of trip wire.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported trip-wire
spans up to 164 feet (50m).
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418
• Available in four operating force models … for
application compatibility.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
• Satisfies OSHA push/pull operating requirements …
trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.
• Explosion protected … optional IEC-rated explosion-proof
models available.
• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latched
condition.
Description
The ZS75 is designed to provide a continuous emergency
stop along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which
present hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. Unlike
E-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems can
be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”
The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which are
forced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design also
assures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,
or is pulled against the trip wire.
In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire is
cut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safety
regulations, the ZS75 features a manual mechanical reset
which must be actuated before the controlled equipment can
be restarted.
Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)
make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stop
safety in industrial and hostile environments.
Operation
The ZS75 features an axial actuating shaft and up to two
double-pole contact blocks. When installed, the trip-wire is
pre-tensioned until the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm,
closing the NO contact(s).
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact(s)
are forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the
actuating shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is
cut) the NO contacts, closed during pre-tensioning, open –
resulting in equipment stoppage.
Manual pushbutton reset assures the equipment cannot be
restarted until the reset is actuated.
Typical Applications
The ZS75 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal for
replacing multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving a
continuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typical
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,
packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravel
processing and transfer lines.
®
134
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS75 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
Contact
Configuration
Type
Reset
Pre-Tensioned
Force
Typical
Actuating
Force (F)
Recommended
Cable Length
(Minimum & Maximum)
ZS75-20/2S WVD-98N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Pushbutton
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS75-20/2S WVD-177N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Pushbutton
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS75-20/2S WVD-275N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Pushbutton
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS75-20/2S WVD*
2 NO & 2 NC
Pushbutton
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS75-20/2S WVS-98N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Key
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS75-20/2S WVS-177N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Key
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS75-20/2S WVS-275N*
2 NO & 2 NC
Key
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS75-20/2S WVS*
2 NO & 2 NC
Key
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS75-40 WVD-98N
4 NC
Pushbutton
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS75-40 WVD-177N
4 NC
Pushbutton
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS75-40 WVD-275N
4 NC
Pushbutton
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS75-40 WVD
4 NC
Pushbutton
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
ZS75-40 WVS-98N
4 NC
Key
18-22 lbs (79-98N)
1.1-1.7 lbs (5-8N)
<33 ft (<10m)
ZS75-40 WVS-177N
4 NC
Key
26-40 lbs (118-177N)
4.2-5.6 lbs (19-25N)
33-65 ft (10-20m)
ZS75-40 WVS-275N
4 NC
Key
44-62 lbs (197-275N)
7.4-9.2 lbs (33-41N)
65-100 ft (20-30m)
ZS75-40 WVS
4 NC
Key
66-88 lbs (295-390N)
8.5-13.5 lbs (38-60N) 100-165 ft (30-50m)
*Available in an IEC-rated explosion-proof design. To order, add prefix “EEX” to part number.
4
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
PL-M25-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M25-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for cable "cornering")
New!
S900
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(see page 150)
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 141.
135
ZS75 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum, color-painted
IP65 (pushbutton reset)
IP54 (key reset)
164 feet (50m)
Maximum Supported
Span
Typical Deflection (S)
Required for Operation
Mechanical Life
Operating Temperature
Conformity to Standards
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Switching Action
5.1" (13cm)
1 million operations
–13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)
UL
CSA
BG
EN 418
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
E Ex dll CT6 (“Ex” models only)
Explosion Protection
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
6A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (with wire pulling)
6A (Slow blow)
400VAC
Screw terminals with clamping
washers
DIMENSIONS
Pushbutton Reset
Key Reset
87
3.43
23
.91
154
6.06
76
2.99
80
3.15
80
3.15
54
2.13
6,5
.26
69
2.72
71
2.80
25
.98
19,5
.77
160
6.30
52
2.05
66
2.60
33
1.30
14
12
.47
27
1.06
.55
mm
inch
70
2.76
M25
100
3.94
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
10
4
0
4
10
13-14
21-22
33-34
41-42
13
21
33
41
14
22
34
42
-10
0
10 20
30
40 50
60
70
10
20
ZS75-20/2S
30
10
4
0
4
10
11-12
21-22
31-32
41-42
ZS75-40
136
11
21
31
41
12
22
32
42
40
50
l (m)
Cable length vs. temperature range
At 5m distance, intermediate wire supports are
required. See accessories.
80 T(°C)
ZS75 INSTALLATION DETAILS
PRE-TENSIONING ADJUSTMENT
To ensure positive-break operation, the switch should be
pinned through the holes shown (1). The trip-wire should be
pre-tensioned to the point where the linear switch actuating
cam is in the middle position (3). The standard 395N axial
pulling force required for pre-tensioning can be reduced by
adjusting the grooved nut (2). For trip-wire spans of less than
30m, the unit can be supplied with lighter force pre-tensioning
springs.
PRE-TENSIONING FORCE VS. ACTUATION FORCE
The actuating force is a function of the:
• trip-wire span
• pre-tensioning spring
• set pre-tensioning force
as shown. Units are available with lighter springs for
trip-wire spans of less than 30m. Please see
ordering details under AVAILABLE OPTIONS.
4
137
Series ZS441
Heavy-Duty Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Meets EN 418
Typical Applications
ZS441 emergency cable-pull switches are ideal for replacing
multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving a
continuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typical
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,
packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravel
processing and transfer lines.
Features & Benefits
®
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum
housing … tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon pulling of trip wire.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for trip-wire spans up to
82 feet (25m).
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN 418
• Available in three reset styles … pushbutton, key and
non-reset.
• Available in three operating force models … for
application compatibility.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
• Built-in vibration tolerance … eliminates nuisance
tripping.
• Push/pull operation … actuates if trip-wire is pulled or
goes slack.
Description
The ZS441 Series is designed to provide a continuous
emergency stop along exposed areas of machinery and
conveyors which present hazards to operators/maintenance
personnel. Unlike E-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cablepull systems can be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”
The units feature positive-opening NC contacts which are
forced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design also
assures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,
or is pulled against the trip wire.
In addition the switch is designed to operate if the trip wire is
cut or goes slack. To comply with OSHA and other safety
regulations, the ZS441 features a manual mechanical reset
which must be actuated before the controlled equipment can
be restarted.
Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)
make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stop
safety in industrial and hostile environments.
Operation
The ZS441 features an axial actuating shaft and a doublepole contact block with 1 NO/1 NC or 2 NC contacts (with tripwire attached). When installed, the trip-wire is pre-tensioned
until the actuating shaft is pulled out 6 mm, closing the open
contact.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
PL-M20-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M20-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for cable "cornering")
New!
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(see page 150)
S900
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 141.
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC contact is
forced open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuating
shaft. If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NO
contact, closed during pre-tensioning, opens – resulting in
equipment stoppage.
Manual (key or pushbutton) reset mechanisms assure the
equipment cannot be restarted until the reset is actuated.
®
138
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS441 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Contact
Configuration
Type
Reset
Pre-Tensioned
Force
Typical
Actuating
Force (F)
(Minimum & Maximum)
ZS441-10/1S-60N
1 NO & 1 NC
Non-Reset
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-10/1S-150N
1 NO & 1 NC
Non-Reset
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-10/1S
1 NO & 1 NC
Non-Reset
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
ZS441-10/1SVD-60N
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-10/1SVD-150N
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-10/1SVD
1 NO & 1 NC
Pushbutton
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
ZS441-10/1SVS-60N
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-10/1SVS-150N
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-10/1SVS
1 NO & 1 NC
Key
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
ZS441-20-60N
2 NC
Non-Reset
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-20-150N
2 NC
Non-Reset
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-20
2 NC
Non-Reset
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
ZS441-20VD-60N
2 NC
Pushbutton
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-20VD-150N
2 NC
Pushbutton
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-20VD
2 NC
Pushbutton
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
ZS441-20VS-60N
2 NC
Key
13.5 lbs (60N)
1.3 lbs (6N)
0-16.5 ft (0-5m)
ZS441-20VS-150N
2 NC
Key
34 lbs (150N)
3.1 lbs (14N)
16.5-50 ft (5-15m)
ZS441-20VS
2 NC
Key
50 lbs (220N)
5.2 lbs (23N)
50-80 ft (15-25m)
Part Number
Recommended
Cable Length
4
-10
0
10 20
30
40 50
60
70
80 T(°C)
10
20
30
40
50
l (m)
Cable length vs. temperature range
139
ZS441 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing (Standard)
Housing (Optional)
Degree of Protection
Maximum Supported
Span
Typical Deflection (S)
Required for Operation
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum with baked
enamel finish
Cast iron
IP65 (pushbutton reset)
IP54 (key reset)
80 feet (25m)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
4" (10cm)
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
–22°F to +195°F
3 × 104 operations
IEC 947-5-1
EN60947-5-1
EN418
DIN VDE 0660-200
Contact Rating
Switching Action
UL
CSA
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
6A (Slow-blow)
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (with wire pulling)
Fuse 25A (time-delay)
400VAC
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible
stranded wire (2.5 mm2)
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
0
5
5
23-24
11-12
3
3
23
11
24
12
DIMENSIONS
Non-Reset
38
1.5
22
.87
Pushbutton Reset
38
1.5
22
.87
29
1.14
29
1.14
Key Reset
ø 29
1.14
37
1.47
25
.98
95
3.74
95
3.74
M20
106
4.17
91
3.58
30
1.18
30
1.18
86
3.39
26
1.02
61
2.40
86
3.39
M20
106
4.17
26
1.02
61
2.40
76
2.99
140
37
1.46
10
.39
10
.40
10
.40
12
.47
33
1.30
35
1.38
SW20
.79
9
.35
12
.47
10
.39
84
3.31
SW20
.79
9
.35
35
1.38
84
3.31
ø 29
1.14
mm
inch
Part #
S900 - Tensioner
Replaces turnbuckle & cable clamps
New!
See page 150 for new S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(not shown above)
ZS441 TECHNICAL DATA
Recommended Emergency Cable-Pull Switch Installation Instructions
(For ZS71, ZS73, ZS75 and ZS441 models)
4
141
ZS75S Bidirectional
Heavy-Duty Bidirectional Emergency
Cable-Pull Switch
Typical Applications
ZS75S emergency rope-pull switches are ideal for replacing
multiple, discrete E-stop pushbuttons or achieving a
continuous, immediately accessible emergency stop. Typical
applications include conveyor lines, textile machinery,
packaging machinery, turret lathes, power plants, gravel
processing and transfer lines.
Features & Benefits
®
Description
ZS75S is designed to provide a continuous emergency stop
along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which
present hazards to operators/maintenance personnel. Unlike
E-stop pushbuttons, emergency stop cable-pull systems can
be actuated at any point along the “trip-wire.”
The units feature positive-opening NC contact(s) which are
forced open when the trip-wire is pulled. This design also
assures machine stoppage if an operator falls into, leans on,
or is pulled against the trip-wire.
To comply with OSHA and other safety regulations, the
ZS75S features a manual mechanical reset which must be
actuated before the controlled equipment can be restarted. In
addition the switch is designed to fail-to-safe if the trip wire is
cut or goes slack.
Their rugged metal housing and watertight design (IP65)
make them ideal for achieving a higher degree of E-stop
safety in industrial and hostile environments. An optional
signal lamp enables distance viewing of switch status.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant, die-cast aluminum
housing … tolerates the most hostile environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assure circuit interruption
upon pulling of trip wire.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 requirements.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for trip-wire spans up to
164 feet (50m).
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … EN418
• Available in two operating force models … for application
compatibility.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
• Satisfies OSHA push-pull operating requirements …
trips if cable is pulled or goes slack.
• Signal lamp … optional lamp signals tripped and latched
condition.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
ZS75S-20/2S VD
ZS75S-40 VD
ZS75S-20/2S VS
ZS75S-40 VS
Contact
Configuration
2 NO & 2 NC
4 NC
2 NO & 2 NC
4 NC
Type
Reset
Pushbutton
Key
Note: Pilot lamp option available for all above models.
Add suffix G24 (24VDC)
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Operation
Part Number
Available with 2 NO & 2 NC or 4 NC contacts, the ZS75S is
designed to mount between two trip-wires.
When either trip-wire is pulled, the positive-break NC
contact(s) are forced open via a direct mechanical linkage
with the actuating lever. If either trip-wire goes slack (e.g.
breaks or is cut), the tension spring of the other trip wire pulls
the actuating lever — also forcing the NC contacts to open.
Description
PL-M25-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M25-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
When actuated, the switch remains latched until manually
reset via a pushbutton or key. (An optional signal lamp is also
available.)
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
Manual reset assures the equipment cannot be restarted until
actuated.
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for cable “cornering”)
STQ441-SS
Stainless spring
S900
New!
Cable-pull switch wire tensioner (see page 150)
For recommended installation instructions, please see page 144.
®
142
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS75S BIDIRECTIONAL TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Actuating Force
Maximum Supported
Span
Mechanical Life
Operating Temperature
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Die-cast aluminum, color-painted
IP65 (pushbutton reset)
IP54 (key reset)
Depends upon
wire span and model
165 feet (50m) in each direction
Contacts
Contact Configuration
1 million operations
–13°F to +158°F (–25°C to +70°C)
UL
CSA
BG
EN 418
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
6A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (with wire pulling)
6A (Slow blow)
400VAC
Screw terminals with clamping
washers
DIMENSIONS
4
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
45°
20°
0
20°
45°
13-14
21-22
33-34
41-42
13
21
33
41
14
22
34
42
ZS75-20/2S
10
4
0
4
10
11-12
21-22
31-32
41-42
11
21
31
41
12
22
32
42
ZS75-40
143
ZS75S BIDIRECTIONAL TECHNICAL DATA
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION DETAILS
Part #
S900 - Tensioner
Replaces turnbuckle & cable clamps
New!
See page 150 for new S900 Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
(not shown above)
Mounting Instructions – Cable Pull Switches Series ZS75S Bidirectional
144
4
Safer
by
Design
145
ZS80
Emergency Cable-Pull Switch (Meets EN 418)
Features & Benefits
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … assures circuit
interruption upon pulling of trip-wire.
• Push/pull operation … operates if trip-wire is pulled or
goes slack.
• Integrated emergency-stop button … assures complete
emergency stop.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 environmental
requirements.
• Continuous E-stop protection … for supported spans up
to 164 feet (50m).
• Visual position indicator … for ease of installation.
• Lever for reset … and position indication.
• Four contacts in a compact housing … available in three
contact configurations.
• Meets rigid safety standards … EN 418, UL/CSA & BG
pending.
• Mounting accessories … ease and extend installation.
w!
e
N
®
Description
Typical Applications
The ZS80 is designed to provide continuous emergency stop
control along exposed areas of machinery and conveyors which
present hazards to operator/maintenance personnel. Unlike
E-Stop pushbuttons, emergency cable-pull systems can be
actuated at any point along the “trip wire”.
The ZS80 is ideal for replacing multiple, discrete
E-stop pushbuttons or achieving a continuous,
immediately accessible emergency stop … especially
where space is limited. Typical applications include
conveyor lines, textile machinery, packaging machinery,
and transfer lines.
The unit features a double-break contact block offering a choice
of two positive-opening NC contacts and two NO contacts, three
positive-opening NC contacts and one NO contact, or four positive-opening NC contacts … which change state when the cable
is pulled or goes slack. Thus the switch can be actuated if an
operator falls into, is pulled into, or leans on the trip wire.
In addition the unit features an integrated E-Stop pushbutton, a
position indicator for easier installation, a lever-actuated reset,
three cable entries, and an optional signaling lamp.
The unit is capable of spanning lengths of up to 50 meters. Its
rugged, metal housing and watertight design (IP 67) make them
ideal in hostile environments. The units meet EN 418, IEC/EN
60947-5-1, and IEC/EN 60947-5-5, with UL and CSA pending.
Operation
The ZS80 features an axial actuating shaft and double-break
2A-rated contacts with either 2 NC and 2 NO contacts, 3 NC and
1 NO contacts, or 4 NC contacts (with trip-wire pre-tensioned).
When the trip-wire is pulled, the positive-opening NC contact(s)
are forced to open via a direct mechanical linkage with the actuating shaft … resulting in machine stoppage.
If the trip-wire goes slack (e.g. breaks or is cut) the NC
contact(s) opens … also resulting in equipment stoppage.
The integral lever-actuated reset mechanism assures that the
equipment cannot be restarted until the cable-pull switch reset
has been actuated.
®
146
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ZS80 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Contact
Configuration
Pre-Tensioned
Force
Typical Actuating
Force (F)
Recommended
Cable Length
ZS80-2O/2S WVD
2 NO & 2 NC
22 lbs (100N)
9.2 lbs (41N)
165 ft (50m)
ZS80-3O/1S WVD
1 NO & 3 NC
22 lbs (100N)
9.2 lbs (41N)
165 ft (50m)
4 NC
22 lbs (100N)
9.2 lbs (41N)
165 ft (50m)
Part Number
ZS80-40 WVD
(Maximum)
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Description
PL-M20-24V
24V Pilot light kit
PL-M20-120V
120V Pilot light kit
STQ441-SC
5mm diameter steel cable, PVC coated
STQ441-EB
M10 eye bolt & hex nut
STQ441-CC
Cable clamp
STQ441-TB
Turnbuckle
STQ441-TH
Thimble
STQ441-PU
Pulley assembly (for “cable cornering”)
S900
New!
Cable-pull switch wire tensioner (see page 150)
4
147
ZS80 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Cover
Degree of Protection
Maximum Supported
Span
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
-10
0
10 20
30
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Die-cast aluminum, enamel finish
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
cover (ULTRAMID A3X2G5, Black)
IP67
165 feet (50m)
Contact Rating
Switching Action
–4°F to +158°F (–20°C to +70°C)
1 million operations
CE
EN 418
BG/UL/CSA Pending
40 50
60
70
80 T(°C)
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
2A/250VAC
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts with wire pull
6A (Slow blow)
250VAC
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13 AWG flexible
stranded wire (2.5mm2)
DIMENSIONS
10
20
30
40
50
l (m)
Cable length vs. temperature range
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
ZS80 2O/2S
148
ZS80 3O/1S
ZS80 4O
4
Safer
by
Design
149
S900
Cable-Pull Switch Wire Tensioner
Features & Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
Smooth adjustment … reduces adjustment effort.
Only one tool required … simplifies installation.
Anti-slip design … reduces need for readjustment.
Ergonomic … risk of injury is reduced.
Time-saving … cost of ownership is reduced.
AVAILABLE MODEL
Description
The S900 is a unique wire tensioning device which
simplifies the installation and adjustment of cable pull
switches. Conventional systems are usually time consuming
and difficult to install and adjust. The S900 eliminates the
need for a turnbuckle and at least 3 cable clamps.
DIMENSIONS
150
Model Number
Description
S900
Cable Pull Wire Tensioner
Note: The S900 wire tensioner works with any emergency
cable-pull switch. The cable-pull switch is purchased
separately.
4
Safer
by
Design
151
Safer
by
Design
152
NON-CONTACT SAFETY SENSORS
These rugged presence-sensing devices feature a sealed (IP67) housing, making them ideal interlocks in hostile
environments. Their tamper-resistant design and small size make them attractive alternatives to conventional
proximity sensors, magnetic switches, and limit switches. Used with SCHMERSAL’s matched safety circuit monitors,
they allow achieving the highest levels of machine safety.
w!
e
N
w!
e
N
SELECTION GUIDE
BNS250
Approximate
Envelope
Dimensions
1.0"×1.4"× 0.5"
⁄
BNS260
1.0"×1.4"× 0.5"
⁄
Sensor
Series
BNS33
New! BNS33S
BNS303
BNS30 & BNS300
BNS333
BNS16
BZ16
New! BNS-B20
New! CSS 180
New! CSS 34
3.5"×1.0"× 0.5"
⁄
.625"×3.5"×1"
1.25" 0⁄
1.25" 0⁄
4.5"×1.7"×1.7"
1.25"×2"×3"
1.25"×2"×3"
NA
0.7"×3.6"
1"×4"×1"
Operating
Voltage
24VDC
24VDC
24VAC/DC
120VAC/DC
24VDC
100VAC/DC
100VAC/DC
24VDC
24VDC
100VAC/DC
2 NC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
Coded-Magnet Sensor Compatible AES Safety Controllers
Contact
Configuration(s)
1
1
1
1
NO & 1
NO & 2
NO & 1
NO & 2
3NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1 NO & 1 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
1 NO
1 NC
2 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
Catalog
Page
No.
154
5
156
158
162
1 NO & 1 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
1 NC
1 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
170
1 NO & I NC
2 PNP
1 NO & I NC
2 PNP
172
174
176
184
164
166
168
189
153
SERIES BNS250
Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with
Series AES safety controllers.
Description
The Series BNS250 coded-magnet sensors are designed for
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features a 1meter long prewired pigtail.
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS250 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications
include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.
154
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Please order BPS250 magnet separately)
Part Number
Contact
Configuration*
BNS250-11z
1 NO & 1 NC
BNS250-12z
1 NO & 2 NC
BNS250-11zG
1 NO & 1 NC
BNS250-12zG
1 NO & 2 NC
BNS250-11zG-2205
(side entry cable)
1 NO & 1 NC
BPS250
N/A
Description
Multiple reed switch
(100VAC/DC) assembly
with 1-meter prewired
pigtail
Multiple reed switch
(24VDC/10mA) assembly
with 1 meter prewired pigtail
and built-in LED display
Multiple reed switch
(24VDC/10mA) assembly with
5 meter pigtail (side entry) and
built-in LED display
Coded-magnet actuator
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS250 coded-magnet
actuator.
*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.)
!
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
BNS250 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Operating Principle
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 4mm (0.16")
“Off”: 14mm (0.55")
IP67
–13°F to +158°F
Magnetic
30g/11ms
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
CE, UL, CSA
VDE 0660 Part 209
Maximum Operating Voltage
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Capacity (Power Rating)
Type Connection*
100VAC/DC
24VDC for -11zG or -12zG versions
100 mA (BNS250-11z/12z)
10 mA (BNS250-11zG/12zG)
1W (BNS250-11z/12z)
240mW (BNS250-11zG/12zG)
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on
request. Please consult factory.
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
DIMENSIONS
33
1.30
22
.87
13
.51
13
.51
33
1.30
22
.87
8,7
.34
1000
39.37
25
.98
19
.75
ø4,5
.18
ø4,5
.18
25
.98
19
.75
13
5.1
8,7
.34
mm
inch
Note: BNS250 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
WIRING DETAILS
BNS250-11z
BNS250-12z
BNS250-11zG
BNS250-12zG
13
(black)
14
(blue)
13
(black)
14
(blue)
13
(black)
14
(blue)
13
(black)
14
(blue)
21
(white)
22
(brown)
21
(white)
C
(brown)
21
(white)
22
(brown)
21
(white)
C
(brown)
5
Contacts shown with gate closed
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
155
SERIES BNS260
Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Satisfy CE & fail-to-safe requirements … when used with
Series AES safety controllers.
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly
coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features
a 1-meter long prewired pigtail or an available connector.
BNS260-
Z
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS260 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications
include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.
Note: 4 pole models accept either a screw-on or snap-on
connector.
L (Left hand hinge)
R (Right hand hinge)
Leave blank (Cable)
ST (Connector)
Leave blank
(without LED)
G (with LED)
Leave blank
(no signalling contact)
/01 (1 NC)
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
-
Signalling Contacts
The Series BNS260 coded-magnet sensors are designed
for use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
AVAILABLE BNS260 CODED-MAGNET SENSORS
Ordering Details (Order BPS260 Actuator below)
Safety Contacts
Description
11 (1 NO/1 NC)
02 (2 NC)
Ordering example: To order a BNS260 with 1NO/1NC safety contacts,
a NC signaling contact, LED left hand hinge and cable
order p/n BNS260-11/01ZGL
CODED MAGNET ACTUATORS & ACCESSORIES
Model Number
Description
BPS260-1
Standard Actuator
BPS260-2
Actuator for 90° operation
BNS260
Spacer for mounting reed switch or
magnet on ferrous material
M8S-4P-XX
M8S-6P-XX
Straight snap-on connector.
Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengths
M8SRA-4P-XX
M8SRA-6P-XX
Right angle snap-on connector.
Available -2m, -5m and -10m lengths
6 pole models accept only a snap-on connector.
*Important Note: Series BNS Coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.)
156
!
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
BNS260 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Operating Voltage
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 5mm (0.2")
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")
Degree of Protection
IP67
Operating Temperature
–13°F to +158°F
Operating Principle
Magnetic
Shock Resistance
30g/11ms
Vibration Resistance
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
Conformity to Standards
CE, VDE 0660 Part 209
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Type Connection*
75VAC/DC
24VDC for LED versions
400 mA without LED
10 mA with LED
10va without LED
240mW with LED
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail or M8
4 or 6 pin connector (ST)
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on
request. Please consult factory.
DIMENSIONS
BPS260
BNS260
mm
Note: BNS260 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
WIRING DETAILS (Contact configuration shown in presence of BPS260 Coded-magnet actuator)
BNS260-02z(G)
BNS260-02/01z(G)
BNS260-11z(G)
BNS260-11/01z(G)
5
Contacts shown with gate closed
QUICK-CONNECT DIAGRAMS
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
BNS260 4-Pole
BNS260 6-Pole
157
SERIES BNS33
Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
Description
The Series BNS33 coded-magnet sensors are designed for
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Satisfy EN954, Category 1, 3, or 4 … when used with
appropriate Series AES safety controllers.
• Optional high-strength field coded-magnets …
extends sensing range to 10mm.
• Units available with M8 quick-connect.
(Please consult factory).
• Available stainless steel housing (BNS33S) … ideal
for the food industry.
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards (IP69K for BNS33S). Their tamperresistant design prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or
improperly coded magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module
features an optional built-in LED display of switch status, and
a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to assure sealing integrity.
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS33 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is
limited. Typical applications include food processing
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm
rest position sensing.
*Important Note: Series BNS coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.)
!
158
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
Required Safety
Controller.
BNS33 AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
(Please order BPS33 or BPS33-2326 magnet separately)
Part Number
Contact
Maximum
Configuration* Contact Rating
Description
Part Number
BN31/33
BNS33-11z**
1 NO & 1 NC
BNS33-12z***
1 NO & 2 NC
BNS33-11zG**
BNS33-12zG***
100VAC/DC
(400mA)
1 NO & 1 NC
1 NO & 2 NC
Multiple reed switch
assembly with 1-meter
prewired pigtail
24VDC
(10mA)
Multiple reed switch
assembly with 1-meter
prewired pigtail and
built-in LED display
Multiple reed switch
assembly with 1-meter
prewired pigtail
BNS33-12z-2187**
1 NO & 2 NC
120VAC/DC
(250mA)
BNS33S-12z**
1 NO & 2 NC
100VAC/DC
(250mA)
BNS33S-12zG**
1 NO & 2 NC
24VDC
(10mA)
BPS33
N/A
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(5mm sensing distance)
BPS33-2326
N/A
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(10mm sensing distance)
N/A
N/A
Stainless steel
coded-magnet actuator
BNS33-11z-ST**
1NO & 1NC
60VAC/DC
(400mA)
BNS33-11zG-ST**
1NO & 1NC
24VDC
(10mA)
BNS33-12z-ST***
1NO & 2NC
60VAC/DC
(400mA)
BNS33-12zG-ST***
1NO & 2NC
24VDC
(10mA)
!
New
!
New
BPS33S
!
New
Multiple reed switch
assembly with 1-meter
prewired pigtail and
stainless steel
enclosure
Description
Shim plate for mounting reed switch
assembly on ferrous material
M8ST-2M
Straight quick-connect with 2M cable
M8ST-5M
Straight quick-connect with 5M cable
M8ST-10M
Straight quick-connect with 10M cable
M8ST-15M
Straight quick-connect with 15M cable
M8ST-RA-2M
Right-angle quick-connect with 2M cable
M8ST-RA-5M
Right-angle quick-connect with 5M cable
BNS-SS-CVR Stainless-steel protective cover for
BNS33-xxx
BPS-SS-CVR Stainless-steel protective cover for
BPS33-xxx
Coded Magnet
Sensor
Multiple Reed Switch Assembly
Safety Controller
Coded-Magnet Sensor and Safety Controller
sold separately.
Multiple reed switch
assembly with M8x1
quick-connect
5
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33 coded-magnet actuator.
**These models feature isolated contacts.
***These models feature C-form contacts.
Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on request.
Please consult factory.
Note: SPEZ-2237 for sliding doors is available for BNS33-11z and -11zG only.
Contact factory for more information.
159
BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 5mm (0.2")
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")
“On”: 8mm (0.3") (For BNS33S only)
“Off”: 18mm (0.7") (For BNS33S only)
Degree of Protection
IP67 (BNS33S: IP69k)
Operating Temperature
–13°F to +158°F (+178°F for BNS33S)
Operating Principle
Magnetic
Shock Resistance
30g/11ms
Vibration Resistance
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
Conformity to Standards CE, UL, CSA
VDE 0470 Part 1
IEC 529/EN60529
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.
BPS33 MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
BNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
160
For electrical ratings see page 139
Type Connection*
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.
M8x1 quick-connect for versions
with “ST” suffix
BNS33 TECHNICAL DATA
88
3.47
78
3.07
0,5
.02
3
.012
4,5
0.18
13
0.51
BNS33 with QuickConnect Terminal
18,5
.073
7
0.28
3,5
0.14
M8
25
0.98
Note: 27mm width and
14.5mm depth for
BNS33S/BPS33S
ø5
.02 DIA
DIMENSIONS
Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
WIRING DETAILS
5
Quick-Connect for
BNS33-11 units
Quick-Connect for
BNS33-12 units
2 3
1
2 3
4
Pins 1-2 are Normally-closed
Pins 3-4 are Normally-open
Contacts shown with gate closed
1
4
Pin 1: Common
Pins 2 & 4 are Normally-closed
Pin 3 is Normally-open
161
SERIES BNS33S
w!
e
N
Stainless Steel Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Satisfy EN954, Category 1, 3, or 4 … when used with
appropriate Series AES safety controllers.
• Stainless steel housing … ideal for the food industry.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Description
The Series BNS33S coded-magnet sensor is designed for
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP69K
standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing
with a simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In
addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED
display of switch status, and a 1-meter long prewired pigtail to
assure sealing integrity.
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS33S is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is
limited. Typical applications include food processing
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm
rest position sensing.
*Important Note: Series BNS coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.)
!
162
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
(Please order BPS33S magnet separately)
Part Number
BNS33S-12z**
Contact
Configuration*
1 NO & 2 NC
BNS33S-12zG** 1 NO & 2 NC
BPS33S
N/A
Maximum
Contact
Rating
100VAC/DC
(250mA)
24VDC
(10mA)
N/A
Description
Multiple reed
switch assembly
with 1-meter
prewired pigtail
and stainless
steel enclosure
Stainless steel
coded-magnet
actuator
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS33S coded-magnet actuator.
**These models feature isolated contacts.
Note: Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on
request. Please consult factory.
BNS33S TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Operating Principle
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Type V4A (316L) stainless steel
“On”: 8mm (0.3")
“Off”: 18mm (0.7")
IP69k
–13°F to +178°F
Magnetic
30g/11ms
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
CE, UL, CSA
VDE 0470 Part 1
IEC 529/EN60529
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
For electrical ratings see page
Type Connection*
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail.
*Longer prewired cables available on request. Please consult factory.
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
DIMENSIONS
Note: BNS33 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
WIRING DETAILS
BNS33S MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
5
Contacts shown with gate closed
163
SERIES BNS303
Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Satisfy EN954, Category 4 … when used with appropriate
safety controller.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)
Description
The Series BNS303 coded-magnet sensors are designed for
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an
integral built-in LED display of switch status, and a 1-meter
long prewired pigtail.
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
Part Number
Contact
Configuration*
BNS303-11z
1 NO & 1 NC
BNS303-12z
1 NO & 2 NC
BNS303-11zG
1 NO & 1 NC
BNS303-12zG
1 NO & 2 NC
Description
Multiple reed switch
(100VAC/DC/400mA)
assembly with 1-meter
prewired pigtail
Multiple reed switch
(24VDC/10mA) assembly
with 1-meter prewired
pigtail and built-in LED
display
BPS300
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(front mount)
BPS303**
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(rear mount)
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS303 codedmagnet actuator.
**Available with stainless-steel outer jackets. Please consult factory.
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS303 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications
include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.
BPS300 Actuator
*Important Note: Series BNS coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.)
!
164
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
BPS303 Actuator**
BNS303 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance, “S”*
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Operating Principle
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 5mm (0.2")
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")
“On”: 8 mm ¸
“Off”: 18mm ˝˛Suffix 2211 only
IP67
–13°F to +158°F
Magnetic
30g/11ms
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
CE, UL, CSA
VDE 0660 Part 209
EN1088
Maximum Operating Voltage
24VDC (with LED)
100VAC/DC (without LED)
10mA (with LED)
400mA (without LED)
10VA
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Capacity (Power Rating)
Type Connection*
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available on
request. Please consult factory.
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
DIMENSIONS
14
.55
ø 4,5
.18
36
1.42
M 30 x 1,5
1.20 .06
90°
6
.24
ø2
.08
2
.08
mm
inch
30
1.18
1000
39.37
BPS 303 (Ideal for use in the food industry)
Note: BNS303 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
WIRING DETAILS
ø 37
1.46
44
1.74
ø 30
1.18
14
.55
2
.08
ø2
.08
15
.59
15
.59
5
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
BNS303-11z
13
(black)
14
(blue)
21
(white)
22
(brown)
BNS303-11zG
13
(black)
14
(blue)
21
(white)
22
(brown)
BNS303-12z
22
(black)
14
(blue)
32
(white)
C
(brown)
BNS303-12zG
13
(black)
14
(blue)
21
(white)
C
(brown)
Contacts shown with gate closed
165
SERIES BNS30 & BNS300
Coded-Magnet Sensor with
Integral Safety Control Module
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installations and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Integral reed switch monitoring & control module…
detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies EN954, Safety
Category 1.
• Available in metal (BNS30) or plastic (BNS300)
housings … for application versatility.
Description
The Series BNS30 and BNS300 coded-magnet sensors are
designed for use as a safety interlock switch on movable
machine guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set
consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet
actuator. The reed switches, wired in series, will only close in
the presence of their matched magnetic field array.
In addition, the Series features an integral monitoring and
control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array
(satisfying EN954, Category 1 without use of an ancillary
safety relay module).
Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards. Their tamper-resistant design
prevents bypassing with a simple magnet or improperly coded
magnetic field. In addition, the BNS module features an
integral LED display of switch status and a 1-meter long
prewired pigtail.
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)
Part Number
Contact
Configuration*
Description
1 NC
Multiple reed switch
(24VDC/30mA) assembly
with 1-meter prewired pigtail and built-in LED display
BNS30-01ZG**
and
BNS300-01zG**
BPS300
N/A
BPS303***
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(front mount)
Coded-magnet actuator
(rear mount)
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303
coded-magnet actuator.
**Important Note: The BNS30 and BNS300 are 4-wire sensors
designed to satisfy EN954, Category 1
requirements. They are not designed for use
with a separate safety controller.
***Available with stainless-steel outer jacket. Please consult
factory
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications
include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.
BPS300 Actuator
166
BPS303 Actuator***
BNS300 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic (BNS300)
Brass, nickel-plated (BNS30)
Switching Distance “S”* “On”: 5mm (0.2")
“Off”: 15mm (0.6")
Degree of Protection
IP67
Operating Temperature
–13°F to +158°F
Operating Principle
Magnetic
Shock Resistance
30g/11ms
Vibration Resistance
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
Conformity to Standards CE, UL, CSA
VDE 0660 Part 209
EN954-1
EN1088
BG-GS-ET-14
Maximum Supply Voltage
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Capacity (Power Rating)
Type Connection*
24VDC
30mA
Voltage: 250VAC
Current: 3A (750VA)
1 meter long LiYY4* 0.25mm2
(23AWG) pre-wired pigtail
*Longer prewired cables (3M, 5M, or 10M lengths) available
on request. Also available with M12x1 quick-connect. Please
consult factory.
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS
M 30 x 1.5
1.20 .06
90°
14
.55
ø 4,5
.18
ø2
.08
2
.08
36
1.42
6
.24
30
1.18
2
.08
78
3.07
24 VDC
L+
30 mA
L-
ø 37
1.46
BN
ø 30
1.18
14
.55
1000
40
ø2
.08
15
.59
BK
BK
mm
inch
BU
BNS300-01-zG
15
.59
BPS 300 (Ideal for use in the food industry)
5
Note: BNS300 reed switch assemblies should be mounted at least 50mm (2") apart.
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
167
SERIES BNS333
Coded-Magnet Sensors with
Integral Safety Control Module
Features & Benefits
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Integral LED status indicators … facilitate easy
installation and provide visual indication of switch status.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Integral reed switch monitoring/control module …
detects faults in reed switch array. Satisfies EN954,
Category 1.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Please order BPS300 or BPS303 magnet separately)
Part Number
Contact
Configuration*
BNS333-01YU**
1 NC
Description
The Series BNS333 coded-magnet sensors are designed for
use as a safety interlock switch on movable machine
guards/articulating robot arms. Each sensor set consists of a
multiple reed switch unit and a coded-magnet actuator. The
reed switches, wired in series, will only close in the presence
of their matched magnetic field array.
Description
Multiple reed switch(24VAC/
DC/40mA) assembly with
integral switch monitoring
and control module.
Actuation from rear (“U”)
Same as above but
actuation from front
(“D”)
BNS333-01YD**
BNS333-01YL**
Same as above but
actuation from left (“L”)
In addition, the BNS333 features an integral monitoring and
control circuit which detects faults in the reed switch array
(satisfying EN954, Category 1 without use of an ancillary
safety circuit monitoring module).
BNS333-01YR**
Same as above but
actuation from right (“R”)
BNS333-01YV**
Same as above but
actuation from top (“V”)
Their tamper-resistant design prevents bypassing with a
simple magnet or improperly coded magnetic field. In
addition, the BNS module features an optional built-in LED
display of switch status.
BPS300
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(front mount)
BPS303***
N/A
Coded-magnet actuator
(rear mount)
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
*Contact configuration in presence of BPS300 or BPS 303
coded-magnet actuator.
**The BNS333 is a 4-wire sensor designed to satisfy EN954,
Category 1 requirements. It is not designed for use with a
separate safety controller.
***Available with stainless steel outer jacket. Please consult
factory
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS333 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments. Typical applications
include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and articulating robot arm rest position sensing.
BPS300 Actuator
168
BPS303 Actuator***
BNS333 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 4mm (0.16")
“Off”: 14mm (0.55")
Degree of Protection
IP65
Operating Temperature
–13°F to +158°F
Operating Principle
Magnetic
Shock Resistance
30g/11ms
Vibration Resistance
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
Conformity to Standards CE
VDE 0660, Part 209
EN 954-1
EN 1088
BG-GS-ET-1L
*Without ferromagnetic material in vicinity of switch or magnet. The
proximity of ferrous material may affect switching distances.
Maximum Operating Voltage
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Capacity (Power Rating)
24VDC
40mA
Voltage: 250VAC
Current: 5A
(1,250VA)
Screw terminals
Type Connection
DIMENSIONS & WIRING DETAILS
2
.08
45
1.77
90°
14
.55
ø 4,5
.18
40
1.57
ø2
.08
40
1.57
30
1.18
5,3
.49
15
.59
60
2.36
ø 37
1.46
ø 30
1.18
112
4.40
14
.55
ø2
.08
2
.08
15
.59
7,3
.29
BPS 333 (Ideal for use in the food industry)
1
2
3
4
30
1.18
M20
34,3
1.35
mm
inch
24 VDC
L+
40 mA
L-
5
BNS333-01y
MISALIGNMENT ALLOWANCE
Actuating directions
169
SERIES BNS16
Coded-Magnet Sensors
Features & Benefits
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• Satisfies EN954 Category 4 … when used with
appropriate Series AES safety controller.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact design
• Same mounting as Series AZ16 … ideal alternative in
wet, dirty environments.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(BNS16 actuator sold separately)
Part Number
Description
The Series BNS16 coded-magnet sensors are designed for
use as a safety interlock on movable machine guards. Each
sensor set consists of a multiple reed switch unit and a
coded-magnet actuator. The sensor outputs will only change
state in the presence of their matched magnetic field array.
Both switch and magnet assembly are sealed to IP67
(submersible) standards. The unit features the same mounting
dimensions as our popular Series AZ16 keyed safety interlock
switches ... providing an attractive alternative in applications
characterized by alignment problems and/or harsh
environments.
Actuator Plane
BNS16 - 12ZD
Front cover
BNS16 - 12ZU
Back
BNS16 - 12ZV
Top
BNS16 - 12ZR
Right
BNS16 - 12ZL
Left
BNS16 - 12ZLR
Dual actuation - both Left and Right
(2) BPS16 actuators required
BPS16
Coded-magnet actuator
Operation
The reed switch assembly is typically mounted to a stationary
portion of a guard structure, with the coded-magnet assembly
mounted to the movable element of the machine guard. When
the guard is closed, and the matched magnetic field aligns
with the reed switch unit, the switches will close. When the
guard is open, or the required magnetic-field array is not
properly aligned with the reed switch assembly, the sensor
output will remain “off.”
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact BNS16 is ideal for use on movable
machine guards in hostile environments or where space is
limited. Typical applications include food processing
equipment, chemical processing equipment, woodworking
machinery, packaging machinery, and articulating robot arm
rest position sensing.
Important Note: Series BNS coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series AES safety controller.
(Please see selection chart on Page 189.) Use
with any other safety controller may damage
sensor and/or void warranty.
!
170
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
Actuating Planes
BNS16 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Switching Distance “S”*
Maximum Switching
Frequency
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Operating Principle
Shock Resistance
Vibration Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
“On”: 8mm (0.315")
“Off”: 18mm (0.700")
5H (in combination with Series AES
safety controller)
IP67 per IEC 60529
–25°C to +70°C (–13°F to +158°F)
Magnetic
30g/11ms
10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 1mm
EN 60347-5-3/PDF-M
CE
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Contact Rating*
Maximum Continuous
Current Rating
Maximum Switching
Capacity (Power Rating)
Type Connection
100VAC/DC
0.4A
10VA
3 removable cable entries
(M20x1.5) give access to screw
terminals with self-lifting clamps
for up to 13AWG (2.5mm2)
flexible stranded wire.
*Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are to be suppressed
by means of a suitable circuit.
*When no ferromagnetic material is present in vicinity of the sensor
or actuator.
AXIAL TOLERANCE
DIMENSIONS
WIRING DETAILS
5
1 NO
2 NC
Contacts shown with gate closed
171
SERIES BZ16
Dual-Channel Non-Contact Safety Interlock Switch
(with “tamper-resistant” actuating key)
Features & Benefits
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets.
• 10 mm actuating distance … extends application
versatility.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates most
industrial environments.
• IP 67 rated … ideal for wash-down applications.
• Shock and vibration tolerant … designed to withstand
mechanical abuse.
• Non-contact operation … tolerant to minor misalignment.
• Integral “positive-guided” relays … heightens reliability.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
(Includes 1/2" NPT Plastic Adaptor)
Actuating Key sold separately ... see below
Description
The BZ16 is a non-contact safety interlock switch with an
internal dual-channel design. The assembly consists of the
switch and a coded actuating key. The switch can be actuated
from the front, top, and rear with each version available with
1 NO/1 NC or 2 NC contacts.
Part Number
BZ16-02V
172
Top
Rear
Front
BZ16-11U
The BZ16 safety interlock switch is suitable for sliding, hinged,
or lift-off safety guards. It is ideal for food processing and
other “washdown” applications.
2 NC
BZ16-11D
When 24VDC is applied to the switch an internal oscillator is
energized. The operating frequency is sent to a transmitting
solenoid in the active area of the switch. When the actuating
key is in the proper location it receives the signal, modifies it,
and returns it to the switch. This signal is then sent to a
monitoring module.
Typical Applications
Front
BZ16-02U
BZ16-11V
Thus this dual-channel device only operates if both channels
are actuated concurrently. Any fault in either channel will be
recognized by the next switching cycle such that authorized
operation is prevented.
Description
BZ16-02D
Operation
In addition a permanent magnet is located in the actuator.
When the actuator is in place, the magnetic field activates a
Hall-effect sensor in the active area. This signal is sent to a
second monitoring module.
Contact
Configuration*
1 NO & 1 NC
Top
Rear
ACTUATING KEY
(Sold separately)
Part Number
BZ16 - B1
!
Description
Actuating “Key”
A SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY BE REQUIRED TO
MEET SAFETY CONTROL CATEGORIES 3 OR 4.
BZ16 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Actuator
Switching Distance*
Maximum Switching
Frequency
Operating Temperature
Operating Principle
Conformity to Standards
Fiberglass reinforced thermoplastic
Self-extinguishing
IP67
Non-contact (via coded actuator)
“On”: Max. 10mm (Note a minimum
distance of 2 mm must be
maintained when approaching the
switch laterally)
“Off”: Min. 20mm
1Hz
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Contact Configuration
Power Consumption
Maximum Switching Voltage
Maximum Switching
Capacity
Switching-on time
Type Connection
0°C to 55°C
Magnetic & Hall Effect
EN 60947-5-3/PDF-M
EN 954-1, EN 1088
CE
24VDC ± 15%
1 NO & 1 NC (or) 2 NC
<4W
250VAC
250VAC (max), 1000VA, 4A
DC13, 24VDC, 60W, 2.5A
Approx. 200 ms
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps (max. 2x2.5mm2, AWG2614 solid or stranded wires)
(max. 2x1.5mm2, AWG26-14 with
ferrule)
*When no ferromagnetic material is present in the vicinity of the
sensor or actuator.
DIMENSIONS
WIRING DIAGRAM
Attention: During mounting the orientation
markings on the switch must match
with those of the actuating key!
}
}
BZ16-11
BZ16-02
5
13
11
14
12
21
21
22
22
24VDC
(BZ16-11)
(BZ16-02)
The output contact configuration is a
function of the model BZ16 selected:
BZ16-11 (1NO & 1NC output contacts)
or BZ16-02 (2NC output contacts)
Contacts shown with gate closed
173
SERIES BNS-B20
Coded-Magnet Sensor with
Safety Door Handle
Features & Benefits
w!
e
N
Description
The Series BNS-B20 is designed for use as a combination
door handle and safety interlock switch for use on light to
medium weight hinged and sliding machine guards. Each
unit consists of a door handle assembly equipped with two
multiple reed switch arrays and coded magnet actuators. In
addition, the unit features two latching magnets that attract
pole pieces in the sensor unit—providing a holding force of
approximately 100 Newtons.
The reed switches will only close in the presence of their
matched magnetic field array … thus enabling machine
operation. Both switch and magnet assemblies are sealed
to IP67 standards. Their tamper-resistant design prevents
bypassing with simple magnets. The unit also features an
LED display of switch status and an optional M12x1 quickconnect for ease of wiring and installation.
Operation
The unit consists of two components … the door handle unit
and the sensor unit. The sensor unit is typically mounted to
the stationary portion of the guard structure, with the codedmagnet/handle assembly mounted to the movable element of
the machine guard.
When the guard is closed, the matched magnetic fields align
with the reed switch arrays, closing the switches and enabling
machine operation. When the guard is open, or the magnetic
fields are not properly aligned with their reed switch arrays,
the sensor output will remain “off.”
• Tamper-resistant … cannot be bypassed with simple
magnets
• Sealed for submersibility … assures long-term reliability
in the most hostile environments.
• Dual-function latch & sensor … integral magnetic holding
latch (with force of 100N).
• Application flexibility … 3-contact design compatible with
35mm, 40mm, and 45mm aluminum profiles
• Long-life … no mechanical wear due to non-contact
design.
• Satisfies EN 954 Safety Control Category 4 … when
used with compatible SCHMERSAL Series AES safety
controller.
• Easy-to-install … optional M12 x 1 quick disconnect &
LED status indicator in NC circuit
• Application diversity … suitable for hinged & sliding
guards, available for left- or right-hand doors/guards.
• Integral LED … displays switch status (non-LED models
also available).
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS & ACCESSORIES*
(Please order sensor, actuator-door handle unit and
optional connector separately)
Part Number
BNS-B20-12ZG-L
BNS-B20-12ZG-R
Sensor unit for right-hand
hinged door
BNS-B20-12ZG-H
Sensor unit for both rightand left-hand hinged door
174
Termination
1 meter of
bottom-mounted
cable**
1 meter of
rear-mounted
cable**
BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-L Sensor unit for left-hand
hinged door
Bottom-mounted
M12 conncetor
BNS-B20-12ZG-ST-R Sensor unit for right-hand (M12x1, 8-pin)
hinged door
BNS-B20-B-01
Actuator-door handle unit
N/A
M12-8P-5M
5m cable with M12x1,
8-pin connector
N/A
Note: Sensor unit is also available for ASI Safety-at-Work bus
systems. Please add suffix “-AS” to sensor part number.
*Important Note: Series BNS coded-magnet sensors are for use
in safety applications only when used with a
SCHMERSAL Series safety controller.
Compatible models include:
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
AES
Typical Applications
The sealed low-profile, ergonomic door handle system is ideal
for use on movable machine guards in hostile environments.
The absence of protruding elements eliminate/reduce risk of
injury and unintentional opening of the guard. Typical applications include food processing equipment, chemical processing
equipment, woodworking machinery, packaging machinery,
and printing equipment.
Description
Sensor unit for left-hand
hinged door
1135
1165
1235
1265
2135
2165
AES 2335
AES 2285
AES 1102
AES 1112
SRB 207AN
SRB 301LCB
** 3, 5, and 10 meter cable lengths available on request;
add suffix “-XXm”
!
USE WITH ANY OTHER SAFETY CONTROLLER MAY
DAMAGE SENSOR AND/OR VOID WARRANTY.
SERIES BNS-B20 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Principle
Maximum Sensing Gap
(Sar)
(Sao)
Protection Class
Ambient Operating
Temperature
Maximum Storage
Temperature
Switching Frequency
Resistance to Shock
Resistance to Vibration
Max. door/guard weight
Conformity to Standards
Maximum Latching Force
Safety Control Category
Compatible Extrusion
Frames
DIMENSIONS
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic
Magnetic
22mm
0mm
IP67
–25°C to +70°C
–25°C to +70°C
5 Hz
30g/11ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
Hinged guard: 5Kg
Sliding guard: 3Kg
IEC 60947-5-3
BG-GS-ET-14
UL
CSA
Approx. 100N (22 lbs.)
Up to Safety Control Category 4
per EN 954-1 when used with
appropriate SCHMERSAL Series
AES safety controller
35mm, 40mm, 45mm
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Switching Voltage
Maximum Switching Current
Maximum Switching Capacity
Indication of Switching
Condition
Termination
Contact Configuration
24 VDC
10mA
240mW
LED (Illuminated when guard
is closed)
M12x1 or cable (LiYY 6 x 0.25mm2)
1 N.O. & 2 N.C.
(LED in N.C. circuit)
Note: Available in “ASI Safety-at-Work” configuration.
WIRING DETAILS
Contacts shown
with gate closed
PIN configuration M12, 8 pins
Note: Loads with high switch-on or switch-off voltage
spikes must be suppressed by an appropriate
protective circuit.
5
175
SERIES CSS 180
Pulse-Echo Based
Non-Contact Safety Sensor
Features & Benefits
w!
e
N
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile
environments.
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and
actuator required for operation.
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy
installation and troubleshooting.
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of Safety
Control Category 4. *See note below.
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application
versatility.
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACCESSORIES
(Accessories Ordered Separately)
Model Number
Description
The CSS 180 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is
designed for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged,
sliding or removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity devices with defined behavior under fault conditions
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M
(self-monitoring).
Description
CSS-8-180-2P-E-L
End or single device with pre-wired cable
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L
End or single device with diagnostic
output, pre-wired cable
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L
Series device with double pre-wired cable
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L
Series device with diagnostic output,
pre-wired cable
CST-180-1
Actuator
CSA-M-1
Magnetic latch
H-18
Mounting clamp
Sensors available with M12 cable connector – Add ST after L in
catalog number
Operation
The CSS 180 Safety Sensor and CST 180 actuator are a
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to
the actuator.
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up
to 500 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the
monitoring of the safety outputs, a number of CSS 180 Safety
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the control category. Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill the
requirements of Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1.
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking machinery.
176
Safety Control Module Requirements
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause
the outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond.
This must be tolerated by the control module. The following SCHMERSAL safety control modules are recommended for this application: SRB 301 LCB and SRB 324ST
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Switching Distance
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Response Time
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic
IP67
8mm (Nominal)
7.0mm to 9.5mm (Maximum)
–25°C to +55°C
–25°C to +85°C
≤ 0.5mm
≤ 0.2mm
≤ 30ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
30g/11ms
CE
BG
EN 60947-5-3 UL
EN 954-1
IEC 61508
Mode of Operation
Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Operating Current
No Load Current
Residual Current
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Rated Insulation Voltage
Safety Outputs
Safety Output Current
Safety Output
Voltage Drop
Signaling Output
Signaling Output
Operating Voltage
Signaling Output
Operating Current
Type Interconnection
Cable
Inductive
24 VDC -15%/+10%
1.0A
0.05A
≤ 0.5mA
0.8kV
32 VAC/VDC
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof
0.5A per output
Max. 0.5V
PNP, short-circuit proof
Max. 4V below rated operating
voltage
Max. 0.05A
4x0.5mm2, 5x0.34mm2, or
7x0.25mm2
DIMENSIONS
CSS 180 Safety Sensor
CST Actuator
5.6mm hole diameter
Refer to order information for cable
types, cable length and cable crosssectional area.
5
Mounting Clamp
Magnetic Latch
38
14
6
36
16
34
21
5,2
5,2
28
1,5
18
60
177
SERIES CSS 180 TECHNICAL DATA
SWITCHING DISTANCES, FLUSH MOUNTING
Typical Response Range
of the Sensor CSS 180
SON Switch-on point
SON <SH <SOFF
SOFF Switch-off point
SH = Hysteresis area
Sao Assured operation point
Switching distance S
Sar Assured release point according to
EN 60947-5-3
Offset
The envelope curves indicate the switch-on
and switch-off points of the CSS 180 sensor
relative to the target. The maximum offset of
the target from sensor axis is approx. 5mm.
Flush-mounting of the sensor or actuator
reduces the switching distance. Changes in
temperature have only a slight effect on the
switching points.
Minimum distance between two sensor sets: approximately 100mm
FLUSH MOUNTING OF THE SENSOR CSS 180
The CSS 180 sensor and the CST 180
actuator can be flush-mounted, however,
the switching distance is reduced by
approximately 1.5 – 2mm. When the
sensor and actuator protrude 2mm out of
their mountings the switching distance is
not reduced.
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs
Visual diagnostic (red)
Cause of fault
1 pulse
Fault on Output Y1
2 pulses
Fault on Output Y2
3 pulses
Cross-wire short Y1/Y2
4 pulses
Ambient temperature too high
5 pulses
Incorrect or defective actuator
Continuous
Internal fault
178
Sensor condition
Diagnostic LED color Electronic diagnostic Safety
output 24 VDC, 50 mA outputs
in sensor end cap
No target/Power on
Actuated
Actuated in limit area
Fault
Green
Yellow
Flashes yellow
Flashes red
0V
24 V
2 Hz cycle
10 s delay
24 V -> 0 V
Six different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LED
flashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light.
0V
24 V
24 V
1 min delay
24 V -> 0 V
SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 1
Safety Sensors in large systems
The sensors have separate input and output
cables. The output of one sensor can be
directly wired into the input of the next sensor. The sensor chain can be built up over a
length of two hundred meters.
Sensors used:
1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P-E-L:
This sensor has one output cable. It is
designed for the beginning of a chain
or for use as a single device.
first sensor is wired into the input of
the next sensor and so on. This type
of sensor can also be used as the first
sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage is bridged to the safety inputs.
3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L:
These sensors have separate input
and output cables. The output of the
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180
CSS-8-180-2P-Y-L
Input
Operating Voltage
Safety Input
Output
Operating Voltage
Safety Output
Gray cable
(BN) brown
(BU) blue
(BK) black
(WH) white
Black cable
(BN) brown
(BU) blue
(BK) black
(WH) white
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
Black
(BN)
(BU)
(BK)
(WH)
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
5
CSS-8-180-2P-E-L
Output
Operating Voltage
Safety Output
cable
brown
blue
black
white
179
SERIES CSS 180 WIRING EXAMPLE 2
Series connection of
Safety Sensors CSS 180
in small systems with a
centralized control
cabinet or wiring via
junction boxes.
Sensors used:
1 Safety Sensor CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L:
This sensor has one output cable. It is
designed for the beginning of a chain or for
use as a single device.
3 Safety Sensors CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L:
The inputs and outputs of the sensors are
brought out in one cable. The sensors are
wired together in series in the control cabinet
or in junction boxes.
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS-8-180
Note: CSS units should be connected to the
same regulated power supply.
CSS-8-180-2P+D-M-L
Operating Voltage
Safety Input
Safety Output
(BN)
(BU)
(WH)
(VT)
(RD)
(BK)
brown
blue
white
violet
red
black
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
channel 1
channel 2
(GY)
gray
diagnostic output
(BN)
(BU)
(BK)
(WH)
brown
blue
black
white
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
(GY)
gray
diagnostic output
CSS-8-180-2P+D-E-L
Operating Voltage
Safety Output
180
This type of sensor can also be used as the
first sensor in a chain, if the supply voltage is
bridged to the safety inputs. For very long
sensors chains it is recommended to feed the
power supply directly to the first sensor in the
chain to avoid excessive voltage drop. The safe
outputs of the last sensor in the chain are connected to the safety control module.
If junction boxes are used, standard installation
cable can be used for the wiring between junctions. When laid together with control cables in
a separated cable channel, shielding is not
necessary.
Series wiring of the
Safety Sensor CSS 180:
A number of CSS 180 safety sensors
can be wired together in series to form
a chain. The redundant outputs of the
first sensor are in this case wired to the
inputs of the second sensor, and so on.
The safety sensors in the chain are selfmonitoring. The last sensor in the chain
provides the two short-circuit proof, PNP
outputs each rated at 500mA for further
connection to the safety control circuit.
The safety requirements according to
EN 954-1, Control Category 4 remain
fulfilled for the complete chain. Faults
within the chain, e.g., a cross-wire short,
are detected. This includes faults in the
wiring to the safety control monitor,
which are also automatically detected.
To make cable routing and interconnection of the safety sensors as simple as
possible, a wide range of pre-wired
options are available:
200 m
For large, extensive guard systems, the
Safety Sensor is available with separate
input and output cables. The series
wired safety sensors can then be built
up to a length of over two hundred
meters by “daisy chaining” the devices.
When the cables are routed in control
cable channels, the cables do not need
to be shielded. The Y in the part number
of the Safety Sensor CSS 180 identifies
this version.
For compact systems, or where the
control cables are parallel routed to a
centralized control cabinet, the input
and output leads of the safety sensor
are combined in one cable. The series
wiring of a number of sensors in this
case can be realized in the control
cabinet or junction box. This version is
identified by an M in the part number
of the Safety Sensor CSS 180.
A single cable version is available for
individual sensor monitoring and is also
suitable for the first sensors in a series.
The E in the part number of the Safety
Sensor CSS 180 identifies this version.
▼
▼
SERIES CSS 180 APPLICATION NOTES
Note on the total length of a safety
sensor chain
The voltage drop over a long sensor
chain should be taken into account when
planning cable routing.
The exact value of the operating voltage,
wire cross-section and cable length, its
temperature, the number of sensors connected and the input load of the safety
control monitor are all factors that must
be considered.
An approximately 200m long sensor
chain consisting of six sensors has
at 20°C, 100mA input current into
the safety control monitor and
0.5mm2 cable cross-section, a voltage drop of approximately 1.5V. If
junction boxes are installed, a cable
with 1.5mm2 cross-section should
be laid between the junction boxes.
When the cables are routed in control
cable channels, shielding is not necessary. The cables must however be routed separately from supply and power
cables. Local sources of external interference must be properly suppressed.
5
The power supply for the CSS 180
safety sensors must provide protection
against permanent overvoltage.
Therefore, SELF or PELF mains supply
units are recommended. The maximum
permissible fuse protection for the sensor chain is 1.6A gL/gG.
181
SERIES CSS 180 APPLICATION NOTES
Misalignment in the safety guard can be
easily compensated.
The application, mounting and usage
Both the sensor and actuator are small
and compact. They can be fitted easily
in any position on a machine guard or
other object to be monitored. The actuator has two sets of fixing holes for
attachment parallel or square to the
mounting surface. The sensor can be
attached using a mounting clamp
(accessory) or with the two M18 nuts
(supplied).
If required, both the actuator and the
sensor can be flush mounted using the
M18 x 1mm standard housing threads.
The sensor and actuator are encapsulated, vibration-resistant and suitable for
application in harsh, dusty or dirty environments. They comply to the requirements for the degree of protection IP 67.
Adjustment is simple. A large switching
distance and the possibility of also being
able to operate the sensor and actuator
with an offset enables large tolerances
to be accommodated on the safety
guard.
The small hysteresis of 0.5mm and a
repeatability of 0.2mm result in precise,
repeatable switching points throughout
its operational lifetime.
The correct functioning of the sensor, a
fault in the sensor output, a crosswire
short and actuation of the sensor itself
by the actuator are signalled by the
visual diagnostic 3 color LED. The LED
can also be used as an adjustment aid
during fitting.
182
The electronic diagnostic output indicates an actuated sensor. If a sensor is
operated near the limit of its switching
distance, for example due to the sagging
of a guard door, it is detected even
before the safety outputs are disabled,
and results in an intermittent pulse on
the electronic diagnostic output and
visual diagnostic LED.
In a similar way, faults which do not
immediately compromise the safe
operation of the sensor, for example a
crosswire short, are signalled as an
advance warning. The machine can in
this case be run down in a controlled
manner.
COMPATIBLE CSS 180 SAFETY CONTROLLERS SRB 301 LCB
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
Power Consumption
Fuse (Input Power)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
Switching Capacity
(Auxilliary Contacts)
Application Category
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type & Materials
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
Monitored Contact
Configuration
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
Number & Type Auxilliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling
Output)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
Feedback Monitoring
LED Displays
Conformity to Standards
Stop Category
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
24 V AC/DC
1 (Single or Dual channel)
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Contact Resistance
Air Cleaner &
Creepage Distance
Cable Connections
Terminal Labeling
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA
Internal glass fuse F1: T 0.25 A
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
24 VDC, 2 A
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
≤ 30 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning,
positive-guided
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
• Screw terminals for
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)
• Automatic
Yes
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
0
4
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Mechanical Life
Expectancy
Weight
Mounting
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
>107 switching cycles
5
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)
DIN rail (35mm)
Terminal Connections For Use With CSS 180
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
Monitored Input #1
(N.C.)
24
Monitored Input #2
(N.C.)
S12
Safety Output #3
(N.O.)
33
34
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic or
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset
X1
X2
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Auxiliary Output
(N.C.)
41
42
183
SERIES CSS 34
Pulse-Echo Based Compact
Non-Contact Safety Sensor
Features & Benefits
w!
e
N
• Compact size … ideal for limited space applications.
• Non-contact sensing … for long term reliability.
• Four different actuating surfaces … for a variety of
mounting options.
• Sealed for moisture protection … ideal for most hostile
environments. Meets both IP65 and IP67 requirements.
• Tamper-resistant … frequency-matched sensor and
actuator required for operation.
• Integral LED diagnostic indicators … facilitate easy
installation and troubleshooting.
• Integral self-monitoring … satisfy requirements of Safety
Control Category 4. *See note below.
• Designed for “daisy chaining” … up to 200m.
• Dual PNP 500mA safety outputs … for application
versatility.
• Integrated mounting plate included … allows for easy
and accurate alignment of sensor and actuator.
AVAILABLE MODELS AND ACTUATORS
(Actuators Ordered Separately)
Model Number
Description
The CSS 34 non-contact, electronic safety sensor is designed
for application in safety circuits and is used for monitoring the
position of movable safety guards. In this application the safety sensor monitors the closed position of hinged, sliding or
removable guards with the aid of a coded actuator.
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor fulfills the requirements for proximity devices with defined behavior under fault conditions
according to EN 60947-5-3 with the classification PDF-M
(self-monitoring).
Operation
The CSS 34 Safety Sensor and CST 34 actuator are a
matched pair. As the actuator approaches the sensor, the
sensor excites the actuator at a predetermined resonant
frequency and the reads back the actuator oscillation. The
sensor evaluates the actuator frequency and its distance to
the actuator.
Identification of the actuator is interpreted as a closed guard
by the safety sensor, and the safety outputs are enabled.
The safety sensor is a dual channel design with two shortcircuit proof, safe PNP outputs, each of which can switch up
to 250 mA. Due to continuous internal function tests and the
monitoring of the safety outputs, a number of CSS 34 Safety
Sensors can be wired in series without detriment to the control category. Series wired safety sensors continue to fulfill the
requirements of Control Category 4 according to EN 954-1.
Typical Applications
The sealed, compact units are ideal for use on movable
machine guards where multiple guard monitoring on a
machine is required, and/or where hostile environments
exist. Typical applications include printing machinery, textile
machinery, paper converting equipment, material handling
systems, packaging machinery, chemical processing equipment, and woodworking machinery.
184
Description
CSS12-34-VDML
Top Actuating surface with
diagnostic output
CSS12-34-VDMST
Top Actuating surface with diagnostic
output, M12 cable connector
CSS14-34-SDML
Side Actuating surface with
diagnostic output
CSS14-34-SDMST
Side Actuating surface with diagnostic
output, M12 cable connector
CST34-S-1
Side surface actuator
CST34-V-1
Top surface actuator
Sensors available with a serial diagnostic cable, for use with a
PROFIBUS DP network. Please consult factory.
Safety Control Module Requirements
Dual-channel safety inputs, suitable for PNP semiconductor outputs. The internal function tests of the sensor cause
the outputs to periodically switch off for a millisecond.
This must be tolerated by the control module. The following SCHMERSAL safety control module is recommended
for this application: SRB 301 LCB, SRB 324 ST
*Note: A safety control module may be required for reset
function and/or feedback monitoring functions, as
well as increased output current requirements.
SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Degree of Protection
Switching Distance
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Hysteresis
Repeatability
Response Time
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Conformity to Standards
Glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic
IP65 and IP67
Top (V) 12mm Nominal
10-15mm (Maximum)
Side (S) 14mm Nominal
12-17mm (Maximum)
–25°C to +70°C
–25°C to +85°C
1mm
≤ 0.5mm
≤ 30ms
10-55Hz, amplitude 1mm
30g/11ms
CE
BG
EN 60947-5-3 UL/CSA
EN 954-1
IEC 61508
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mode of Operation
Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Operating Current
No Load Current
Residual Current
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Rated Insulation Voltage
Safety Outputs
Safety Output Current
Safety Output
Voltage Drop
Signaling Output
Signaling Output
Operating Voltage
Signaling Output
Operating Current
Interconnection Cable:
Connector:
Inductive
24 VDC -15%/+10%
0.6A
0.1A
≤ 0.5mA
1 kV
32 VAC/VDC
(2) PNP, short-circuit proof
0.25A per output
Max. 0.5V
PNP, short-circuit proof
Max. 4V below rated operating
voltage
Max. 0.05A
Y-UL2517/8xAWG22 (8x0.35mm2), 2m
M12x1, 8 pin quick connect
DIMENSIONS
CST Actuator
CSS 34 Safety Sensor
5
Integrated Mounting Plate
(included with delivery)
185
SERIES CSS 34 TECHNICAL DATA
SWITCHING DISTANCES
The actuating curves represent the points
at which the CSS 34 sensor switches on
and off upon the approach of the actuator.
Actuation From Side
Actuation From Top
Legend
S
Switching Distance
V, V1, V2
Possible misalignment
(see drawings at right)
SON
Switch-on point
SOFF
Switch-off point
SH
Hysteresis area
SH = SOFF – SON
Sao
Assured operation point
Sar
Assured release point
(according to EN60947-5-3)
Sideways Misalignment
Horizontal: Max ±10mm (V2)
Vertical:
Max ±18mm (V1)
Top Misalignment
Horizontal: Max ±8.5mm (V)
Minimum distance between two
sensor sets: approximately 100mm
Function table of visual diagnostic LED, electronic diagnostic output and safety outputs
Visual diagnostic (red)
Cause of fault
1 pulse
Fault on Output Y1
2 pulses
Fault on Output Y2
3 pulses
Cross-wire short Y1/Y2
4 pulses
Ambient temperature too high
5 pulses
Incorrect or defective actuator
Continuous
Internal fault
186
Sensor condition
Diagnostic LED color Electronic diagnostic Safety
output 24 VDC, 50 mA outputs
in sensor end cap
No target/Power on
Actuated
Actuated in limit area
Fault
Green
Yellow
Flashes yellow
Flashes red
0V
24 V
2 Hz cycle
10 s delay
24 V -> 0 V
Six different fault conditions are signalled by the diagnostic LED
flashing with predefined pulse sequence or with continuous red light.
0V
24 V
24 V
30 min delay
24 V -> 0 V
SERIES CSS 34 WIRING EXAMPLE 1
Series wiring with single diagnostic output
The supply voltage is wired to both safety inputs
of the last sensor of the chain (starting from the
safety controller). The safety outputs of the first
sensor are wired to the safety controller. The
sensor chain can be built up over a length of
two hundred meters.
Sensors used:
Safety Sensor CSS14-34-SDML:
This sensor has one output cable. The output of the first sensor is wired into
the input of the next sensor and so on.
SERIES CONNECTION OF CSS 34
5
CSS14-34-SDML
Operating Voltage
Safety Input
Signal Output
Safety Output
(BN)
(BU)
(WH)
(VT)
(GY)
(PK)
(BK)
(RD)
brown
blue
white
violet
gray
pink
black
red
P (+24 V)
0V
channel 1
channel 2
diagnostic
nonfunction
channel 1
channel 2
187
Safer
by
Design
188
BNS SERIES - COMPATIBLE SERIES AES SAFETY CONTROLLERS
SELECTION CHART
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Safety Controller
Suitable for use with
Coded-Magnet Sensor
Part Numbers below
BNS250...
BNS33...
BNS303...
BNS250...
BNS33...
BNS303...
}
}
12Z
or
12ZG
11Z
or
11ZG
BNS16-12Z
BNS33-12Z-2187
BNS250...
BNS33...
BNS303...
}
Max. Number
of DirectlyConnected
BNS Series
Sensors
Safety Controller
Part Number
Number
of Safety
Outputs
Max.
Achievable
Safety
Control
Category per
EN 954-1
Type of
Reset
Feedback
Circuit
(and available supply voltages)
(Enabling
Paths)
1
AES1102 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC)
1
1
Automatic
No
2
AES1112 (24VAC, 24VDC, 110VAC)
1
1
Automatic
No
1
AES1135 (24VDC)
1
1/3*
Automatic
No
2
AES1165 (24VDC)
1
1/3*
Automatic
No
1
AES1235 (24VDC)
2
3
Automatic
Yes
2
AES1265 (24VDC)
2
3
Automatic
Yes
1
AES2135 (24-230V AC/DC)
1
1/3*
Automatic
No
2
(without “daisy
chaining”)
AES2165 (115VAC)
1
1/3*
Automatic
No
1
AES2335 (24-230V AC/DC)
3
3
Automatic
Yes
1
SRB211AN (24VAC/DC)
2 Stop Cat. 0
1 Stop Cat. 1
4
Automatic
or Manual
Yes
1
AES1337 (24VAC/DC)
3
4
Automatic
or Manual
Yes
6
AES2285
SRB207AN-230V (48-240VAC)
2
3
Automatic
or Manual
Yes
11Z
BNS16-12Z
BNS33-12Z-2187
5
*Category 3 when safety controller is directly connected to load.
189
AES 1102/AES 1112
BNS Compatible Controllers
Features
Dimensions
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm
Model
Designation
AES 1102-24VDC
AES 1112-24VDC
AES 1102-24VAC
AES 1112-24VAC
AES 1102-42VAC
AES 1112-42VAC
AES 1102-110VAC
AES 1112-110VAC
AES 1102-230VAC
AES 1112-230VAC
Approvals
190
BG
UL
CSA
• Control Category 1 to EN 954-1
• 1 enabling path
• Monitoring of 1 or a number of guard
devices
• Connection of BNS .. -12z magnetic safety
sensors with 1 NO and 2 NC contacts
• LED function indicators
• Available for various operational voltages
AES 1102/AES 1112
GY
PK
PK
GY
GY
YE
BN
GN
WH
GN
WH
BN
YE
GN
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
WH
Typical
Application
A1
A2
S22
S32 S14
PK
YE
Ue
BN
L1
C
13
K1
24 VDC
AES 1102
K2
K3
14
5
K4
N
Application
Notes
Circuit
Options
• AES to secure a number of guard
devices using series-parallel circuits for Control Category 1 to EN
954-1.
• Only suitable for the connection of
magnetic safety sensors.
M
3
• Use with multiple “daisy-chained”
• Monitoring a number of guard
inputs does not permit identification
devices using BNS 33..-12z-2187
range magnetic safety sensors with of which guard/coded-magnet sensor is in an open/fault condition
isolated contacts.
• The wiring diagram is with guard
devices closed and shows the deenergized condition.
• Monitoring One Guard Device
Monitoring one guard device using
a BNS .. -12z Series coded-magnet
safety sensor.
191
AES 1135/AES 1165
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
Features
Dimensions
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm
Model
Designation
AES 1135-24VDC
AES 1165-24VDC
Function
Table
AES 1135
Approvals
192
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 1 enabling circuit
• Enable delay time can be modified
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded
magnet sensors or E-stops
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1
• Monitoring for short-circuit between
connections with NO-NC contact
combination
• Connection of input expansion modules
possible
BG
UL
CSA
Additional semiconductor output Y
Function of output Y
Switching Condition
Y1
Y2
Enable
No enable
Enable circuit closed
Enable circuit open
AES 1135/AES 1165
Typical
Applications
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
AZM 415-22
A1 A2 11 12 13 14
21 22 23 24
L1
+24
VDC
L1
4
A1 S1
3 S1
+24 VDC
S
21 S2
2
31
S1
A1
S13
S14
S21
S22
13
K1
AES
1165/116
6
100m
A
max.
K1
max.
100mA
AES 1145/1146
S2
K2
A2 S1
3
A2
K2
AES 1135
Y1
Y2
X1
14
2
14
S S2
1 S2
14
14
0V
14
K3
M
K3
K4
M
0V
K4
N
N
N
M
SK3
SK1
M
3
3
Application • AES to achieve up to Control
Notes Category 3.
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or
removable guard device using
a solenoid interlock.
• The NC contact must have positive
opening function when the guard
device is opened.
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
can be achieved by substantiation
and documentation of exclusion
Circuit
Options
• Extension of Enable Delay Time
The enable delay time can be
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by
changing the position of a jumper
link connection under the cover of
the unit.
of “faults due to breakage or
loosening of the actuator or in the
solenoid interlock”.
• If the load is directly switched by
the AES, the complete system can
be classified in Control Category 3
to EN 954-1. If one or two external
relays or contactors are used to
switch the load, the system can
then only be classified in Control
Category 3 to EN 954-1 if exclusion
of the fault “Failure of the external
5
contactors” can be
substantiated and is
documented, e.g. by using
reliable de-rated contactors.
A second contactor leads to an
increase in the level of security by
redundant switching of the load.
• The wiring diagram is with guard
device closed and shows the
de-energized condition.
• Monitor 2 NC Contacts
Jumper A1 (24 VDC) to X1
193
AES 1235/AES 1265
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
Features
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety
controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Failure of door contacts to open or close
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections
• Interruption of the switch connections
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control
of the guard door monitor
AES 1235-24VDC
AES 1265-24VDC
Function
Table
Approvals
194
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 2 enabling circuits
• Enable delay time can be modified
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded
magnet sensors or E-stops
• NO-NC contact combination can be
connected
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller
for Stop Category 0 to EN 60204-1
• Monitoring for short-circuit between
connections with NO-NC contact
combination
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics
• 2 short-circuit proof additional transistor
outputs
• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays
• Start function
• Operational voltage 24 VDC
• Connection of input expansion modules
possible
• Additional contact by means of output
expansion modules
Additional semiconductor output Y
Function of output Y
Switching Condition
AES 1235
Y1
Y2
Authorized operation
No authorized operation
Enabling paths closed
Enabling paths open
AES 1265
Y1
Y2
Authorized operation
No authorized operation
Enabling paths closed
Enabling paths open
BG
UL
CSA
AES 1235/AES 1265
Typical
Applications
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
L1
0V
+24 VDC
A1
A2
Y1
X1
23
13
max. 100mA
AES 1235
AES 1236
K1
K2
S13
S14
S21
24
14
S22
K3
K4
0V
SK3
Application • AES achieve Control Category 3 to
Notes EN 954-1.
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or
removable guard device, each
using a coded magnet sensor A.
• The feedback circuit monitors positions of the contactors K3 and K4.
M
3
• If only one external relay or contactor is used to switch the load,
the system can be classified in
Control Category 3 to EN 954-1 if
exclusion of the fault “Failure of
the external contactor” can be
substantiated and is documented,
e.g. by using a reliable de-rated
Circuit • Start Pushbutton s
• Feedback Circuit
Options A start pushbutton (NO) can option- A feedback circuit is shown conally be connected to the inputs in
nected in the wiring diagram. If no
the feedback circuit. With the guard
feedback circuit is used, input X1
device closed, the enabling circuits
must be connected to 24 VDC
are then not closed until the start
supply or a jumper between output
pushbutton has been operated.
Y2 and input X1.
5
contactor. A second contactor
leads to an increase in the
level of security by redundant
switching of the load.
• The wiring diagram is with guard
devices closed and shows the deenergized condition.
• Extension of Enable Delay Time
The enable delay time can be
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by
changing the position of a jumper
link connection under the cover of
the unit.
195
AES 2135
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
Features
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
45 x 100 x 121 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety
controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Failure of door contacts to open or close
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections
• Interruption of the switch connections
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control
of the guard door monitor
AES 2135 24-230V AC/DC
Function
Table
AES 2135
Approvals
196
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 1 enabling circuit
• Enable delay time can be modified
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded
magnet sensors or E-stops
• Can be changed from NO-NC to NC-NC
contact combination
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1
• Monitoring for short-circuit between
connections with NO-NC contact
combination
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics
• Connection of input expansion modules
possible
• 2 semiconductor auxiliary outputs (nonsafety)
BG
UL
CSA
Additional semiconductor output Y
Function of output Y
Switching Condition
Y1
Y2
Enable
No enable
Enable circuit closed
Enable circuit open
AES 2135
Typical
Applications
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
5
Application
Notes
• AES to achieve Control Category 3
to EN 954-1.
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or
removable guard device, each
using a safety coded magnet A.
• If the load is directly switched by
the AES, the complete system can
be classified in Control Category 3
to EN 954-1.
• If one or two external relays or contactors are used to switch the load,
the system can then only be
classified in Control Category 3 to
EN 954-1 if exclusion of the fault
“Failure of the external contactors”
can be substantiated and is documented, e.g. by using reliable
de-rated contactors. A second
contactor leads to an increase in
Circuit
Options
• Modification for 2 NC Contacts
The controller can be modified to
monitor two normally closed contacts by jumping between the terminals X3 and X4. The short circuit
monitoring between connections
then becomes inoperative.
• Extension of Enable Delay Time
The enable delay time can be
increased from 0.1 s to 1 s by
jumping between the terminals X7
and X8.
the level of security by
redundant switching of
the load.
• The wiring diagram is with
guard devices closed and
shows the de-energized
condition.
197
AES 2335
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
Features
Dimensions
ISD
Model
Designation
45 x 100 x 121 mm
The following faults are recognized by the safety
controller and indicated by means of ISD
• Failure of door contacts to open or close
• Short-circuits on or between the switch connections
• Interruption of the switch connections
• Failure of the unit’s internal safety relay to pull-in or
drop-out
• Faults on the input circuits or on the relay control
of the guard door monitor
• Failure of or functional fault on the safety controller
AES 2335 24-230V AC/DC
Function
Table
AES 2335
Approvals
198
• Control Category 3 to EN 954-1
• 3 enabling circuits
• Enable delay time can be modified
• Monitoring of mechanical position switches,
safety switches, solenoid interlocks, coded
magnet sensors or E-stops
• NO-NC contact combination can be
connected
• Can be used as emergency-stop controller
for Category 0 to EN 60204-1
• Monitoring for short-circuit between
connections
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics
• Available for various operational voltages
• Short-circuit proof additional transistor
outputs
• Feedback circuit to monitor external relays
• Start function
• Connection of input expansion modules
possible
• Additional contact by means of output
expansion modules
BG
UL
CSA
Additional semiconductor output Y
Function of output Y
Switching Condition
Y1
Y2
High (+24V)
High (+24V)
Enable circuit closed
Enable circuit open
AES 2335
Typical
Applications
Typical
Wiring
Diagram
Application • The wiring diagram shown achieves
Notes Control Category 1 to EN 954-1.
• Monitoring a sliding, hinged or
removable guard device.
• To achieve Control Category 3 to
EN 954-1, the feedback circuit must
be connected.
• In addition, exclusion of faults due
to breakage or loosening of the
actuator or in the solenoid interlock
Circuit • Start Pushbutton s
Options A start pushbutton (NO) can optionally be connected to the inputs in
the feedback circuit. With the guard
device closed, the enabling circuits
are then not closed until the start
pushbutton has been operated.
5
is to be substantiated and docuand is documented, e.g. by
mented.
using a reliable de-rated
contactor. A second contactor
• The NC contact A must have posileads to an increase in the level
tive opening function when the
of security by redundant switching
guard device is opened.
of the load.
• If only one external relay or contac• The wiring diagram is with guard
tor is used to switch the load, the
device closed and shows the desystem can be classified in Control
energized condition.
Category 3 to EN 954-1 if exclusion
of the fault “Failure of the external
contactor” can be substantiated
• Modification for 2 NC Contacts
• Feedback Circuit
The controller can be modified to
For this purpose, the positive-drive
contacts of the external contactors
monitor two normally closed concan be connected to input X1-X2. The tacts by jumping between the
power supply to this feedback circuit
terminals X3 and X4. The short
circuit monitoring between connecis either from semiconductor output
Y2 or, if this is already used, with 24
tions then becomes inoperative.
VDC from terminal S13 or S21.
199
AES 1337
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
24 VAC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Dual-Channel)
Monitored Contact Configuration
1 N.O. 1 N.C.
Number & Type Safety Outputs
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)
1 N.C. 24 VDC
Typical Input Devices Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal
fuse)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Description
Stop Category
0
The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open
(N.O.) or Normally-Closed (N.C.) outputs. Each is equipped
for connection of one input device in dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature user-selectable monitoredmanual or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of positiveguided controlled loads and cross-short recognition (on
selected models).
Safety Control Category Rating
Per EN 954-1
4
Model AES 1337 shown.
Type Fuse
Hybrid
Selected Features
• Cross-short recognition
• Selectable monitoredmanual or automatic reset
• Feedback monitoring
Front View
AVAILABLE MODELS
AES 1337
Model AES 1337 shown.
200
Model Number
Operating Voltage
AES 1337
24 V AC/DC
AES 1337
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Power Consumption
2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA
Mechanical Life Expectancy
107 switching cycles
Fuse (Input Power)
24 V
Weight
230 gm
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after
interruption of supply voltage)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable surge supressor)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 100mA
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
Contact Type & Materials
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
5
201
SERIES SRB 211 AN
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
TECHNICAL FEATURES
w!
e
N
Input Voltage
24 V AC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
PNP
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C./N.O.)
• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0 (2 safety outputs)
1 (1 safety output)
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
• Stop category 0 & 1
safety outputs
• Selectable trailing edge or
automatic reset
• Resetable electronic fuse
• Feedback monitoring
Description
The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open
and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is
equipped for connection of one monitored input device in
dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring
of positive-guided controlled loads.
AVAILABLE MODELS
202
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 211 AN
24 V AC/DC
SERIES SRB 211 AN
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>10 switching cycles
Weight
255 gm
Mounting
DIN rail
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling
output Y1
Fuse (Input Power)
Internal electronic Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 1.5A
(Resets approx. 1 second)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC 100mA
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
7
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type &
Materials
≤ 40 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
5
203
AES 2285/SRB 207 AN
BNS Compatible Safety Controllers
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Description
The Model SRB 207 AN is a “general purpose” unit
designed for use with safety devices having NormallyOpen (N.O.) and Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts.
Each is equipped for connection with up to six input
devices such as E-stop push button and BNS coded
magnets. In addition it features user-selectable monitoredmanual or automatic reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor
outputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs.
Input Voltage
See available models below
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
6 (Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.O./N.C. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type
semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA
1 - N.C. Auxiliary output
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• Interlocks (N.O./N.C.)
• Limit switches (N.O./N.C.)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
3
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
• Up to 6 monitored devices
• Seven auxiliary outputs
• Selectable monitored-manual or
automatic reset
Front View AES 2285/SRB 207
AVAILABLE MODELS
w!
Ne
204
Model Number
Operating Input Voltage
AES 2285
24 VDC
SRB 207 AN-230V
48 - 230 VAC
AES 2285/SRB 207 AN
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
45mm x 100mm x 121mm
(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Weight
300 gm
Mounting
DIN rail
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
48 VAC-240VAC, 50-60 Hz
Power Consumption
3.0 W max. (For 24 VDC)
Approx. 6.8 VA (For 230 VAC)
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y6)
Fuse (Input Power)
24 V
230 V
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)
Internal electronic Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after
approx. 1 second)
Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping
current > 1 A
Secondary : Internal electronic fuse,
tripping current > 0.12 A
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
Y1-Y6: 24 VDC, 20mA (PNP)
31-32: 24 VDC, 2 A (Dry)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)
Application Category
AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1
Pick-up Delay
≤ 120 ms/≤ 30ns (auto start/reset button)
Drop-out Delay
≤ 20 ms
Contact Type & Material
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
5
205
Safer
by
Design
206
HINGED SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCHES
SELECTION GUIDE
Switch
Series
Housing
Material
ES95 SB
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
7°
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
208
TVS335
Die-cast aluminum,
enamel finish
2°
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
210
TV8S-521
Die-cast zinc,
enamel finish
6°
2 NO & 2 NC
212
T.C 235
Die-cast zinc,
enamel finish
4.5°
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
1 NC
214
T.C 236
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
4.5°
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NC
1 NC
214
TESF
Die-cast zinc
Adjustable
1 NO & 2 NC
2 NO & 2 NC
220
TESZ
Glass-fiber,
reinforced thermoplastic
4.5°
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
224
New!
Angular Displacement
Contact
for Contact Opening Configurations
Catalog
Page
6
207
Series ES95 SB
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch
Typical Applications
The ES95 SB is intended for use as a safety interlock switch
on hinged, movable machine guards which, when open,
expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine hazards.
Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals make them
ideal for use in hostile environments.
Features & Benefits
• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator shaft prevents
bypassing.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption upon only 7° of guard displacement.
• Watertight, oiltight design … meets IP67 washdown
and immersion requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … CSA, IEC
and BG.
• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation
flexibility.
®
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Description
The ES95 SB Series are designed for use with hinged
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator
safety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening
NC contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to
monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them
ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Shown with Safety-Rated
Positive-Break limit switch.
®
Operation
The ES95 SB is a single-piece, electromechanical safety
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged
machine guard. After opening the guard only 7°, the unit’s
positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open
by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These
positive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption (and
machine stoppage).
®
208
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Part Number
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
ES95-SB10/1S
1 NO & 1 NC
ES95-SB20
Description*
Hinged safety interlock
switch with 10mm
diameter shaft bore hole
2 NC
*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.
ES95 SB TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Displacement Angle
for Contact Opening
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Operating Rate
Mounting Arrangement
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass-fibre reinforced, selfextinguishing thermoplastic
7°
Contacts
Contact Configuration
IP67
–22°F to +195°F
10 million operations
3,600 operations/hour (maximum)
Mounts on 9mm diameter shaft
via mounting screw
BG
CSA
SUVA
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
5A/24VAC
6A/400VAC
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for up to 13AWG
SWITCHING DIAGRAM
ES95 SB 1O/1S
ES95 SB 2O
DIMENSIONS
53
2.09
29
1.14
8
.31
5
.20
27
1.06
4,3
.17
8
.31
29
1.14
10
.39
14
.55
20
.79
13
.51
6
20
.78
ø4,3
.17
20
.78
22
.87
41
1.61
60,5
2.38
22
.87
11
.43
mm
inch
18
.71
30
1.18
M20
14
.55
30
1.18
Additional fixing holes can be broken out if required.
209
Series TVS335
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
• Tamper-resistant … integral actuation shaft prevents
bypassing.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption upon only 3° of guard displacement.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and
immersion requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, UL and
CSA.
• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation
flexibility.
• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of
supply voltage and switch operation.
®
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Description
The TVS335 Series are designed for use with hinged movable
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to
monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them
ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Operation
The TVS335 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged
machine guard. After opening the guard only 3°, the unit’s
positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by
a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine
stoppage).
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
Part Number
TV8S-335-11Z
1 NO & 1 NC
TV8S-335-02Z
2 NC
TV10S-335-11Z
1 NO & 1 NC
TV10S-335-02Z
2 NC
TV8S-335-11ZG24
1 NO & 1 NC
TV8S-335-02ZG24
2 NC
TV10S-335-11ZG24
1 NO & 1 NC
TV10S-335-02ZG24
2 NC
Description*
Hinged safety interlock
switch with 8mm
diameter shaft bore
hole
Hinged safety interlock
switch with 10mm
diameter shaft bore
hole
Hinged safety interlock
switch with 8 mm
diameter shaft bore
and integral LED
indicators for supply
voltage (green) and
switch operation
(yellow)
Hinged safety interlock
switch with 10 mm
diameter shaft bore
and integral LED
indicators for supply
voltage (green) and
switch operation
(yellow)
*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.
®
210
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
TVS335 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Displacement Angle
for Contact Opening
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Operating Rate
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diecast aluminum, enamel finish
3°
IP67
–22°F to +158°F
>106 operations
5,000 operations/hour (maximum)
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET15
UL
CSA
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
4A (230VAC)
2.5A (400VDC)
1A (500VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay)
500VAC
6kV
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Electrical Connections
Screw terminals with selflifting clamps 13AWG (2.5mm2)
maximum wire size
DIMENSIONS
*Travel positive break
mm
inch
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
TV8S 335-11z
TV10S 335-11z
13
21
14
22
354°
3° 0 3°
354°
7°
13-14
21-22
7°
TV8S 335-02z
TV10S 335-02z
12
22
11
21
354°
7°
LED Indicators
354°
3° 0 3°
7°
Shown here:
NO contact (model -11ZG24) serves for alarm and
signaling purposes.
11-12
21-22
6
Green LED (gn) indicator for
supply voltage and yellow
LED (ge) indicator for switch
operation for 24VDC. The
LED’s must not be wired,
however, in the safety
circuit!
Shown here:
TV8S 335-11zG24
Protected against wrong polarity connection.
Protected against transient voltages.
211
Series TV8S-521
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
• Tamper-resistant … geometrically-matched mating
actuator prevents bypassing.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption upon only 14° of guard displacement.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and
immersion requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC and BG.
• Flat design … permits opening of hinged guard 180°.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
®
Description
TV8S-521-11/11Z
The TV8S-521 Series are designed for use with hinged
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator
safety. Their flat design permits opening the door 180°. Their
tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC contacts
provide a significantly higher level of safety than conventional,
spring-driven limit switches often used to monitor hingedguard position. Their IP67 rating make them ideal for
interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Operation
The TV8S-521 is a two-piece, electromechanical safety
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged
machine guard. After opening the guard only 6°, the unit’s
normally-closed contacts are forced to open by a direct (nonresilient) actuating mechanism … achieving positive-break at
14°. These positive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption
(and machine stoppage).
Typical Applications
The TV8S-521 Series is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on hinged, movable machine guards which, when
open, expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine
hazards. Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals
make them ideal for use in hostile environments.
®
212
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
TV8S-521-02/20Z
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
Description*
2 NO & 2 NC
Two-piece hinged safety
interlock switch with two
contact blocks, each
having 1 NO & 1 NC
contact
2 NO & 2 NC
Two-piece hinged safety
interlock switch with one
contact block having 2
NO contacts and one
contact block having 2
NC contacts
Note: The TV8S-521 models consist of a base unit, universal shaft
assembly and a fixed hinge block. Please consult factory for
assistance in ordering.
* Please see switch travel diagrams for operating characteristics.
TV8S-521 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Displacement Angle
for Contact Opening
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Diecast zinc, enamel finish
6°
IP67
–13°F to +158°F
>106 operations
EN 1088
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET15
UL & CSA
Displacement angle
for positive-break
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Electrical Connections
14°
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
4A (230VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (Slow-blow)
250VAC
4kV
Screw terminals, maximum
(13AWG wiring including
conductor ferrules)
30
1.18
14
.55
R
Base Unit
11
.4 ,6
6
DIMENSIONS
68
2.68
82
3.23
6
.24
47
1.85
20
.79
ø 6,3
.25
11
.43
40
1.57
20
.79
78
3.07
5,4
.21
6
.24
17
.67
9,6
.38
15
.59
Fixed Hinge Block
M20
92
3.62
27
1.06
mm
inch
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
13
21
14
22
21
13
22
14
S1
S2
TV8S 521-11/11z
322°
8°
14°
6°
20°
18°
0
322°
8°
14°
6°
20°
18°
21
11
22
12
23
13
24
14
6
S1
S2
TV8S 521-02/20z
S1
13-14
21-22
322°
14°
14°
6°
0
6°
14°
14°
S1
11-12
21-22
S2
S2
13-14
21-22
322°
20°
20°
13-14
23-24
Base Unit
213
Series T.C 235/236
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
®
• Tamper-resistant … integral actuator arm prevents
bypassing by operator.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption upon only 4.5° of guard displacement.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown and
immersion requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates the
most hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, UL and
CSA.
• Four 90° actuator head positions … provide installation
flexibility.
Description
The T.C 235/236 Series are designed for use with hinged
movable machine guards which must be closed for operator
safety. Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to
monitor hinged-guard position. Their IP67 rating make them
ideal for interlocking safety guards in hostile environments.
Operation
The T.C 235/236 is a single-piece, electromechanical safety
interlock switch which is designed to mount to a hinged
machine guard. After opening the guard only 4.5°, the unit’s
positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to open by
a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These positivebreak contacts ensure circuit interruption (and machine
stoppage).
Typical Applications
The T.C 235/236 is intended for use as a safety interlock
switch on hinged, movable machine guards which, when
open, expose operator/maintenance personnel to machine
hazards. Their sealed design (IP67) and oil-tolerant seals
make them ideal for use in hostile environments.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
Part Number
T3C235-11Z
T3C236-11Z
1 NO & 1 NC
T3C235-02Z
T3C236-02Z
2 NC
T3C235-01Z
T3C236-01Z
1 NC
T4C235-11Z
T4C236-11Z
1 NO & 1 NC
T4C235-02Z
T4C236-02Z
2 NC
T4C235-01Z
T4C236-01Z
1 NC
T5C235-11Z
T5C236-11Z
1 NO & 1 NC
T5C235-02Z
T5C236-02Z
2 NC
T5C235-01Z
T5C236-01Z
1 NC
Description*
Hinged safety interlock
switch with actuating lever
to right in rest position
Hinged safety interlock
switch with actuating lever
vertical to switch body in
rest position
Hinged safety interlock
switch with actuating lever
to left in rest position
*The actuator head may be rotated into any one of four 90° positions.
®
214
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
T.C 235/236 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Displacement Angle
for Contact Opening
Degree of Protection
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Operating Rate
Conformity to Standards
(Series 235): Diecast zinc, enamel
finish
(Series 236): Glass-fiber, reinforced,
self-extinguishing thermoplastic
4.5°
IP67
–22°F to +175°F
>106 operations
5,000 operations/hour (maximum)
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660-200
BG-GS-ET15
DIN-EN50047
UL
CSA
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Electrical Connections
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
4A (230VAC)
2.5A (400VDC)
1A (500VAC)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse 6A (time-delay) as a
positive-break switch
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals with self-lifting
clamps for 13AWG (2.5mm2)
maximum wire size
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
6
215
T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
180°
3,5° 0
90°
13-14
21-22
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC
T3C 235-11z
12,5°
4,5°
12,5° 4,5°
180°
Slow action
2 NC
12,5° 4,5°
12,5° 4,5°
Slow action
1 NC
180°
12,5° 4,5°
90°
0
11-12
21-22
T3C 235-02z
11-12
T3C 235-01z
0
3,5° 0 3,5°
90°
4,5°
4,5° 0 4,5°
12,5°
12,5°
4,5°
4,5°
4,5° 0 4,5°
12,5°
90°
12,5°
13-14
21-22
T4C 235-11z
11-12
21-22
T4C 235-02z
11-12
T4C 235-01z
90°
12,5°
12,5°
90°
12,5°
Dimensions
mm
inch
M20
M20
Part No.
Types of Actuator Levers
216
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
22
11
12
Lever 3 C
Lever 4 C
Slow action
T3C 235-11z
T4C 235-11z
Slow action
T3C 235-02z
T4C 235-02z
Slow action
T3C 235-01z
T4C 235-01z
T.C 235 TECHNICAL DATA
0 3,5°
0
0
180°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
13-14
21-22
T5C 235-11z
11-12
21-22
T5C 235-02z
11-12
T5C 235-01z
180°
180°
M20
Lever 5 C
T5C 235-11z
T5C 235-02z
T5C 235-01z
6
217
T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
180°
3,5° 0
90°
13-14
21-22
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC
T3C 236-11z
12,5°
4,5°
12,5° 4,5°
180°
Slow action
2 NC
12,5° 4,5°
12,5° 4,5°
Slow action
1 NC
180°
12,5° 4,5°
90°
0
11-12
21-22
T3C 236-02z
11-12
T3C 236-01z
0
3,5° 0 3,5°
90°
4,5°
4,5° 0 4,5°
12,5°
12,5°
4,5°
4,5°
4,5° 0 4,5°
12,5°
90°
12,5°
13-14
21-22
T4C 236-11z
11-12
21-22
T4C 236-02z
11-12
T4C 236-01z
90°
12,5°
12,5°
90°
12,5°
Dimensions
mm
inch
Part No.
Types of Actuator Levers
218
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
22
11
12
Lever 3 C
Lever 4 C
Slow action
T3C 236-11z
T4C 236-11z
Slow action
T3C 236-02z
T4C 236-02z
Slow action
T3C 236-01z
T4C 236-01z
T.C 236 TECHNICAL DATA
0 3,5°
0
0
180°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
4,5°
12,5°
13-14
21-22
T5C 236-11z
11-12
21-22
T5C 236-02z
11-12
T5C 236-01z
180°
180°
Lever 5 C
T5C 236-11z
T5C 236-02z
T5C 236-01z
6
219
SERIES TESF
Adjustable Switching Point
Hinged Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
w!
e
N
• Tamper-resistant … integral switch elements and actuator
prevent bypassing.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption when guard is opened to user’s desired
switching position (angle of opening).
• User-selectable switching point … makes unit suitable for
a wide range of applications.
• Models available for inside-of-guard or front-of-guard
mounting … for application versatility.
• Choice of top or bottom cable entry … for installation
flexibility.
• Permits wide guard opening … up to 180°.
• Splash-proof design … meets IP65 environmental
requirements.
• Slotted mounting holes … permit installation to most
30mm to 60mm aluminum profiles.
• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and
hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety standards … UL, CSA, & BG (in
preparation).
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
®
(Includes hinge switch assembly and additional hinge)
Description
The TESF Series is designed for use with movable hinged
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven limit switches or proximity
switches often used to monitor hinged guard positions.
Their compact, low-profile design and IP65 rating make
them ideal for interlocking hinged safety guards in industrial
environments. Designed to mount directly on the hinged
guard and its stationary frame, it is easy to install on a wide
range of extruded aluminum guard sizes and other guard
styles.
Among its unique features is its ability to adjust the switching
point in the field to meet specific application requirements.*
Once adjusted, the switching point is easily permanently
locked to prevent further adjustment by unauthorized
personnel. In addition it features top or bottom cable entries,
1 NO or 2 NO and 2 NC contacts, designs suitable for insideor outside-guard mounting, and the ability to open a full 180°.
*Note: The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at
a 3° opening angle with positive-break occurring at 5°.
Please note that with use this factory-set point may
increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered ...
especially where finger or hand protection is desired.
Operation
The installed TESF features two integral contact blocks …
each featuring a NO and a NC contacts. NC contacts are
positive-opening, while the NO contact(s) may be used for
signaling purposes. The electromechanical switch elements
are actuated when the hinged guard is opened to the user’s
desired switching position (angle of opening). At this point the
unit’s positive-break, normally-closed contacts are forced to
open by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism, while
the normally-open contacts close. The opening of the positivebreak NC contacts ensure circuit interruption and machine
stoppage. Machine restart is not possible while the
guard remains opened.
220
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Part Number
(Contacts)
TESF/O
(2NO & 2NC)
TESF/180
(2NO & 2NC)
TESF/U
(2NO & 2NC)
TESF/ST24.1PE/U
(1NO & 2NC)
TESF/ST24.2PE/U
(1NO & 2NC)
Description
Type
Connections
For front installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
Screw
terminals
For inside installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
Screw
terminals
For front or inside installation with
user adjustable switching point
Screw
terminals
For front or inside installation with
24VDC
user adjustable switching point
Quick disconnect
(bottom entry)
For front or inside installation with
24VDC
user adjustable switching point
Quick disconnect
(top entry)
TESF/ST24.1PE/O
(1NO & 2NC)
For front installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
24VDC
Quick disconnect
(bottom entry)
TESF/ST24.2PE/O
(1NO & 2NC)
For front installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
24VDC
Quick disconnect
(top entry)
24VDC
TESF/ST24.1PE/180 For inside installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
Quick disconnect
(1NO & 2NC)
(bottom entry)
24VDC
TESF/ST24.2PE/180 For inside installation with factory
set switching point at 3°
Quick disconnect
(1NO & 2NC)
(top entry)
TESFA/180
(2NO & 2NC)
Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable guard frame alignment
aid. For inside installation with
factory set switching point at 3°
Screw
terminals
24VDC
TESFA/ST24.1PE/180 Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable guard frame alignment Quick disconnect
(1NO & 2NC)
aid. For inside installation with
factory set switching point at 3°
(bottom entry)
24VDC
TESFA/ST24.2PE/180 Hinged interlock with integral fixedto-movable guard frame alignment Quick disconnect
(1NO & 2NC)
aid. For inside installation with
factory set switching point at 3°
(top entry)
A 22 mm gap between the door and door frame is required for models with the
alignment aid and for inside mount models.
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number
TESF/S
Additional hinge assembly (without alignment aid)
TESFA/S
Additional hinge assembly (with integral alignment aid)
TESF-14
Switching Point Adjustment Tool
Description
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Materials of Construction
Housing & hinge: die-cast zinc
Cover: thermoplastic
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Silver-nickel, gold-plated
Contact Rating
2A/250 VAC (AC15)
1A/24 VDC (DC13)
Contact System
Cross Point System
Contact Force
1N per contact
Switching Action
Slow-acting, positive-break
NC contacts
Short-Circuit Protection
2.0 A (Slow blow)
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
2.5 kV
Factory Set Displacement
Angle for NC Contact
Opening and NO Contact
Closing
3°
Degree of Protection
IP65
Maximum Opening Angle
180°
Operating Temperature
–10°F to +148°F
Mechanical Life
> 106 Operations (minimum)
Mechanical Loading Capacity
(See dimensional drawings)
F1: 5000 N (110 lbs.)
F2: 5000 N (110 lbs.)
F3: 2000 N (45 lbs.)
Rated Insulation Voltage
250 VAC
Thermal Rated Current
2.5 A
Installed Position
Random
Rated Operating Voltage
250 VAC
Operating Rate
1200 operations/hour (maximum)
Switching of Small Loads
5 VDC/1 mA (minimum)
Shock Tolerance
30g/18ms
Electrical Connections*
Vibration Tolerance
20g, 10 … 200 Hz
Cable Entry
M16 x 1.5
Screw terminals for 15AWG
maximum stranded wire or
24 VDC quick disconnect:
M12 (8 Pole)
Maximum Actuation Speed
180°/0.3 seconds
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, & BGIA (in preparation)
Front installation:
Guard closed
Front installation:
Guard opened through 180°
CONNECTOR PIN CONFIGURATION
Inside installation:
Guard closed
Inside installation:
Guard opened through 180°
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS &
CONTACT SCHEMATICS
6
The unit is delivered factory set with a switching point at a 3° opening
angle and positive-break occurring at 5° (with consideration of the
tolerances and wear at the end of the mechanical lifetime, relative to
the factory preset). Please note that with use this factory-set point may
increase 2° during lifetime. This should be considered … especially
where finger or hand protection is desired. Note: On connector models
contact 43-44 is not wired.
221
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA
DIMENSIONS (SWITCH & HINGE ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)
M16 x 1.5
(Top)
F3
Optional Alignment Aids
F1
(Bottom)
F2
DIMENSIONS (ADDITIONAL HINGE SHOWN WITH ALIGNMENT AIDS)
F3
F1
F2
222
SERIES TESF TECHNICAL DATA
DETERMINING THE DOOR GAP AS DEPENDENT ON OPENING ANGLE, DOOR WIDTH AND OVERLAP
Opening angle “ß” of the door
Door width “C” in mm
3°
4°
5°
6°
7°
8°
Door gap “D” in millimeters with overlap “B” = 0 mm
9°
10°
100
5.2
7.0
8.7
10.4
12.2
13.9
15.6
17.4
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1,000
1,050
1,100
1,150
1,200
1,250
1,300
1,350
1,400
1,450
1,500
7.8
10.5
13.1
15.7
18.3
20.9
23.5
26.2
28.8
31.4
34.0
36.6
39.2
41.8
44.5
47.1
49.7
52.3
54.9
57.5
60.2
62.8
65.4
68.0
70.6
73.2
75.8
78.5
10.5
13.9
17.4
20.9
24.4
27.9
31.4
34.9
38.3
41.8
45.3
48.8
52.3
55.8
59.3
62.7
66.2
69.7
73.2
76.7
80.2
83.7
87.2
90.6
94.1
97.6
101.1
104.6
13.1
17.4
21.8
26.1
30.5
34.8
39.2
43.6
47.9
52.3
56.6
61.0
65.3
69.7
74.0
78.4
82.8
87.1
91.5
95.8
100.2
104.5
108.9
113.2
117.6
122.0
126.3
130.7
15.7
20.9
26.1
31.3
36.6
41.8
47.0
52.2
57.5
62.7
67.9
73.1
78.4
83.6
88.8
94.0
99.3
104.5
109.7
114.9
120.1
125.4
130.6
135.8
141.0
146.3
151.5
156.7
18.3
24.4
30.5
36.5
42.6
48.7
54.8
60.9
67.0
73.1
79.2
85.3
91.4
97.4
103.5
109.6
115.7
121.8
127.9
134.0
140.1
146.2
152.3
158.4
164.4
170.5
176.6
182.7
20.9
27.8
34.8
41.7
48.7
55.6
62.6
69.6
76.5
83.5
90.4
97.4
104.3
111.3
118.2
125.2
132.1
139.1
146.1
153.0
160.0
166.9
173.9
180.8
187.8
194.7
201.7
208.7
23.5
31.3
39.1
46.9
54.7
62.5
70.4
78.2
86.0
93.8
101.6
109.4
117.3
125.1
132.9
140.7
148.5
156.4
164.2
172.0
179.8
187.6
195.4
203.3
211.1
218.9
226.7
234.5
26.0
34.7
43.3
52.1
60.7
69.4
78.1
86.8
95.5
104.1
112.8
121.5
130.2
138.8
147.5
156.2
164.9
173.6
182.2
190.9
199.6
208.3
217.0
225.6
234.3
243.0
251.7
260.3
Calculation example
The actual door gap “D1” is calculated from the door gap “D” calculated according
to the above table less the overlap of door and frame “B”:
D1 = D – B
Example: A door made of 40 mm aluminium profile with a length of 950 mm is to
be secured with a TESF. According to the technical data sheet the safety contact of
the TESF opens at 3° in new state (5° at end of useful life). In new state a door gap
of approx. 49.7 mm is derived from the above table. The actual door gap, calculated
using the above formula D1 = D – B produces (49.7 – 40 = 9.7); D1 = 9.7 mm. At
the end of useful life there is a door gap of approx. 82.8 mm and an actual door
gap of (82.8 – 40 = 42.8); D1 = 42.8 mm.
6
223
Series TESZ
Hinged Safety Interlock Switch
Features & Benefits
• Tamper-resistant … integral switch element and actuator
prevents bypassing.
• “Positive-break” NC contacts … ensure circuit
interruption upon only 4° of guard displacement.
• Splashproof design … meets IP65 environmental
requirements.
• Rugged construction … tolerates mechanical abuse and
hostile environments.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG. (UL and
CSA pending)
• Easy to install … fits most popular extruded hinged guard
designs.
• Compatible with popular extruded profile widths.
• Optional integral manual reset … please consult factory.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number*
Contacts
(Guard Closed)
Description
®
Description
The TESZ Series are designed for use with hinged movable
machine guards which must be closed for operator safety.
Their tamper-resistant design and positive-opening NC
contacts provide a significantly higher level of safety than
conventional, spring-driven limit switches often used to
monitor hinged-guard position. Their compact, low-profile
design and IP65 rating make them ideal for interlocking
hinged safety guards in industrial environments. Designed to
mount directly on the hinged guard and its stationary frame, it
is easy to install on a wide range of guard styles and sizes.
Operation
The installed TESZ features an integral electromechanical
switch element which is actuated when opening a hinged
machine guard. After opening the guard only 4°, the unit’s
positive-break, normally-closed contact(s) are forced to open
by a direct (non-resilient) actuating mechanism. These
positive-break contacts ensure circuit interruption and
machine stoppage. The normally-open signalling contact
closes after 13.5° of guard displacement.
224
11
12
21
22
33
34
11
12
21
22
31
32
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
Hinged safety interlock
switch for 30mm width
extruded guards
TESZ1102/35
TESZ1110/35
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
Hinged safety interlock
switch for 35mm width
extruded guards
TESZ1102**
TESZ1110**
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
Hinged safety interlock
switch for 40mm width
extruded guards
TESZ1102/45
TESZ1110/45
1 NO & 2 NC
3 NC
Hinged safety interlock
switch for 45mm width
extruded guards
*Includes hinge assembly with switch, switch actuator and an
additional hinge assembly (without switch or switch actuator).
**Available with stainless-steel hinges. (Please consult factory)
AVAILABLE ACCESSORIES
Part Number*
Note: Adjustable switching point series TESF hinge
model available. Suitable for front of guard or
inside mounting. Please consult factory.
SWITCHING DIAGRAMS & CONTACT SCHEMATICS
TESZ1102/30
TESZ1110/30
Description
TESZ/S/30
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch
actuator) for 30mm width extruded guards
TESZ/S/35
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch
actuator) for 35mm width extruded guards
TES/S
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch
actuator) for 40mm width extruded guards
TESZ/S/45
Hinge assembly (without switch or switch
actuator) for 45mm width extruded guards
*Includes hinge and hinge pin.
0
13 5 °
4°
11-12
TESZ1102
21-22
33-34
13 °
0
4°
13 5 °
11-12
TESZ1110
21-22
31-32
SERIES TESZ TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Materials of Construction
Displacement Angle for
NC Contact Opening
Degree of Protection
Displacement Angle for
NO Contact Closing
DIMENSIONS*
Maximum Opening Angle
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
mm
Mechanical Loading
inch
Capacity
Operating Rate
Shock Tolerance
Vibration Tolerance
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Hinge: Aluminum
Switch Cover: Thermoplastic
4°
Contacts
Contact Configuration
IP65
13.5°
Contact Rating
Switching Action
135°
–13°F to +149°F
>106 operations
Maximum torque of 3KN/m at
1m distance from hinge
1,200 operations/hour (maximum)
30g/18ms
20g/10… 200Hz
IEC 947-5-1
EN60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660
EN 1088
UL
CSA
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse Withstand
Voltage
Electrical Connections
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
2A (250VAC), AC-15, DC-13
Slow-acting, positive-break NC
contact
6.0A (Slow blow)
250VAC (maximum)
2.5kV
Screw terminals for 15 AWG
maximum stranded wire size
DIMENSIONS
TESZ1102 & TESZ1110
SERIES
13
Dimension “A”
Dimension “B”
Dimension “C”
1.34" (34mm)
5.28" (132mm)
4.41" (112mm)
TESZ1102/35
TESZ1110/35
1.53" (39mm)
5.28" (132mm)
4.41" (112mm)
TESZ1102
TESZ1110
1.73" (44mm)
3.62" (92mm)
2.44" (62mm)
TESZ1102/45
TESZ1110/45
1.93" (49mm)
5.28" (132mm)
4.41" (112mm)
19
.75
36
1.42
5°
Part Number
TESZ1102/30
TESZ1110/30
42
1.65
TESZ/S SERIES
.20
76
2.99
71
2.80
15
.59 5
5
.20
0°
M20
92
3.62
"B"
"C"
mm
inch
6
"A"
"A"
71
2.80
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
225
Safer
by
Design
226
SAFETY-RATED LIMIT SWITCHES
SELECTION GUIDE
Switch
Series
Housing
Material
Housing
Dimensions
Degree of
Protection
Z/T235
Die-cast zinc
11⁄4"×11⁄4"×21⁄2"
IP67
Z/T236
Glass-fibre reinforced
thermoplastic
11⁄4"×11⁄4"×21⁄2"
IP67
Z/T335
Die-cast aluminum
11⁄2"×11⁄4"×3"
IP67
Z/T336
Glass-fibre reinforced
thermoplastic
11⁄2"×11⁄2"×3"
IP67
Z332
Die-cast aluminum
11⁄2"×11⁄2"×3"
IP65
C50
Glass-fibre reinforced
thermoplastic
1"×11⁄8"×3⁄4"
IP30
Contact
Configurations
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NO
2NC
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NO
2NC
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NO
2NC
1 NO & 1 NC
2 NO
2NC
1 NO & 1 NC
(snap-action
only)
1 NO & 1 NC
Catalog
Page
228
236
244
250
6
256
260
227
SERIES Z/T235
Safety-Rated, Positive-Break
Miniature DIN Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide
installation flexibility.
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy
application requirements.
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
®
Description
The Z/T235 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher
level of safety and reliability than conventional spring-driven
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action
contacts.
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal
alternatives to conventional limit switches.
ORDERING GUIDE
FOR FEATURE:
1. Contact operation:
Slow Action
Snap Action
2. Operating head
3. Roller lever
4. Body size
5. No. of NO contacts
6. No. of NC contacts
7. Degree of protection IP 67
8. Sealing of operating head (optional)
Example 1:
Example 2:
228
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
T
Z
V
12 H
2351
1
z
z*
TV12 H 235-11z
ZV 12 H 235-11z
*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.
Typical Applications
The Z/T235 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to
exceed the positive-break point. (See contact function
diagrams: symbol *).
SPECIFY:
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Minimum Cam Speed
(Referenced to Plunger)
Maximum Operating Rate
Bounce Time
Changeover Time
Degree of Protection
Conformity to Standards
Chromated diecast zinc with brown
enamel finish
–22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)
20 million operations
Z235 Series: 0.04m./minute
T235 Series: 2.4m./minute
5000 operations/hour
Z235 Series: £ 3 ms
T235 Series: Function of cam speed
Z235 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum
cam speed
T235 Series: Function of cam speed
IP67
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
BG-GS-ET15
DIN EN 50 047
CSA-C22.2
UL508
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
Z235 Series: 2x0.08 inches
(2x2mm)
T235 Series: 2x0.14 inches
(2x3.5mm)
4A/230VAC
2.5A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (Z235)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts (T235)
Fuse: 10A (time delay)
2.5A (no time delay
6A (time delay) as positive-break
position switch
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals, maximum
2.5mm (AWG13) wire
CONTACT SYSTEMS
Series T235
Slow-action
switch
Series Z235
Snap-action
switch
6
229
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
6
2,5
4 ,8
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
6
2,5
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
4 ,8
ZS 235-11z
ZR 235-11z
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
1
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
1
0
3,5
0
6
13-14
21-22
2,5
2,5
3,8
3,5
0
3,5
13-14
23-24
0
2,5
13-14
23-24
TR 235-20z
11-12
21-22
TR 235-02z
3,5
3,8
2 NC (simultaneous)
0
6
11-12
21-22
2,5
TR 235-11z
6
TS 235-20z
3,5
13-14
21-22
3,8
3,5
0
6
2 NO (simultaneous)
6
TS 235-11z
2,5
3,8
TS 235-02z
3,8
2,5
6
3,8
Dimensions
mm
inch
Rounded plunger
Style S
Roller plunger
Style R
Actuating force/-torque
9 N (19 N positive break)
9 N (19 N positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 235-11z
ZR 235-11z
Slow action
TS 235-11z
TR 235-11z
Slow action
TS 235-20z*
TR 235-20z*
Slow action
TS 235-02z
TR 235-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
230
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
0
6
2,5
0
4 ,8
0
6
2,5
13-14
21-22
4 ,8
Z4S 235-11z
21-22
21-22
21-22
1,4
1
0
6
13-14
21-22
2,5
3,5
2,5
13-14
23-24
3,8
0
6
2,5
3,8
TK 235-11z
13-14
23-24
TK 235-20z
11-12
21-22
TK 235-02z
5,5
9,3
T4R 235-20z
0
6
11-12
21-22
2,5
13-14
21-22
5,2
T4S 235-02z
3,8
9,3
5,2
0
6
3,5
11-12
21-22
2,5
3,6
T4S 235-20z
3,5
5,2
T4R 235-11z
3,8
3,5
0
6
0
13-14
21-22
2,5
13-14
23-24
6
T4S 235-11z
3,8
3,5
0
0
ZK 235-11z
13-14
13-14
1
3,5
13-14
21-22
7,1
Z4R 235-11z
13-14
0
9,3
3,6
13-14
21-22
3,6
5,5
9,3
T4R 235-02z
3,8
3,6
5,5
Rounded plunger (central mounting)
Style 4S
Top roller plunger (central mounting)
Style 4R
One-way roller lever
Style K
9 N (19 N positive break)
9 N (19 N positive break)
8 N (18 N positive break)
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Z4S 235-11z
Z4R 235-11z
ZK 235-11z
T4S 235-11z
T4R 235-11z
TK 235-11z
T4S 235-20z*
T4R 235-20z*
TK 235-20z*
T4S 235-02z
T4R 235-02z
TK 235-02z
* Not for use in safety applications
6
231
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
70°
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
30°
0
70°
30°
57°
57°
70°
13-14
21-22
13-14
30°
0
70°
30°
57°
ZV12H 23511z
57°
13-14
21-22
70°
41°
45°
30°
70°
41°
12° 12°
41°
0
70°
41°
41°
70°
70°
41°
30°
45°
45°
30°
TV12H 23511z
0 30°
30°
70°
13-14
23-24
TV12H 23520z
11-12
21-22
TV12H 23502z
70°
45°
45°
0
30°
45°
41°
30°
2 NO (simultaneous)
2 NC (simultaneous)
70°
13-14
21-22
45°
0
ZV14H 23511z
21-22
12° 12°
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
13-14
21-22
41°
30°
45°
41°
0
30°
30°
TV14H 23511z
13-14
23-24
TV14H 23520z
11-12
21-22
TV14H 23502z
70°
41°
45°
45°
13-14
21-22
41°
41°
70°
70°
0 30°
30°
70°
45°
45°
Dimensions
mm
inch
Roller rocking lever
Style 12H
Roller rocking lever
Style 14H
Actuating force/-torque
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
ZV12H 235-11z
ZV14H 235-11z
Slow action
TV12H 235-11z
TV14H 235-11z
Slow action
TV12H 235-20z*
TV14H 235-20z*
Slow action
TV12H 235-02z
TV14H 235-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
232
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
70°
30°
0
70°
30°
57°
57°
70°
13-14
21-22
13-14
30°
0
57°
ZV7H 23511z
57°
21-22
30°
0
45°
41°
70°
41°
45°
41°
70°
30°
45°
45°
30°
70°
TV7H 23511z
70°
41°
0 30°
30°
70°
13-14
23-24
TV7H 23520z
70°
45°
45°
13-14
TV7H 23502z
41°
21-22
13-14
21-22
0 30°
45°
45°
4
0
70°
13-14
23-24
7
13-14
21-22
T3K 23511z
13-14
23-24
T3K 23520z
11-12
21-22
T3K 23502z
4,3
2,8
41°
30°
4
TV10H 23511z
30°
41°
30°
45°
45°
30°
0
70°
45°
0
Z3K 23511z
1,2
41°
0
41°
70°
11-12
21-22
41°
45°
30°
41°
41°
13-14
21-22
5,5
21-22
70°
13-14
21-22
7
2,8
ZV10H 23511z
12° 12°
30°
0
13-14
21-22
13-14
12° 12°
70°
0
70°
30°
7
TV10H 23520z
4
70°
0
11-12
21-22
2,8
4,3
7
TV10H 23502z
2,8
4,3
Adjustable roller rocking lever*
Style 7H
Rod rocking lever*
Style 10H
One-way roller lever
Style 3K
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
9 N (19 N positive break)
30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
ZV7H 235-11z*
ZV10H 235-11z*
Z3K 235-11z
TV7H 235-11z*
TV10H 235-11z*
T3K 235-11z
TV7H 235-20z*
TV10H 235-20z*
T3K 235-20z*
TV7H 235-02z*
TV10H 235-02z*
T3K 235-02z
* Not for use in safety applications
6
233
Z/T235 TECHNICAL DATA
0
Contact function diagrams
0
12
5
13-14
21-22
9,6
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
13-14
12,8
4,9
10,1
Z4K 23511z
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
21-22
1,8
2
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
0
7
0
12
13-14
21-22
7
0
7,2
7,2
0
12
13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
TK4 23520z
11-12
21-22
TK4 23502z
7,2
7,6
2 NC (simultaneous)
0
12
11-12
21-22
5
TK4 23511z
12,8
T4K 23520z
7
5
13-14
21-22
7,7
4,9
2 NO (simultaneous)
12,8
T4K 23511z
7,6
5
0
ZK4 23511z
4,9
7,7
12,8
T4K 23502z
7,6
4,9
7,7
Dimensions
mm
inch
One-way roller lever
Style 4K
One-way roller lever
Style K4
Actuating force/-torque
6 N (16 N positive break)
6 N (16 N positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
Z4K 235-11z
ZK4 235-11z
Slow action
T4K 235-11z
TK4 235-11z
Slow action
T4K 235-20z*
TK4 235-20z*
Slow action
T4K 235-02z
TK4 235-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
234
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
*Not for use in safety applications.
Safer
by
Design
6
235
SERIES Z/T236
Safety-Rated, Positive-Break
Miniature DIN Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide
installation flexibility.
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy
application requirements.
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
®
Description
The Z/T236 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action
contacts.
Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced housing and IP67 rating
make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit switches.
ORDERING GUIDE
FOR FEATURE:
1. Contact operation:
Slow Action
Snap Action
2. Operating head
3. Roller lever
4. Body size
5. No. of NO contacts
6. No. of NC contacts
7. Degree of protection IP 67
8. Sealing of operating head (optional)
Example 1:
Example 2:
SPECIFY:
T
Z
V
7H
2361
1
z
z*
TV7 H 236-11z
ZV7 H 236-11z
*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.
Typical Applications
The Z/T236 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to
exceed the positive-break point. (See contact function
diagrams: symbol *).
®
236
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Minimum Cam Speed
(Referenced to Plunger)
Maximum Operating Rate
Bounce Time
Changeover Time
Degree of Protection
Conformity to Standards
Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing thermoplastic
–22°F to +175°F (–30°C to +80°C)
20 million operations
Z236 Series: 0.04m./minute
T236 Series: 2.4m./minute
5000 operations/hour
Z236 Series: £ 3 ms
T236 Series: Function of cam speed
Z236 Series: £ 5 ms for minimum
cam speed
T236 Series: Function of cam speed
IP67
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
BG-GS-ET15
DIN EN 50 047
CSA-C22.2
UL508
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
Z236 Series: 2x0.08 inches
(2x2mm)
T236 Series: 2x0.14 inches
(2x3.5mm)
4A/230VAC
2.5A/400VAC
Snap-action, positive-break NC
contacts (Z236)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts (T236)
Fuse: 10A (time delay)
2.5A (no time delay
6A (time delay) as positive-break
position switch
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals, maximum
2.5mm (AWG13) wire
CONTACT SYSTEMS
Series T236
Slow-action
switch
Series Z236
Snap-action
switch
6
237
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
6
2,5
4 ,8
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
6
2,5
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
4 ,8
ZS 236-11z
ZR 236-11z
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
1
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
1
0
3,5
0
6
13-14
21-22
2,5
2,5
3,8
3,5
0
3,5
13-14
23-24
0
0
6
2 NC (simultaneous)
11-12
21-22
2,5
13-14
23-24
TR 236-20z
11-12
21-22
TR 236-02z
3,5
3,8
2,5
TR 236-11z
6
TS 236-20z
3,5
13-14
21-22
3,8
3,5
0
6
2 NO (simultaneous)
6
TS 236-11z
2,5
3,8
6
TS 236-02z
3,8
2,5
3,8
Dimensions
mm
inch
Rounded plunger
Style S
Roller plunger
Style R
Actuating force/-torque
9 N (19 N positive break)
9 N (19 N positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 236-11z
ZR 236-11z
Slow action
TS 236-11z
TR 236-11z
Slow action
TS 236-20z*
TR 236-20z*
Slow action
TS 236-02z
TR 236-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
238
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
0
6
2,5
0
4 ,8
0
6
2,5
13-14
21-22
4 ,8
Z4S 236-11z
21-22
21-22
21-22
1,4
1
0
6
13-14
21-22
2,5
3,5
2,5
13-14
23-24
3,8
0
6
2,5
3,8
TK 236-11z
13-14
23-24
TK 236-20z
11-12
21-22
TK 236-02z
5,5
9,3
T4R 236-20z
0
6
11-12
21-22
2,5
13-14
21-22
5,2
T4S 236-02z
3,8
9,3
5,2
0
6
3,5
11-12
21-22
2,5
3,6
T4S 236-20z
3,5
5,2
T4R 236-11z
3,8
3,5
0
6
0
13-14
21-22
2,5
13-14
23-24
6
T4S 236-11z
3,8
3,5
0
0
ZK 236-11z
13-14
13-14
1
3,5
13-14
21-22
7,1
Z4R 236-11z
13-14
0
9,3
3,6
13-14
21-22
3,6
5,5
9,3
T4R 236-02z
3,8
3,6
5,5
Rounded plunger (central mounting)
Style 4S
Top roller plunger (central mounting)
Style 4R
Top roller lever
Style K
9N (19N positive break)
9 N (19N positive break)
8 N (18 N positive break)
0°: min. 10/60 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 20/120 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 24/240 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Z4S 236-11z
Z4R 236-11z
ZK 236-11z
T4S 236-11z
T4R 236-11z
TK 236-11z
T4S 236-20z*
T4R 236-20z*
TK 236-20z*
T4S 236-02z
T4R 236-02z
TK 236-02z
* Not for use in safety applications
6
239
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
70°
30°
57 °
0
0
70°
30°
57 °
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
13-14
21-22
13-14
7
2,7
13-14
21-22
5,4
ZV1H 23611z
13-14
21-22
21-22
1
12° 12°
70°
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
30° 0
2 NO (simultaneous)
41°
41°
41°
0
41°
70°
30°
30°
0 30°
30°
7
13-14
21-22
T1R 23611z
13-14
23-24
T1R 23620z
11-12
21-22
T1R 23602z
1
13-14
23-24
7
2,3
0
TV1H 23620z
2,3
70°
45°
45°
2,3
TV1H 23611z
70°
41°
45°
45°
2 NC (simultaneous)
0
13-14
21-22
45°
41°
70°
70°
30°
45°
Z1R 23611z
0
11-12
21-22
1
2,3
TV1H 23602z
7
2,3
Dimensions
mm
inch
Roller rocking lever
Style 1H
Top roller lever
Style 1R
Actuating force/-torque
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
30°: min. 92/492 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
ZV1H 236-11z
Z1R 236-11z
Slow action
TV1H 236-11z
T1R 236-11z
Slow action
TV1H 236-20z*
T1R 236-20z*
Slow action
TV1H 236-02z
T1R 236-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
240
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
* Not for use in safety applications
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
70°
30°
57 °
0
70°
30°
57 °
70°
13-14
21-22
13-14
30°
57 °
0
30°
57 °
ZV7H 23611z
21-22
30° 0
41°
70°
41°
41°
41°
0
41°
70°
30°
45°
45°
30°
30°
TV7H 23611z
70°
13-14
21-22
TV7H 23602z
41°
41°
70°
11-12
21-22
13-14
21-22
41°
0
0 30°
45°
45°
30°
4
13-14
21-22
T3K 23611z
13-14
23-24
T3K 23620z
11-12
21-22
T3K 23602z
4,3
4
0
70°
13-14
23-24
7
TV10H 23611z
2,8
41°
30°
45°
45°
30°
0
70°
30°
45°
41°
Z3K 23611z
1,2
41°
TV7H 23620z
70°
45°
45°
30° 0
45°
70°
13-14
23-24
41°
0 30°
70°
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
5,5
21-22
70°
45°
7
2,8
ZV10H 23611z
12° 12°
30°
45°
13-14
21-22
13-14
12° 12°
70°
0
70°
7
TV10H 23620z
4
70°
0
11-12
21-22
2,8
4,3
7
TV10H 23602z
2,8
4,3
Adjustable roller rocking lever*
Style 7H
Rod rocking lever*
Style 10H
One-way roller lever
Style 3K
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
15 Ncm (18.5 Ncm positive break)
9 N (19 N positive break)
30°: min. 240/1440 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 687/4122 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 27/160 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
ZV7H 236-11z*
ZV10H 236-11z*
Z3K 236-11z
TV7H 236-11z*
TV10H 236-11z*
T3K 236-11z
TV7H 236-20z*
TV10H 236-20z*
T3K 236-20z*
TV7H 236-02z*
TV10H 236-02z*
T3K 236-02z
* Not for use in safety applications
6
241
Z/T236 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
0
12
5
13-14
21-22
9,6
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
13-14
12,8
4,9
10,1
Z4K 23611z
13-14
21-22
13-14
21-22
21-22
1,8
2
Slow action
1 NO + 1 NC (break before make)
0
7
0
12
13-14
21-22
7
0
7,2
7,2
0
12
13-14
23-24
13-14
23-24
TK4 23620z
11-12
21-22
TK4 23602z
7,2
7,6
2 NC (simultaneous)
0
12
11-12
21-22
5
TK4 23611z
12,8
T4K 23620z
7
5
13-14
21-22
7,7
4,9
2 NO (simultaneous)
12,8
T4K 23611z
7,6
5
0
ZK4 23611z
4,9
7,7
12,8
T4K 23602z
7,6
4,9
7,7
Dimensions
mm
inch
One-way roller lever
Style 4K
One-way roller lever
Style K4
Actuating force/-torque
6 N (16 N positive break)
6 N (16 N positive break)
Actuating speed Z/T at
30°: min. 44/264 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
30°: min. 56/336 mm/min, max. 1 m/s
Snap Action
positive break
Z4K 236-11z
ZK4 236-11z
Slow action
T4K 236-11z
TK4 236-11z
Slow action
T4K 236-20z*
TK4 236-20z*
Slow action
T4K 236-02z
TK4 236-02z
Part No.
Types of Actuators
242
13
14
21
22
13
14
21
22
13
14
23
24
11
12
21
22
1
* Not for use in safety applications
Safer
by
Design
6
243
SERIES Z/T335
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,
Positive-Break Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide
installation flexibility.
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy
application requirements.
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
• Optional LED indicators … provide visual display of
supply voltage and switch operation.
®
Description
ORDERING GUIDE
The Z/T335 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action
contacts.
FOR FEATURE:
1. Contact operation:
Slow Action
Snap Action
2. Operating head
3. Roller lever
4. Body size
5. No. of NO contacts
6. No. of NC contacts
7. Degree of protection IP 67
8. Sealing of operating head (optional)
Example 1:
Example 2:
Typical Applications
®
244
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL INC.
T
Z
4V
H
3351
1
z
z
T4VH 335-11z
Z4VH 335-11z
Note: The Z/T335 Series is also available with 1 NO and 2 NC and
with 3 NC contacts. Please consult factory.
Their rugged metal housing and IP67 rating make them ideal
alternatives to conventional limit switches.
The Z/T335 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to
exceed the positive-break point. (See contact function
diagrams: symbol *).
SPECIFY:
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Maximum Operating Rate
Bounce Time
Changeover Time
Degree of Protection
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diecast aluminum with enamel
finish
–22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)
30 million operations
5000 operations/hour
Z335 Series: < 2 ms
T335 Series: Function of cam speed
Z335 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed
of 1 mm/minute
T335 Series: Function of cam speed
IP67
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
BG-GS-ET-15
DIN EN 50041
CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1577)
UL508 (Suffix -1594)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
Z335 Series: 2x0.03 inches
T335 Series: 2x0.16 inches
4A/230VAC
2.5A/400VAC
Z335 Series: Snap-action with
positive-break NC
contacts
T335 Series: Slow-action,
positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse: 10A (time delay)
16A (no time delay
6A (time delay) as positivebreak position switch
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals, maximum
2.5mm2 (AWG13) wire
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS
SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS
Slow Action Switch
T335
Snap Action Switch
Z335
LED INDICATOR MODELS
Green LED (gn) indicator supply voltage and yellow LED (ye) indicator for switch operation of
NO or NC contacts for 24VDC. Available for all models of Series 335.
Wiring diagram:
6
Shown here:
Z4VH 335-11zG24
Shown here:
indication of operation of NC contact
(terminals 21-22);
for indication of operation of NO contact use
terminals 13-14
protected against wrong polarity connection
protected against transient voltages 700V
Attention: no inductive loads
245
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
6
2
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
13-14
21-22
3,9
13-14
21-22
3,9
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
1
0
6
2
ZS 335-11z
1
3,9
1,6
6
0
11-12
21-22
2 NC
3,9
1,6
6
11-12
21-22
ZS 335-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
TS 335…
0
3
6
TR 335…
0
3
0
13-14
21-22
2,8
3
3,7
0
6
3
2
2,8
6
6
0
13-14
23-24
-20zh
2,8
6
0
2,8
3,7
4,5
0
6
3
0
11-12
21-22
2
-02zh
2,8
3
2
-11zu
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
1,3
6
2,8
0
3,7
11-12
21-22
-02z
2
13-14
21-22
6
13-14
23-24
-20z
6
6
4,5
3,7
3
0
3
13-14
21-22
2
11-12
21-22
-02z
2
3
-11z
1,3
3
0
-11zu
4,5
13-14
23-24
-20z
0
6
13-14
21-22
-11z
2
ZR 335-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC
break before make or make before break
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
1 NC + 1 NC
(CW-CCW)
ZR 335-11z
2,8
2
4,5
6
2,8
Dimensions
mm
inch
Types of Actuators
Rounded plunger
Style S
Roller plunger
Style R
Part No.
Actuating Force
246
Actuating Force
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 335-11z
12 N
ZR 335-11z
12 N
22
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 335-02z
12 N
ZR 335-02z
12 N
13
14
Slow Action
TS 335-11z
21
22
Make before break
TS 335-11zu
13
14
Slow Action
TS 335-20z*
23
24
2-step
TS 335-20zh*
11
12
Slow Action
TS 335-02z
21
22
2-step
TS 335-02zh
11
12
21
22
Slow Action
1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
15 N
17 N
14 N
* Not for use in safety applications
TR 335-11z
TR 335-11zu
TR 335-20z*
TR 335-20zh*
TR 335-02z
TR 335-02zh
15 N
17 N
14 N
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA
24° 0
80°
80°
24°
45°
80°
13-14
21-22
45°
24° 0
13-14
21-22
21-22
21-22
45° 80°
19°
80°
11-12
21-22
19°
11-12
21-22
19°
24°
80°
80°
36°
80°
-20z
0
80°
36°
13-14
4 5°
4 5°
80°
36°
80°
45°
0
56°
36°
80°
45°
80°
13-14
23-24
36°
80°
-02z
36°
80°
34°
34°
24 °
24 °
34°
34°
56°
34°
24 °
0 24°
80°
50°
-11zu
58°
24 °
34°
80°
-11z
-20zh
36°
0
36°
34°
80°
80°
80°
11-12
21-22
21-22
36°
0
36°
11-12
21-22
80°
24 °
4V operating head with
roller rocking lever
Style H
80°
-02z
0
36°
13-14
56°
4 5°
4 5°
80°
0
36°
36°
56°
80°
24 °
24 °
34°
34°
80°
11-12
21-22
21-22
80°
45°
24 °
34°
-02zh
13-14
21-22
-02z
36°
0
36°
80°
0
56°
45°
45°
0
36°
80°
80°
36°
56°
36°
24° 0 24°
34°
34°
24 °
16°
36°
34°
34°
24 °
80°
80°
11-12
21-22
45°
56°
56°
34°
24 °
-11zu
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
16°
0
45°
13-14
21-22
80°
13-14
23-24
80°
11-12
21-22
4V operating head with
adjustable roller rocking lever
Style 7H*
Actuating Force
36°
80°
80°
34°
24°
-20z
80°
56°
24 °
34°
80°
-20zh
36°
0
36°
36°
56°
34°
-11z
16°
0
45°
-11zu
24°
13-14
23-24
16°
36°
24° 0 24°
34°
34°
80°
80°
36°
13-14
23-24
36°
-02zh
11-12
21-22
T4V10H 335…
80°
24°
-20z
Z4V10H 335-02z
11-12
8° 8°
13-14
21-22
34°
24°
16°
0
56°
11-12
21-22
-01/01zh
21-22
13-14
23-24
16°
36°
24° 0 24°
45°
19°
21-22
56°
24°
0
36°
Z4V7H 335-02z
11-12
0
19°
T4V7H 335…
80°
13-14
21-22
34°
45°
8° 8°
T4VH 335…
36°
0
36°
34°
80°
45° 80°
21-22
80°
Z4V10H 335-11z
12° 12°
0
19°
Z4VH 335-02z
11-12
45°
8° 8°
-11z
13-14
21-22
45°
13-14
12° 12°
0
45°
80°
24°
45°
Z4V7H 335-11z
13-14
12° 12°
80°
13-14
21-22
45°
24° 0
80°
80°
24°
45°
Z4VH 335-11z
34°
24 °
80°
4V operating head with
rod rocking lever
Style 10H*
Actuating Force
Actuating Force
Z4VH 335-11z
27 Ncm
Z4V7H 335-11z*
27 Ncm
Z4V10H 335-11z*
27 Ncm
Z4VH 335-02z
27 Ncm
Z4V7H 335-02z*
27 Ncm
Z4V10H 335-02z*
27 Ncm
T4VH 335-11z
T4VH 335-11zu
T4VH 335-20z*
T4VH 335-20zh*
T4VH 335-02z
T4VH 335-02zh
TVH 335-01/01z
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
26.5 Ncm
(other levers upon request)
T4V7H 335-11z*
T4V7H 335-11zu*
T4V7H 335-20z*
T4V7H 335-20zh*
T4V7H 335-02z*
T4V7H 335-02zh*
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
* Not for use in safety applications
T4V10H 335-11z*
T4V10H 335-11zu*
T4V10H 335-20z*
T4V10H 335-20zh*
T4V10H 335-02z*
T4V10H 335-02zh*
6
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
247
Z/T335 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
13-14
21-22
4,2
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
6,3
2,1
13-14
21-22
8,8
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
6,3
1,6
4,2
4,2
2 NC
0
11-12
21-22
11
3,6
8,8
8,8
Z1K 335-02z
11-12
11-12
21-22
21-22
1,4
T1K 335…
0
3,2
T3K 335…
0
6,3
3,2
13-14
21-22
3
0
4
0
6,3
3,2
2,1
3
6,3
4
5
3
0
11
0
11-12
21-22
2,1
-02zh
3
4,5
-11zu
6,6
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
11
2,8
6,3
0
11
4,5
6,3
11
8,2
9,9
11-12
21-22
-02z
4,5
13-14
21-22
9,9
13-14
23-24
-20z
6,3
11
8,2
6,6
11-12
21-22
6,6
13-14
21-22
0
-20zh
0
11
6,3
4,5
13-14
23-24
0
6,3
-02z
2,1
6,6
-11z
1,3
3,2
0
-11zu
5
13-14
23-24
-20z
0
6,3
13-14
21-22
-11z
2,1
Z3K 335-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC
break before make or make before break
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
1 NC + 1 NC
(CW-CCW)
Z3K 335-11z
2,2
1
0
11
4,5
Z1K 335-11z
4,5
6,3
Dimensions
mm
inch
Types of Actuators
One-way roller lever
Style 1K
One-way roller lever
Style 3K
Part No.
Actuating Force
248
Actuating Force
Snap Action
positive break
Z1K 335-11z
12 N
Z3K 335-11z
5.0 N
22
Snap Action
positive break
Z1K 335-02z
12 N
Z3K 335-02z
5.0 N
13
14
Slow Action
T1K 335-11z
21
22
Make before break
T1K 335-11zu
13
14
Slow Action
T1K 335-20z*
23
24
2-step
T1K 335-20zh*
11
12
Slow Action
T1K 335-02z
21
22
2-step
T1K 335-02zh
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
1
15 N
17 N
14 N
* Not for use in safety applications
T3K 335-11z
T3K 335-11zu
T3K 335-20z*
T3K 335-20zh*
T3K 335-02z
T3K 335-02zh
6.3 N
7.2 N
6.0 N
Safer
by
Design
6
249
SERIES Z/T336
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,
Positive-Break Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Watertight design … meets IP67 washdown requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Six popular actuator styles … for application versatility.
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide
installation flexibility.
• Slow or snap-action operation … choose to best satisfy
application requirements.
• Safety-system approved … models with positive-break
contacts approved for use in machine guarding applications.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
UL and CSA.
®
Description
The Z/T336 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
Each is available with a choice of six standard actuators …
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod
rocking lever, adjustable roller rocking lever and one-way
roller lever … mountable in any one of four 90° positions. All
rocking levers are positively-locked to the shaft, and are
adjustable throughout 360° in 10° increments.
Units are available with a choice of slow-action or snap-action
contacts.
Their rugged fiberglass-reinforced thermoplastic housing and
IP67 rating make them ideal alternatives to conventional limit
switches.
ORDERING GUIDE
FOR FEATURE:
1. Contact operation:
Slow Action
Snap Action
2. Operating head
3. Roller lever
4. Body size
5. No. of NO contacts
6. No. of NC contacts
7. Degree of protection IP 67
8. Sealing of operating head (optional)
Example 1:
Example 2:
SPECIFY:
T
Z
4V
H
3361
1
z
z*
T4VH 336-11z
Z4VH 336-11z
*Available on rocking lever actuator style only.
Typical Applications
The Z/T336 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional
limit switches. Models with positive-break NC contacts are
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to
exceed the positive-break point. (See contact function
diagrams: symbol *).
®
250
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Maximum Operating Rate
Bounce Time
Changeover Time
Degree of Protection
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Glass fiber reinforced selfextinguishing thermoplastic
–22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)
30 million operations
5000 operations/hour
Z336 Series: < 2 ms
T336 Series: Function of cam speed
Z336 Series: < 2 ms for cam speed
of 1 mm/minute
T336 Series: Function of cam speed
IP67
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
BG-GS-ET-15
DIN EN 50041
CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1577)
UL508 (Suffix -1594)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
Z336 Series: 2x0.03 inches
T336 Series: 2x0.16 inches
4A/230VAC
2.5A/400VAC
Z336 Series: Snap-action with
positive-break NC
contacts
T336 Series: Slow-action,
positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse: 10A (time delay)
16A (no time delay
6A (time delay) as positivebreak position switch
500VAC
6kV
Screw terminals, maximum
2.5mm (AWG13) wire
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS
SLOW ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS
Slow Action Switch
T336
Snap Action Switch
Z336
6
251
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
6
2
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
13-14
21-22
3,9
13-14
21-22
3,9
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
1
0
6
2
ZS 336-11z
1
3,9
1,6
6
0
11-12
21-22
2 NC
3,9
1,6
6
11-12
21-22
ZS 336-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
TS 336…
0
3
6
TR 336…
0
3
0
13-14
21-22
2,8
3
3,7
0
6
3
2
2,8
6
6
0
13-14
23-24
-20zh
2,8
6
0
2,8
3,7
4,5
0
6
3
0
11-12
21-22
2
-02zh
2,8
3
2
-11zu
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
1,3
6
2,8
0
3,7
11-12
21-22
-02z
2
13-14
21-22
6
13-14
23-24
-20z
6
6
4,5
3,7
3
0
3
13-14
21-22
2
11-12
21-22
-02z
2
3
-11z
1,3
3
0
-11zu
4,5
13-14
23-24
-20z
0
6
13-14
21-22
-11z
2
ZR 336-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC
break before make or make before break
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
1 NC + 1 NC
(CW-CCW)
ZR 336-11z
2,8
2
4,5
6
2,8
Dimensions
mm
inch
Types of Actuators
Rounded plunger
Style S
Roller plunger
Style R
Part No.
Actuating Force
252
Actuating Force
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 336-11z
12 N
ZR 336-11z
12 N
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 336-02z
12 N
ZR 336-02z
12 N
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
22
13
14
Slow Action
TS 336-11z
21
22
Make before break
TS 336-11zu
13
14
Slow Action
TS 336-20z*
23
24
2-step
TS 336-20zh*
11
12
Slow Action
TS 336-02z
21
22
2-step
TS 336-02zh
11
12
21
22
Slow Action
1 NC CW + 1 NC CCW
15 N
17 N
14 N
* Not for use in safety applications
TR 336-11z
TR 336-11zu
TR 336-20z*
TR 336-20zh*
TR 336-02z
TR 336-02zh
15 N
17 N
14 N
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA
80°
24° 0
80°
24°
45°
80°
13-14
21-22
45°
24° 0
13-14
21-22
21-22
21-22
45° 80°
19°
80°
11-12
21-22
19°
11-12
21-22
19°
24°
80°
80°
36°
4 5°
4 5°
80°
36°
80°
45°
0
56°
36°
80°
45°
80°
13-14
23-24
36°
80°
-02z
80°
36°
13-14
80°
-20z
0
36°
34°
34°
80°
24 °
24 °
34°
34°
56°
34°
24 °
0 24°
50°
-01/01zh
-11zu
58°
24 °
34°
80°
-11z
-20zh
36°
0
36°
34°
80°
80°
80°
11-12
21-22
21-22
36°
0
36°
11-12
21-22
80°
80°
-02z
4V operating head with
roller rocking lever
Style H
0
56°
4 5°
4 5°
80°
0
36°
36°
56°
24 °
21-22
80°
11-12
21-22
80°
45°
24 °
34°
-02zh
13-14
21-22
-02z
36°
0
36°
80°
0
56°
45°
45°
0
36°
80°
80°
36°
56°
36°
24° 0 24°
34°
34°
24 °
16°
36°
34°
34°
24 °
80°
80°
11-12
21-22
45°
56°
56°
34°
24 °
-11zu
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
16°
0
45°
13-14
21-22
80°
13-14
23-24
80°
11-12
21-22
4V operating head with
adjustable roller rocking lever
Style 7H*
Actuating Force
36°
80°
80°
34°
24°
-20z
80°
56°
24 °
34°
80°
-20zh
36°
0
36°
36°
56°
34°
-11z
16°
0
45°
-11zu
24°
13-14
23-24
16°
80°
34°
34°
80°
80°
36°
13-14
36°
24° 0 24°
34°
34°
24 °
24 °
36°
13-14
23-24
36°
-02zh
11-12
21-22
T4V10H 336…
80°
24°
-20z
Z4V10H 336-02z
11-12
8° 8°
13-14
21-22
34°
24°
16°
0
56°
11-12
21-22
80°
21-22
13-14
23-24
16°
36°
24° 0 24°
45°
19°
21-22
56°
24°
0
36°
Z4V7H 336-02z
11-12
0
19°
T4V7H 336…
80°
13-14
21-22
34°
45°
8° 8°
T4VH 336…
36°
0
36°
34°
80°
45° 80°
21-22
80°
Z4V10H 336-11z
12° 12°
0
19°
Z4VH 336-02z
11-12
45°
8° 8°
-11z
13-14
21-22
45°
13-14
12° 12°
0
45°
80°
24°
45°
Z4V7H 336-11z
13-14
12° 12°
80°
13-14
21-22
45°
24° 0
80°
80°
24°
45°
Z4VH 336-11z
34°
24 °
80°
4V operating head with
rod rocking lever
Style 10H*
Actuating Force
Actuating Force
Z4VH 336-11z
27 Ncm
Z4V7H 336-11z*
27 Ncm
Z4V10H 336-11z*
27 Ncm
Z4VH 336-02z
27 Ncm
Z4V7H 336-02z*
27 Ncm
Z4V10H 336-02z*
27 Ncm
T4VH 336-11z
T4VH 336-11zu
T4VH 336-20z*
T4VH 336-20zh*
T4VH 336-02z
T4VH 336-02zh
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
TVH 336-01/01z
26.5 Ncm
(other levers upon request)
T4V7H 336-11z*
T4V7H 336-11zu*
T4V7H 336-20z*
T4V7H 336-20zh*
T4V7H 336-02z*
T4V7H 336-02zh*
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
* Not for use in safety applications
T4V10H 336-11z*
T4V10H 336-11zu*
T4V10H 336-20z*
T4V10H 336-20zh*
T4V10H 336-02z*
T4V10H 336-02zh*
6
27.5 Ncm
28 Ncm
27.5 Ncm
253
Z/T336 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
13-14
21-22
4,2
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
6,3
2,1
13-14
21-22
8,8
13-14
13-14
21-22
21-22
6,3
1,6
4,2
4,2
2 NC
0
11-12
21-22
11
3,6
8,8
8,8
Z1K 336-02z
11-12
11-12
21-22
21-22
1,4
T1K 336…
0
3,2
T3K 336…
0
6,3
3,2
13-14
21-22
3
0
4
0
6,3
3,2
2,1
3
6,3
4
5
3
0
11
0
11-12
21-22
2,1
-02zh
3
4,5
-11zu
6,6
13-14
23-24
-20zh
11-12
21-22
-02zh
11
2,8
6,3
0
11
4,5
6,3
11
8,2
9,9
11-12
21-22
-02z
4,5
13-14
21-22
9,9
13-14
23-24
-20z
6,3
11
8,2
6,6
11-12
21-22
6,6
13-14
21-22
0
-20zh
0
11
6,3
4,5
13-14
23-24
0
6,3
-02z
2,1
6,6
-11z
1,3
3,2
0
-11zu
5
13-14
23-24
-20z
0
6,3
13-14
21-22
-11z
2,1
Z3K 336-02z
11-12
21-22
0,8
Slow action 1 NO + 1 NC
break before make or make before break
2 NO simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
2 NC simultaneous contacts staggered
(2-step)
1 NC + 1 NC
(CW-CCW)
Z3K 336-11z
2,2
1
0
11
4,5
Z1K 336-11z
4,5
6,3
Dimensions
mm
inch
Types of Actuators
One-way roller lever
Style 1K
One-way roller lever
Style 3K
Part No.
Actuating Force
254
Snap Action
positive break
Z1K 336-11z
12 N
Z3K 336-11z
5.0 N
Snap Action
positive break
Z1K 336-02z
12 N
Z3K 336-02z
5.0 N
13
14
21
22
11
12
21
22
13
14
Slow Action
T1K 336-11z
21
22
Make before break
T1K 336-11zu
13
14
Slow Action
T1K 336-20z*
23
24
2-step
T1K 336-20zh*
11
12
Slow Action
T1K 336-02z
21
22
2-step
T1K 336-02zh
1
Actuating Force
15 N
17 N
14 N
* Not for use in safety applications
T3K 336-11z
T3K 336-11zu
T3K 336-20z*
T3K 336-20zh*
T3K 336-02z
T3K 336-02zh
6.3 N
7.2 N
6.0 N
Safer
by
Design
6
255
SERIES Z332
Heavy-Duty Safety-Rated,
Positive-Break Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
• “Positive-Break” NC contacts … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Watertight design … meets IP65 washdown requirements.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Five popular actuator styles … for application versatility.
• Four 90° actuator mounting positions … provide
installation flexibility.
• Safety-system approved … for use in machine guarding
applications.
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … IEC, BG, VDE,
and CSA.
®
Description
The Z332 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contacts provide a higher
level of safety and/or reliability than conventional spring-driven
switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
Each is available with a choice of five standard actuators …
rounded plunger, roller plunger, roller rocking lever, rod
rocking lever and adjustable roller rocking lever … mountable
in any one of four 90° positions. All rocking levers are
positively-locked to the shaft, and are adjustable throughout
360° in 10° increments.
Their rugged metal housing and IP65 rating make them ideal
alternatives to conventional limit switches.
Typical Applications
The Z332 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Featuring positive-break NC contacts, they are
approved for use in safety systems. For safety applications
the switch must be mounted such that the actuating element
of the machine displaces the switch actuator far enough to
exceed the positive-break point. (See contact function
diagrams: symbol *).
256
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
ORDERING GUIDE
FOR FEATURE:
1. Contact operation:
Snap Action
2. Operating head
3. Roller lever
4. Body size
5. No. of NO contacts
6. No. of NC contacts
7. Degree of protection IP 65
Example:
SPECIFY:
Z
4V
H
3321
1
y
Z4VH 332-11y
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Mechanical Life
Minimum Cam Speed
(Referenced to Plunger)
Maximum Operating Rate
Bounce Time
Changeover Time
Degree of Protection
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diecast aluminum with enamel
finish
–22°F to +195°F (–30°C to +90°C)
1 million operations
1 mm/minute
5000 operations/hour
2 ms
1.5 ms for minimum cam speed
IP65
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
BG-GS-ET-15
DIN EN 50041
CSA-C22.2 No. 14 (Suffix -1220)
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Contact Gap
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Short Circuit Protection
Rated Insulation Voltage
Rated Impulse
Withstand Voltage
Type Terminals
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated contact
bridges
2 × 0.05 in. immediately after
switching
2 × 0.19 in. with full travel of
actuator
2.5A/250VAC
Z332 Series: Snap-action with
positive-break NC
contacts
Fuse: 20A (time delay)
25A (no time delay
6A (time delay) as positivebreak position switch
250VAC
6kV
Screw terminals, maximum
2.5mm (AWG13) wire
Contact System
Magnetic storage
snap-action system
SNAP ACTION CONTACT SYSTEMS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Snap-action switching, 1 NO 1 NC
Change-over, double-gap with four terminals
Two electrically separated moving contacts
Plated solid silver contacts
Positive-break NC contact with snap-action switching
Reliable change-over, even with slow plunger actuation
Snap-action system separated from contact system
Full contact force right up to operating point
Constant operating position, as independent of contact burning
Short, constant flight time of only 1.5 ms
Short bounce time
High short-circuit resistance
High vibration resistance of 10 g still only 0.01 mm before operating point
Wide contact gap of 2 × 1.25 mm immediately after switching point
6
257
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA
Contact function diagrams
0
6
2
3,2
Snap action positive break
1 NO + 1 NC
0
6
2
13-14
21-22
3,2
13-14
21-22
ZS 332-11y
ZR 332-11y
13-14
13-14
21-22
1,4
21-22
1,4
Dimensions
mm
inch
Types of Actuators
Rounded plunger
Style S
Roller plunger
Style R
Actuating Force
Part No.
13
14
21
22
1
258
Snap Action
positive break
ZS 332-11y
31 N
Actuating Force
ZR 332-11y
31 N
Z332 TECHNICAL DATA
90°
24° 0
90°
24°
39°
39°
90°
13-14
21-22
13-14
24° 0
90°
24°
39°
39°
Z4VH 33211y
13-14
21-22
15° 15°
35 Ncm
24°
Z4V7H 33211y
21-22
4V operating head with
adjustable roller lever
Style 7H*
Actuating Force
24° 0
13-14
15° 15°
35 N
Z4V10H 33211z
21-22
4V operating head with
rod rocking lever
Style 10H*
Actuating Force
Z4V7H 332-11y*
90°
13-14
21-22
15° 15°
4V operating head with
roller rocking lever
Style H
Z4VH 332-11y
90°
13-14
21-22
Actuating Force
Z4V10H 332-11y*
35 Ncm
* Not for use in safety applications
6
259
SERIES C50
Compact, Safety-Rated,
Positive-Break Limit Switches
Features & Benefits
®
• “Positive-Break” NC contact … won’t stick or weld shut.
• Compact size … ideal where space is limited.
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant housing … tolerates hostile
environments.
• Meets rigid safety standards … IEC, VDE.
• Electrically-insulated contacts … for added safety.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Part Number
Contact
Configuration
C50R
1 NO & 1 NC
Roller plunger
C50ST
1 NO & 1 NC
Adjustable plunger
Actuator Type
Description
Typical Applications
The C50 Series limit switches are designed for use with
movable machine guards/access gates which must be closed
for operator safety … and for any other presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional limit
switches. Their positive-opening NC contact provides a higher
level of safety and reliability than conventional spring-driven
limit switches whose contacts can weld or stick shut.
The C50 Series may be used in any presence/position
sensing application normally addressed with conventional
limit switches.
Operation
The C50 Series are designed to mount to a machine structure
such that when the guard is open, it directly drives the switch
actuator to force open the unit’s positive-break, normallyclosed contact. The positive-break NC contact ensures circuit
interruption (and machine stoppage). Note that for safety
applications, these switches must be mounted in the “positivemode.”
Optional Safety
Controller.
See Page 328.
®
260
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES C50 TECHNICAL DATA
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Housing
Operating Temperature
Degree of Protection
Maximum Operating Rate
Mechanical Life
Repeat Accuracy
Conformity to Standards
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts
Contact Configuration
Glass-fiber reinforced (UL94-V0),
self-extinguishing thermoplastic
–13°F to +167°F
IP30
1,800 operations/hour
>5 million operations
+/- 0.02 mm
IEC 947-5-1
EN 60947-5-1
DIN VDE 0660 Part 200
EN 60204-1
UL & CSA
Contact Rating
Switching Action
Electrical Connections
Short Circuit Protection
Fine silver
Double-pole, double-break with
electrically-separated bridges
4A/400VAC (AC-15)
Slow-action, positive-break NC
contacts
Screw terminals (M3), maximum
13AWG wire
4A (Slow-blow)
DIMENSIONS & SWITCHING DIAGRAMS
7,5
.30
Switching Diagram
2,5
.10
21,5
.85
ø12
.47
C50 R
mm
inch
7,5
.30
ø5
.20
19-24
.75-.94
Circuit Diagram
15
.59
6
30
1.18
ø 4,2
.17
3,5
0.14
C50 ST
10,5
.41
21,5
.85
25
.98
C50 Series
261
Safer
by
Design
262
SAFETY LIGHT CURTAINS & BEAMS
SELECTION GUIDE
Series
Description
Range
Catalog Page
SLC/G 410
14mm & 30mm
5m (14mm)
18m (30mm)
273
SLB 200
Safety Category 2 Light Beam
4m
304
SLB 400
Safety Category 4 Light Beam
15m
305
7
263
Safer
by
Design
264
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
System features:
• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1
or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4
• Different integrated functions:
Start/Restart interlock
Contactor monitoring
Muting
Blanking
Master/Slave configuration
• Diagnostic display
• Optical synchronisation
• Maintenance- free
• Compact design
• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment
7
265
Introduction – Optoelectronic safety sensors
EN 61496
The field of automation is
subject to a permanent and
innovative change of products
and applications. The focus is
on increasing the productivity
and realising a smoothrunning production process
with a minimum of human
interventions on machinery
and systems. The ideal, a fully
automatic and totally safe
machine however will always
remain a dream, though the
robots used in production
plants already are a big step
towards this aim.
Human intervention and
knowledge will always be
required for the
commissioning, monitoring
and maintenance of modern
industrial systems. Man
however is not infallible and
ignorance or lack of
information, thoughtlessness
or negligence often leads to
damages.
266
For these reasons,
harmonised standards, i.e. the
Machinery Directive EC
98/37/EC and other
regulations, were
implemented at European
level.
These standards aim at
detecting and constructively
avoiding all possible risks and
hazards during the planning
and project phase of
machines and systems. Safety
components must be used to
minimise or eliminate the
residual risks.
In this way, manufacturers and
users are making equivalent
efforts to set up an optimal
process flow, which offers the
highest possible protection to
the operating staff. The
challenge for all
manufacturers of safety
components is to design
efficient and safe product
solutions for mechanical
engineers. Flaps and doors
are the simplest means of
access to the machine.
These separating
hardguarding safety solutions
offer an efficient and effective
protection against hazardous
movements and products
being ejected from the
machine.
When these safety guards are
opened, the machine is
brought to standstill (through
the corresponding safety
sensor transmitting the “stop”
signal to the control), which
interrupts and therefore slows
down the production. In case
of continuous processes,
which must not be
interrupted, solenoid
interlocks protect man and the
work piece against damages.
Safety fences are not suitable
for production processes
requiring the material to be
transported into the working
area by means of conveyor
belts, as it does not allow for
an ergonomic and optimal
work sequence.
A “virtual safety guard“ in the
form of an active
optoelectronic device (AOPD),
e.g. a safety light curtain, is a
perfect solution, offering both
an optimal protection of
human life and uninterrupted
production process.
Typical applications:
• Power-driven machines
• Power-driven presses in
metalworking, plastics,
leather, stone working and
rubber processing industry
• Folding presses and
attachments
• Filter presses
• Punching machines in
leather, textile and plastics
processing
• Robots stations and welding
booths
• Printing and injection
moulding machines
• Transport engineering
• Pallet loaders and palletizers
• Materials handling and
storage technology
• and so on
Depending on the application,
the AOPD are used for danger
point, danger zone and
perimeter guarding. The user
can choose from a large range
of different optoelectronic
safety solutions e.g. light
barriers, light grids, light
curtains and laser scanners.
7
267
Design and operating principle
Optoelectronic
Safety light barriers
The safety light curtains and
safety light grids of the SLC
and SLG meet the
requirements of Control
Category 2 or 4 to EN 954-1
and Type 2 or Type 4 to EN
61496.
They safeguard danger points
and hazardous areas on
different applications, e.g.
presses, robot stations,
injection moulding machines,
pallet machines, etc.
In these active optoelectronic
protective devices (AOPD), the
emitter and receiver are fitted
in two separate enclosures.
An invisible infrared signal is
sent from the emitter and
evaluated by the receiver. If
the light beam is interrupted
by an object or a person, a
stop signal is emitted to bring
the machine to standstill.
The protection field is defined
by the height and width of the
protection field. The
protected height is the range
between the first and last
infrared light beam of a light
curtain. The protected height
defines the physical size of
the system to be used.
The protected width or
operating range is the
distance between the
transmitter and receiver unit.
For an accurate detection of
objects with different sizes in
the hazardous area,
the user can choose between
light grids and light curtains
with different resolutions.
Here, the following rule
applies: the smaller the
distance between two
adjacent light beams, the
more accurate the detection
sensitivity of the AOPD.
For the detection of body
parts, a distinction is made
between finger, hand and
body protection.
EN 999 or EN 294 sets the
biometric data for finger
protection to 14 mm, for hand
detection to 40 mm, for leg
detection up to 70 mm and for
body detection to over 70
mm.
Safety light grids with 2, 3 or 4
individual beams are generally
used to detect the penetration
of the entire human body.
Safety light curtains are
multiple beam systems (> 5
individual beams) and can
also detect smaller objects in
case of intrusion into the
protected field. The
maintenance- free safety light
curtains and light grids can be
smoothly fitted using an M12
connector and have a
diagnostic LED indication for
status messages.
Depending on the type of
safety light curtain or light grid
used, the components have
an integrated evaluation with
start/restart interlock and
contactor monitoring.
Additional functions such as
blanking, muting and
cascading of the light curtains
are available as well.
These functions are simply
configured in the AOPD
through the contact
configuration (no configuration
software required).
The SLC and SLG product
series therefore offer a
maximum of flexibility for
safeguarding different danger
points.
Protected width (operating range)
Protectied height
The safety light barrier
systems of the SLB range are
active optoelectronic
protective devices (AOPD)
fulfilling the Control Category
2 or 4 in accordance with EN
954-1 or EN 61496. These
systems are used as entry
guards on hazardous zones,
danger points and entrances.
They protect human life
without restricting the
production flow.
Typical applications for safety
light barriers are on robots,
automatic-processing plants,
transfer lines, rack storages
and pallet loaders.
The entire safety light barrier
system includes a light
emitter, a light receiver and a
safety monitoring module.
The safety monitoring module
evaluates the signals of the
emitter.
If the light beam is interrupted,
a signal is emitted to bring the
dangerous movement of the
machine to standstill.
The safety monitoring module
integrates functions such as
start and restart interlock as
well as a contactor
monitoring.
The maintenance-free safety
sensors of the system with
protection class IP 67 have an
integrated soiling check.
Because of their small size,
safety light barriers can be
fitted almost everywhere.
Safety light grids /
light curtains
268
Light beam
safety systems
Important conditions for
the use of optoelectronic
safety devices:
In order to choose the
appropriate active
optoelectronic protective
device (AOPD) such as
light barriers and light
curtains/grids and to use
them correctly, both the
requirements of the standards
(EN 61496, EN 999,EN 294,
C standards etc.) and
product-specific features
(detection sensitivity, range,
etc.) must be taken into
account. AOPD’s can be
used, provided that:
• the dangerous movement
can be stopped at all times
and that it is ensured that
the danger point can only be
reached after the movement
has come to standstill,
• the run-out time of the
machine and all safety
components is known,
• no objects (work pieces,
sparks, liquids, etc.) can be
ejected,
• the AOPD meet the
requirements of Type 2 or
Type 4 acc. to EN 61496,
• the danger point can only be
reached by passing through
the protected field of the
AOPD,
• reaching over, under or
through the protected field is
impossible,
• the start or restart command
devices are fitted in such a
way that the entire
hazardous area is
completely visible from the
outside and that it cannot be
activated from outside the
hazardous area
• and the safety distance is
calculated and
constructively applied in
accordance with EN 999.
The effectiveness of the safety
guard corresponds to the risk
assessment, which was
carried out during the
planning and design phase,
taking all important boundary
conditions, e.g. environment,
machine and function.
7
269
Application
Safety distance
EN 999
Safety distances for light
curtains
Between the interruption of a
light beam and the standstill
of the machine, a certain time
expires. The safety light grid
or light curtain must be sized
and installed such that a stop
would be signalled and the
hazard ceased prior to a
person or a body member
accessing the hazard.
The standard EN 999 provides
the user with detailed
information about the
calculation of the minimum
safety distances. These
include the following
important influencing factors:
• run-out time of the entire
system, taking the different
reaction times of the
individual systems into
account (e.g. machine,
safety monitoring module,
AOPD etc.)
• capacity of the AOPD to
detect body parts (fingers,
hand and entire human
body)
• set-up of the safety guard in
normal condition (vertical
fitting), parallel condition
(horizontal fitting) or at an
arbitrary angle in front of the
safety guard and
• the speed at which the
protection field is
approached.
Normal approach for light
curtains:
(resolution: max. 40 mm)
For the calculation of the
minimum safety distance S to
the hazardous area, EN 999
presents the following general
formula:
The minimum safety distance
S is calculated in the following
way:
S = 2000 T + 8 (D-14)
S=KxT+C
(D = resolution).
This formula applies to safety
distances up to 500 mm.
The minimum safety distance
Smin may not be less than
100 mm.
Where:
S the safety distance to the
danger point (mm)
K the approach speed of the
body or the body part
(mm/s)
T the entire reaction time of
the system(s)
(including the machine’s runout time, the reaction time of
the safety guard and the
safety monitoring module etc.)
C additional distance (mm) in
front of the safety guard
If the danger point of the
machine is accessible from
the top because of its
particular construction, the
height H of the topmost beam
of the light barrier must be at
least 1800 mm above the
base G of the machine.
If the calculation produces a
distance larger than 500 mm
for S, the calculation can be
repeated with a lower
approach speed:
S = 1600 T + 8 (D-14)
In this case, Smin may not be
less than 500 mm.
Normal approach for light
curtains:
(resolution: from 40 mm up
to max. 70mm)
The minimum safety distance
S is calculated in the following
way:
S = 1600 T + 850
The height of the topmost
light beam must be at least
900 mm, the height of the
lowermost light beam
maximum 300 mm above
the bottom (for the protection
of children younger than
14: 200 mm)
Light curtain
Danger point
Approach
direction
Reference floor
270
Normal approach for light
grids:
(resolution: > 70 mm)
Horizontal approach for
light curtains/grids
(resolution: > 50 mm)
The minimum safety distance
S is calculated using the
following formula:
The minimum safety distance
S is calculated using the
following formula:
S = 1600 T + 850
S = 1600 T + 1200 – 0.4 H
For safety guards with
multiple beams, height H (mm)
above the reference floor of
the individual beams must be
Here, Smin is 850 mm.
The lowest authorised height
H depends on the resolution D
of the light curtain:
Number
of beams
2
3
4
Height above the
reference floor
400, 900
300, 700, 1100
300, 600, 900,1200
H = 15 (D-50)
For this type of safety guard,
the maximum height H is 1000
mm.
In the risk analysis, special
attention must be paid to the
prevention of unintentional
undetected access from
underneath the protection
field.
applied in the following way:
When using light curtains or
light grids, particular attention
must be paid to the tampering
possibilities of the safety
guard and to the mechanical
risks (e.g. crushing, shearing,
cutting, ejection).
Further calculation examples
can be found in DIN EN 999
as well as in the mounting
instructions of the SLC/SLG
safety sensors.
Danger point
Danger point
Light curtain
/grid
Direction of
approach
Direction of
approach
Light curtain
/grid
7
Reference floor
Reference floor
271
Modes of operation and functions
Master/Slave cascading
Muting
Blanking /Floating Blanking
For the SLC/SLG…M/S
product series, the master
light curtain can be extended
with another (slave) light
curtain (cascading). In this
way, multiple protection fields
can be generated. A
protection field is created
between the emitter and
receiver of the master as well
as other protection fields
between the slave
components.
This device cascading
provides for a comfortable
and efficient protection of
contiguous protection fields
against reaching over or
through the protection field.
The slave light curtains are
connected to the master by
means of an M12 connector.
The master and slave light
curtains are available in
different sizes and resolutions
and allow for almost any
combination.
If goods or objects must be
transported in or out of the
hazardous area without
stopping the machine, the
safety light curtain must be
automatically and temporarily
suspended by the safetyrelated parts of the control
system.
To this end, two or four muting
sensors are used to detect
whether a person is
approaching the hazardous
area or a transport system
enters or leaves the hazardous
area. Suitable muting sensors
are light barriers, proximity
switches or position switches.
The integrated safety-muting
controller of the safety light
curtain or light grid monitors
and controls the muting
process.
The safety outputs are not
disabled.When the muting
function is used, an external
muting lamp must be
connected as well in order to
enable the system being
activated. Any malfunction of
the monitored signal source
will cause the OSSD’s to be
switched off.
Depending on the application,
different light curtains with
integrated muting function as
well as external or internal
muting sensors are available.
Detailed product information
can be found in this brochure
from page 33.
If continuity of the production
process is required, a part of
the protection field can be
blanked without triggering a
stop signal
In this way, objects such as
work pieces can be fed or a
conveyor belt can be
positioned at a fixed position
in the protection field.
The integrated floating
blanking function of the
SLC…B light curtains enables
a flexible blanking of up to
three adjacent light beams in
the protection field of the light
curtain. This function is
required to ensure that one,
two or three adjacent light
beams can be interrupted at
an undefined position in the
protection field.
In this way, objects such as
fixtures or materials with
slightly varying heights can be
fed through the light curtain
without triggering a stop
signal. Five different floating
blanking functions are
available. The distinguishing
feature of the different modes
is the number of light beams
that can be interrupted by an
object. In addition to that, it
can be defined whether the
object may interrupt the
protection field permanently or
only temporarily. The
interrupted light beams can be
at any position in the
protection field.
Aport from the first infrared
light beam (the beam closest
to the connector), any light
beam can be used for floating
blanking.
A complex programming
through software and
computer or complicated
teach-in procedures is not
required, as the floating
blanking functions are
configured in the connector of
the AOPD’s receiver unit.
When floating blanking is
applied, the resolution of the
light curtain changes. The
technical documentation of the
different light curtains includes
the tables with the effective
resolutions D to calculate the
minimum safety distance to EN
999.
Further technical product
information can be found in
this brochure.
Master
Slave
272
2
1
1 Floating-Blanking-Area
2 movable object
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
Selection table
Type
EN 61496
SLC/G 210
2
SLC/G 210
-RF
2
SLC/G 210
-RFM/S
2
SLC/G 210
-RFLC
2
SLC/G 410
4
SLC/G 410
-RF
4
SLC/G 410
-RFM/S
4
SLC 410
-B
4
SLC 410
-BM
4
SLC/G 412
4
SLG 412-P
SLC/G 415I
SLG 415L
SLG 415T
4
4
4
4
Detection
sensitivity
(mm)
Protected
height
(mm)
Range
20-30-40
50-90
2-3-4
160 – 1810
16
20-30-40
50-90
2-3-4
160 – 1810
30-40-50
160 – 1510
20-40
2-3-4
160 – 1210
14-20-30
40-50-90
2-3-4
160 – 1810
14-20-30
40-50-90
2-3-4
160 – 1810
14-20-30
160 – 1810
14-20-40
90
160 – 1810
14-20-40
160 – 1810
40
2-3-4
510 – 1210
2
510
30-40-90
2-3-4
310 - 1810
2-3
510, 810
2-3
510, 810
Contactor
monitoring
Start/
restart
interlock
X
X
275
•
•
276
•
•
•
•
278
X
X
279
•
•
280
•
•
X
X
X
X
•
•
283
•
•
284
•
•
•
288
•
•
•
289
•
•
•
290
(m)
18
18
6
Master /
Slave
Muting
Blanking
•
Page
277
18
18
18
•
281
18
18
60
6
60
2,5
3,5
•
•
282
•
282
7
X only in combination with safety monitoring module
• integrated
not available
273
Safer
by
Design
274
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 210
SLG 210
Technical data
Standards:
Control Category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 2
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90 mm
• Protection field height
from 160 mm to 1810 mm
• Range from 0 ... 16 m
• Self-test every 0.5 s
• semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
Legend:
A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm (SLC)
Approvals
Ordering details
SLC 210-E/R➀ -➁ -12-➂
SLG 210-E/R➀ -12-➁
No.
No.
➀
➁
Replace
xxxx
20, 30
40, 50
90
➂
H
Description
Height of protection field
Available lengths:
0160 mm*** 0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
1660 mm
1810 mm
Resolution 20, 30 mm
Resolution 40, 50 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Range 6 m
Range 1 ...16 m
High Range
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
➁
H
Type 2
Aluminium
35 x 45 mm
connector plug M 12,
5-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
5,5 – 28 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
20, 30, 40,
50 and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution: 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution: 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field
width, range:
0 ... 6 m (Standard),
1 ... 16 m (High range)
Start/restart interlock:
*
Contactor control:
*
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and
diagnostics display
LED indication
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* only in combination with safety
monitoring module
** In case of failure (interruption of the
0 V supply) the maximum leakage
current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
Ordering details
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Range 0 ... 6 m
Range 1 ...16 m
High Range
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for Emitter/ Receiver
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
for Emitter/ Receiver
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Further accessories can be
found on page 4-24.
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
*** only for resolution 20, 30 mm
275
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 210...RF
SLG 210...RF
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 2
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90 mm
• Protection field height
from 160 mm to 1810 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Range from 0 ... 18 m
• Self-test every 0.5 s
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
Legend: A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
B: Protection field height
Approvals
C: 85 mm (SLC)
Approvals
Ordering details
SLG 210-E/R➀ -RF
No.
No.
➀
➁
276
20
30
40
50
90
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm** 0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
1660 mm
1810 mm
Resolution 20 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 50 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Type 2
Enclosure:
Aluminium
Enclosure dimensions:
35 x 45 mm
Connection:
(Emitter): connector plug
M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector plug
M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
(Master/Slave) 50 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
5,5 - 28 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
20, 30, 40,
50 and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution: 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Cascading (Master/Slave)
–
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
*
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
SLC 210-E/R➀ -➁ -RF
Replace
xxxx
Technical data
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
for emitter (pre-wiring possible,
however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
Further accessories can be found on page 4-24.
** only for resolution 20, 30 mm
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 210...RFM/S
SLG 210...RFM/S
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 2 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 30, 40 and 50 mm
• Protection field height-Master from 310 mm
to 1510 mm
• Protection field height-Slave from 160 mm
to 1510 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Cascading of Master and Slave devices
• Range from 0 ... 18 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
Legend:
A: Total lenght Slave / Master (B + 91 mm)
• Safety light grid
• 2- oder 3-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
or 810 mm
B: Protection field height
Approvals
* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
SLC 210-E/R➀ -➁ -RF➂
SLG 210-E/R➀ -RF-➁
No.
No.
➀
➁
➂
Replace
xxxx
30
40
50
M
S
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 50 mm
Masterfunktion
Slavefunktion
Replace
➀
➁
0500-02
0800-03
M
S
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Type 2
Enclosure:
Aluminium
Enclosure dimensions:
35 x 45 mm
Connection:
(Emitter): connector plug
M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector plug
M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
(Master/Slave) 50 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
5,5 - 28 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
30, 40
and 50 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 30 mm): 160 ... 1510 mm
(Resolution 40, 50 mm): 310 ... 1510 mm
(2-, 3-beam): 510, 810mm
Protection field width, range:
0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Cascading (Master/Slave):
possible
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
*
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
C: 85 mm (SLC)
Approvals
Ordering details
Technical data
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
Master function
Slave function
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Different lengths and resolutions can be
combined for Master/Slave.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
for emitter (pre-wiring possible,
however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
for Master/ Slave
connection
VL M/S-M12-5-0,3 m
VL M/S-M12-5-3 m
VL M/S-M12-5-5 m
VL M/S-M12-5-10 m
Further accessories can be
277
found on page 4-24.
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 210...RFLC
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 2
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 30 and 40 mm
• Protection field heights from
160 mm to 1210 mm
• Range 0 ... 8 m
• Self-test every 0.5 s
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
SLG 210...RFLC
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
Legend:
A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm(SLC), 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Ordering details
SLC 210-E/R➀ -➁ -RFLC
SLG 210-E/R➀ -RFLC
No.
No.
➀
➁
278
Replace
xxxx
30
40
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm*
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Type 2
Enclosure:
Aluminium
Enclosure dimensions:
45 x 35 mm
Connection:
(Emitter): connector plug
M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector plug
M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
2 - 25 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
30 and
40 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 30 and 40 mm): 160 ... 1210 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
0 ... 8 m
(Standard)
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Cascading (Master/Slave):
–
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
Ordering details
Technical data
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
for receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
* only for resolution 30 mm
Further accessories can be found on page 4-24.
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 410
SLG 410
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 4
to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 14, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90mm
• Protection field heights from 160 mm
to 1810 mm
• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
• Range 0 ... 18 m
Legend:
A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Ordering details
Ordering details
SLG 410-E/R➀ -12
No.
No.
➀
➁
Replace
xxxx
14
20
30
40
50
90
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm*** 0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
1660 mm
1810 mm
Resolution 14 mm
Resolution 20 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 50 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
Type 4
Aluminium
35 x 45 mm
connector plug
M 12, 5-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
6 - 27 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
14, 20, 30,
40, 50 and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 910 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 14mm): 0 ... 5 m
(Resolution 20 to 90 mm): 0 ... 18 m
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
*
Contactor control:
*
Cascading (Master/Slave):
–
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* only in combination with safety monitoring
module
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
SLC 410-E/R➀ -➁ -12
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
*** only for resolutions 14, 20, 30 mm
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter/ receiver
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Further accessories can be
found on page 4-24.
279
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 410...RF
SLG 410...RF
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 14, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 90mm
• Protection field height from 160 mm
to 1810 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
• Range 0 ... 18 m
Legend:
A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm (SLC) 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Approvals
Ordering details
SLG 410-E/R➀ -RF
No.
No.
➀
➁
280
Replace
xxxx
14
20
30
40*
50*
90*
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
1660 mm
1810 mm
Resolution 14 mm
Resolution 20 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 50 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
Type 4
Aluminium
50 x 60 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
6 - 27 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
14, 20, 30,
40, 50 and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution 40, 50, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 14mm): 0 ... 5 m
(Resolution 20 bis 90 mm): 0 ... 18 m
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
Integrated
Contactor control:
Integrated
Cascading (Master/Slave):
–
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
*
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
SLC 410-E/R➀ -➁ -RF
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
Further accessories can be found on page 4-24.
* for resolution 40, 50 and 90 mm, minimum
protection field height 310 mm
Safety light curtains and safety light grids
SLC 410...RFM/S
SLG 410...RFM/S
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 14, 20, 30 and 50 mm
• Protection field height from 160 mm
to 1510 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Cascading of Master and Slave devices
• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• 2- or 3-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm
or 810 mm
• Range 0 ... 18 m
Legend:
A: Total lenght Slave / Master (B + 91 mm)
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Approvals
Ordering details
Ordering details
SLG 410-E/R➀ -RF➁
No.
No.
➀
➁
➂
14
20
30
50**
M**
S***
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
Resolution 14 mm
Resolution 20 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 50 mm
Masterfunktion
Slavefunktion
Replace
➀
➁
0500-02
0800-03
M
S
Type 4
Aluminium
35 x 45 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Max. cable length: Master/Slave
50 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
3 - 27 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
14, 20,
30 and 50 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 14, 20, 30 mm): 160 ... 1510 mm
(Resolution 50 mm): 310 ... 1510 mm
(2-, 3-beam): 510, 810mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 14 mm): 0 ... 5 m
(Resolution 20, 30, 50 mm): 0 ... 18 m
(2-, 3-beam): 0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Cascading (Master/Slave):
possible
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
*
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
SLC 410-E/R➀ -➁ -RF➂
Replace
xxxx
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
Masterfunktion
Slavefunktion
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
** minimum protection field height 310 mm
*** for resolution 50 mm, minimum protection
field height 310 mm
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
For Master/Slave connection
VL M/S-M12-5-0,3 m
VL M/S-M12-5-3 m
VL M/S-M12-5-5 m
VL M/S-M12-5-10 m
Further accessories can be
281
found on page 4-24.
Safety light curtains
SLC 410...B
SLC 410...BM
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 14, 20, 40 and 90 mm
• Protection field height from 160 mm
to 1810 mm
• Integrated blanking function
• Cascading of Master and slave devices
• Range 0 ... 5 m or 0 ... 18 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light curtain
• Master function
Legend:
A: Total lenght
B: Protection field height
C: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Approvals
Ordering details
SLC 410-E/R➀ -➁ -B➂
No.
➀
➁
➂
282
Replace
xxxx
14
20
40
90***
M
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0160 mm
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
Resolution 14 mm
Resolution 20 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Master function (for
resolution 14 and 20 mm)
Note
The SLC 410 BM Master can be combined
with all slaves of the SLC 410...RFS series.
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Type 4
Aluminium
35 x 45 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Max. cable length: Master/Slave
50m
Protection class:
IP 65 gem. EN 60529
Response time:
6 - 27 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
14, 20, 40
and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 14, 20, 40 mm): 160 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution 90 mm): 610 ... 1810 mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 14 mm): 0 ... 5 m
(Resolution 20, 40, 90 mm): 0 ... 18 m
Start/restart interlock:
*
Contactor control:
*
Cascading (Master/Slave):
only for
SLC 410...BM
Blanking function:
5 modes
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* only in combination with safety monitoring
module
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
*** minimum protection field height 610 mm
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
For Master/Slave connection
VL M/S-M12-5-0,3
VL M/S-M12-5-3
VL M/S-M12-5-5
VL M/S-M12-5-10
m
m
m
m
Further accessories can be found on page 4-24.
Safety light curtains and safety light grids for high operating range
SLC 412
SLG 412
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light curtain
• High operating range 0 ... 60 m
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 40 mm
• Protection field heightn from 510 mm
to 1210 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3- or 4-beam light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
Legend:
A: Total lenght (B + 91 mm)
B: distance of the outermost beams
C: 85 mm (SLC), 135 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Ordering details
SLC 412-E/R➀ -40-12-H
SLG 412-E/R➀ -12-➁
No.
No.
➀
Replace
xxxx
40
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0610 mm
0910 mm
1210 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
➁
H
Type 4
Aluminium
50 x 60 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 23,
19-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 gem. EN 60529
Response time:
7 – 28,5 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
40 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 40 mm): 610, 910, 1210 mm
(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 40 mm): 0 … 60 m (High Range)
(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 0 ... 16 m (Standard),
0 … 60 m (High Range)
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
Ordering details
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Range 0 ...16 m
Range 0 ...60 m
(High Range)
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
for receiver
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
KD M23-19-3
KD M23-19-5
KD M23-19-10
KD M23-19-15
KD M23-19-20
m
m
m
m
m
Further accessories can be
found on page 4-24.
283
Safety light grid (retro-reflector)
SLG 412-P
Technical data
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Type 4
Enclosure:
Aluminium
Enclosure dimensions:
50 x 60 mm
Connection:
(Emitter/Receiver): connector
plug M 12, 8-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
7 ms
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
–
Protection field height:
510 mm
• Safety light grid
• Emitter and receiver in one enclosure
(retro reflector)
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Protection field heightn 510 mm
• 2-beam light grid
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Range 0 ... 6 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
Legend:
A: Total lenght
B: Distance of the outermost beams
C: 120 mm
Protection field width, range:
0 ... 6m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
Ordering details
SLG 412-P-E/R0500-02-12
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter/receiver
KD M12-8-5 m
KD M12-8-15 m
Further accessories can be found on page 4-24.
284
Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting function
System features:
• Control Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1
or acc. to IEC 61496, Type 4
• Integrated muting sensors (“T” & “L” models)
• External and internal muting sensors
• Integrated override function
• Diagnostics display
• Optical synchronisation
• Compact design
• Simple, flexible mounting and adjustment
Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting function
SLC/SLG 415I
SLG 415L
The SLC/SLG 415I is a system
for universal use with
integrated muting function.
The M12 connectors allow a
direct connection and flexible
positioning of the different
muting sensors (e.g. inductive,
capacitive or optical sensors).
In this way, a safe triggering of
the muting function can be
obtained for objects of
different sizes. The additional
integrated override function
allows for a controlled restart
of the machine to transport
the accumulated material out
of the protection field after a
failure.
The safety light curtains/grids
with muting function enable a
smooth and trouble-free
material feeding (input and
output), whilst offering a
permanent protection of
human life.
The SLG 415L is a safety light
grid with integrated muting
function. The muting sensors
are integrated in the horizontal
arms and mechanically and
electrically connected to the
light grid. This simplifies
fitting and positioning of the
prepared muting sensors and
provides a fault free
installation.
The additional integrated
override function allows for a
controlled restart of the
machine to transport
accumulated material out of
the protection field after a
failure. The SLG 415L allows
for a smooth and trouble-free
material output (e.g. on pallet
loaders) whilst offering a
permanent protection of
human life.
• Integrated muting function
for material transport in 1 or
2 directions
• Connection of 2 or 4
external muting sensors
• Connection of different
muting sensors
• Direct connection (M12) of
the muting sensors to the
SLC/SLG
• Muting controller for
crosswise or parallel
arrangement of the external
sensors
• Adjustable muting time of
30s, 90 min or unlimited
• Integrated override function
• Range up to 16m or 60m
• Optional muting box with
integrated muting lamp,
restart and override function
286
• Integrated muting function
for transporting material out
of the hazardous area
• 2 integrated optical muting
sensor blocks
• Muting controller for
crosswise and parallel
arrangement of the
integrated sensors
• Adjustable muting time of
30s or 90min
• Integrated override function
• Range: with crosswise
arranged sensors: between
1 – 2.5 m; with parallel
arranged sensors: between
0–2m
• Integrated sensors with
adjustable height and angle
position
• Optional muting box with
integrated muting lamp,
restart and override function
• Parallel muting sensors with
green light for the detection
of transparent objects
(glass, bottles, film, etc.)
Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting function
SLG 415T
The SLG 415T is a safety light
grid with integrated muting
function. The muting
functions are integrated in two
horizontal arms and
mechanically and electrically
connected to the light grid
(right and left).
This simplifies fitting and
positioning of the muting
sensor block and provides for
a fault free installation.
The additional integrated
override function allows for a
controlled restart of the
machine to transport
accumulated material out of
the protection field after a
failure. The SLG 415T safety
light grid enables a smooth
and trouble-free material
feeding (input and output),
whilst offering a permanent
protection of human life.
• Integrated muting function
for material transport in 2
directions
• Integrated optical muting
sensor blocks
• Muting controller for
crosswise and parallel
arrangement
• Adjustable muting time of
30s, 90min or unlimited
• Integrated override function
• Range: crosswise arranged
sensors: between 1 – 2.5 m;
parallel arranged sensors:
between 0 – 2 m
• Integrated sensors with
adjustable height and angle
position
• Optional muting box with
integrated muting lamp,
restart and override function
• Parallel muting sensors with
green light for the detection
of transparent objects
(glass, bottles, film etc.)
287
Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting function
SLC 415I
SLG 415I
• Safety light curtain
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• Resolution 30, 40 and 90 mm
• Protection field heights from 310 mm
to 1810 mm
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Integrated muting and override function
• Range 0 ... 16 m or 0 ... 60 m
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
Legend: A: Height of the receiver
• Safety light grid
• 2-, 3-, 4-beames light grid
• Protection field heights 510 mm,
810 mm or 910 mm
B: Protection field height
Approvals
Technical data
C: 72 mm (SLC), 120 mm (SLG)
Approvals
Ordering details
Ordering details
SLC 415I-E/R➀ -➁ -12-➂
SLG 415I-E/R➀ -12-➁
No.
No.
➀
➁
Replace
xxxx
30***
40
90
➂
H**
288
Description
Protected heights (mm)
Available lengths:
0310 mm
0460 mm
0610 mm
0760 mm
0910 mm
1060 mm
1210 mm
1360 mm
1510 mm
1660 mm
1810 mm
Resolution 30 mm
Resolution 40 mm
Resolution 90 mm
Range 0 ...16 m
Range 0 ...60 m
High Range
Replace
➀
0500-02
0800-03
0900-04
➁
H
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
900 mm, 4-beam
Range 0 ... 16 m
Range 0 ...60 m
High Range
** only for resolution 40 mm
*** Protection field height ≤ 1210 mm
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Type 4
Enclosure:
Aluminium
Enclosure dimensions:
50 x 60 mm
Connection:
(Emitter): connector plug
M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 23, 19-pole,
(Muting sensors): 2 x connector
plug M 12, 5-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
7 – 28,5 ms (depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
30, 40
and 90 mm
Protection field height:
(Resolution 30 mm): 310 ... 1210 mm
(Resolution 40, 90 mm): 310 ... 1810 mm
(Resolution 40 (H)): 610, 910, 1210 mm
(2-, 3-, 4-beam): 510, 810, 910 mm
Protection field width, range:
(Resolution 30, 40 mm): 0 ... 16 m (Srandard)
(Resolution 40 (H)): 0 … 60 m (High Range)
(2-, 3-. 4-beam): 0 ... 16 m (Standard)
0 … 60 m (High Range)
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Muting and override function:
integrated
Muting sensors:
2 or 4 external
sensors
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
*
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
* In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
for muting sensors
KSW M12-5-5 m
(without cable, angled)
KWS M12-5
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Connector plug M 23 x 1
for receiver
KD M23-19-3 m
KD M23-19-5 m
Further accessories
KD M23-19-10 m
can be found on
KD M23-19-15 m
page 4-24.
KD M23-19-20 m
Safety light curtains and safety light grids with integrated muting function
SLG 415L
SLG 415L...PB
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light grid
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• 2-, 3-beam light grid
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Integrated muting and override function
• Integrated muting sensors
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• Muting-Sensors parallel crosswise
Legend:
A: Height of the receiver
C: 72 mm
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Type 4
Aluminium
50 x 60 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole,
(Receiver): connector
plug M 23, 19-pole,
(Muting sensors, integrated):
2 x connector plug M 12, 5-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
7 – 28,5 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
–
Protection field height:
510, 810 mm
Muting-Sensoren, range:
(2 parallel): 0 ... 2,0 m
(PB = parallele beams)
(2 crosswise): 1 ... 2,5 m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Muting and override function:
integrated
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
–
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Approvals
Approvals
Ordering details
SLG 415L-E/R➀ -12-➁
No.
Replace
➀
➁
0500-02
0800-03
PB
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
Muting-Sensors
parallel crosswise
Note
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Connector plug M 23 x 1
for receiver
KD M23-19-3 m
KD M23-19-5 m
KD M23-19-10 m
KD M23-19-15 m
KD M23-19-20 m
Further accessories can be
289
found on page 4-24.
Safety light grids with integrated muting function
SLG 415T
SLG 415T...PB
Technical data
Standards:
Control category to
IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
Enclosure:
Enclosure dimensions:
Connection:
• Safety light grid
• Control category Type 4 to IEC/EN 61496-1, -2
• 2-, 3-beam light grid
• Integrated start/restart interlock
• Integrated contactor control
• Integrated muting and override function
• Integrated muting sensors
• Semiconductor outputs
• Optical synchronisation
• Status display
• Protection class IP 65
• Safety light grid
• Muting-Sensors parallel crosswise
Legend:
A: Height of the receiver
C: 72 mm
Approvals
Approvals
Ordering details
SLG 415T-E/R➀ -12-➁
No.
Replace
➀
➁
290
0500-02
0800-03
PB
Description
Distance between
outermost beams:
500 mm, 2-beam
800 mm, 3-beam
Muting-sensors
parallel crosswise
Note
Mounting brackets and T-slots are included in
the delivery.
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2
Type 4
Aluminium
50 x 60 mm
(Emitter): connector
plug M 12, 5-pole;
(Receiver): connector
plug M 23, 19-pole;
(Muting sensors, integrated):
2 x connector plug M 12, 5-pole
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 65 to EN 60529
Response time:
7 – 28,5 ms
(depends on
length and resolution)
Detection sensitivity (Resolution):
–
Protection field height:
510, 810 mm
Muting-Sensoren, range:
(4 parallel): 0 ... 2,0 m
(PB = parallele beams)
(2 crosswise): 1 ... 2,5 m
Start/restart interlock:
integrated
Contactor control:
integrated
Muting and override function:
integrated
Light emission wavelength: 950 nm (infrared),
coded
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
2 x PNP, 500 mA
Leakage current:
**
Safety outputs:
< 0,3 mA
Power consumption:
Emitter 2 W,
Receiver 3 W
Data interface:
Status and diagnostics:
7-segment and
LED display
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 70 ºC
** In case of failure (interruption of the 0 V supply) the maximum leakage current is 0.3 mA.
Ordering details
Accessories:
Connector plug M 12 x 1
for emitter
KD M12-5-5 m
KD M12-5-15 m
(pre-wiring possible, however without cable)
R = angled connector
KD M12-5-R
S = straight connector
KD M12-5-S
Connector plug M 23 x 1
for receiver
KD M23-19-3 m
KD M23-19-5 m
Further accessories
KD M23-19-10 m
can be found on
KD M23-19-15 m
page 4-24.
KD M23-19-20 m
Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting function
Control unit SLG-MCB
Technical data
Enclosure:
• Control unit for the SLC/SLG 415/412 series
• Integrated restart pushbutton
• Integrated muting lamp
• Integrated override key selector switch
• Two safety relay outputs and
one signalling contact
• DIP switch to configure the
light grid/light curtain
• Plug-in terminal blocks for
cable connection
• Possibility to connect an external
muting lamp
• Possibility to connect an internal or
external feedback loop
• Cable entry for machine connection
glass-fibre reinforced
thermoplastic
Fixation:
4 mounting holes
Connection:
M23 or M12 connector,
metric thread coupling
Protection class:
Gehäuse IP 66 gem. EN
60529
Ue:
19 – 30 VDC
Ie:
depending on
the connected
SLC/SLG type
Input signal "1":
> 12 VDC
Input signal "0":
> 5 VDC
Max. cable length:
100 m
Outputs:
2 enabling paths
Utilisation category:
AC-15, DC-13
Switching voltage:
max. 250 VAC
Load current:
max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)
Switching capacity:
max. 500 VA
Short-circuit protection:
6 A (slow blow)
Signalling output:
1 relay output
(NO contact) for
SLG- MCB3/4
EMC rating:
EMC Directive to
EN 61496-1
Overvoltage category:
II to DIN VDE 0110
Ambient temperature:
- 10 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 10 °C … + 55 ºC
Dimensions:
110 x 180 x 110 mm
Note
Inductive loads (contactors, relays, etc.) are to
be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.
Approvals
Ordering details
Ordering details
SLG-MCB➀
No.
➀
Replace
1
Description
Restart pushbutton,
key selector switch for
override function, muting
lamp, 2 safety relays per
enabling contact
2
Restart pushbutton,
2 safety relays per
enabling contact
No.
Replace
3
4
Description
Restart pushbutton,
key selector switch for
override function, muting
lamp, 2 safety relays per
enabling contact,
1 signalling contact
Restart pushbutton,
2 safety relays per
enabling contact,
1 signalling contact
Ordering details
Accessories
for emitter mutingbox
VL MB-M12-5-3 m
VL MB-M12-5-5 m
VL MB-M12-5-10 m
for receiver mutingbox VL MB-M23-19-3 m
VL MB-M23-19-5 m
VL MB-M23-19-10 m
291
Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting function
System components
System components
System components
Deflecting mirror SMB
Deflecting mirror ST LGM
Mounting angle BF SMB
Selection table: Deflecting mirror SMB:
Protected
Number
Deflecting
height
of beams
mirror
Selection table: Floor-stand with
integrated deflecting mirror ST LGM
SLC
0160
0310
0460
0610
0760
0910
1060
1210
1360
1510
1660
1810
SLG
2
3
4
-
SMB
250
370
540
715
885
1060
1230
1400
1450
1575
1750
1900
A
A
A
A
=
=
=
=
1000
1200
1330
1970
mm
mm
mm
mm
ST LGM-02
ST LGM-03
ST LGM-04
ST LGM-2000
Floor-stand STB LG
Mounting angle BF LC-01-D
Ordering details
Deflecting mirror:
Mirror height
250 mm
SMB 250
Up to
1900 mm
SMB 1900
Other heights available on
request
292
Ordering details
Floor-stand with integrated
deflecting mirror
Floor-stand (empty enclosure)
Ordering details
ST LGM-02
ST LGM-03
ST LGM-04
ST LGM-2000
ST LG
Mounting angle for
deflecting mirror
Floor-stand base
for ST LG/LGM
Mounting angle (rotating)
BF SMB
STB LG
BF LC-01-D
Accessories for safety light curtains / grids with integrated muting function
System components
System components
System components
Vibration absorber VA 15-6
Alignment kit LAT SLC-2
Test rods
Vibration absorber VA 210/410-2/-3
Alignment kit LAT SLC-4
Ordering details
Ordering details
Vibration absorber
Vibration absorber
VA 15-6
VA 210/410-2
VA 210/410-3
Alignment kit
Ordering details
LAT SLC-2
LAT SLC-4
Test rods
with resolution 14 mm
with resolution 20 mm
with resolution 30 mm
with resolution 40 mm
with resolution 50 mm
SLC
SLC
SLC
SLC
SLC
TR-14
TR-20
TR-30
TR-40
TR-50
293
Safer
by
Design
294
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety components
Besides the traditional safety relay controls, Schmersal
offers CE-type tested safety controls or other safetyoriented bus systems (e.g. AS-i Safety at Work) for
different levels of complexity and combination depths,
which provide the user with many visualization and
diagnostic possibilities.
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
SCR 1R
Technical data
Standards:
Stop category
Control category:
Start conditions:
Enclosure:
Connection:
Cable section:
• Suitable for signal processing of outputs
connected to potentials (AOPDs),
e.g. safety light grids/curtains
• 1 or 2 channel control
• 2 enabling paths, Stop 0
• Reset with edge detection or automatic start
• 2 LEDs to show operating conditions
• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1
Ue:
Ie:
Protection class:
Power consumption:
Max. fuse rating:
Monitored inputs
Drive circuits:
Enabling contacts:
Utilisation category:
Switching capacity:
Fuse rating:
Max. switching frequency:
Contact material:
Contact resistance:
Pull-in delay:
Drop-out delay:
Air clearances and creepage distances:
Overvoltage category:
Degree of pollution:
Ambient temperature:
Mechanical life:
Function display:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Approvals
H
Ordering details
SCR 1R
296
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-20
2x Stop 0
4
Reset button with edge detection, auto start
glass-fibre reinforced thermoplastic
screw terminals
max. 2.5 mm2 solid or multi-strand lead
(incl. conductor ferrules)
24 VDC – 15 % / + 20 %, residual ripple max. 10%
max. 0.10 A
terminals IP 20
enclosure IP 40 to EN 60529
max. 2.6 VA
Internal electronic trip F1,
tripping current > 0.6 A, reset after approx. 1 s
1 or 2 channels
max. 28 VDC
2 enabling paths
AC-15, DC-13
enabling paths: 6 A/230 VAC, 6 A/24 VDC
enabling paths: 6 A gG D-fuse
5 Hz
AgNi, AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive action
max. 100 mΩ in new condition
≤ 330 ms / ≤ 720 ms (start button / auto start)
≤ 20 ms
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
III to DIN VDE 0110
2 to DIN VDE 0110
– 25 °C … + 45 °C
(Derating curve on request)
10 million operations
2 LEDs
190 g
22.5 x 82 x 98.8 mm
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
Note
Wiring diagram
• Input level: dual-channel control (Example
AOPD, with two OSSDs with external
start/restart button J).
• The control recognises cable break and earth
leakages in the monitoring circuit.
• Si1 = electronic fuse
• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel control,
for increase in capacity or number of contacts
by means of contactors or relays with
positive-guided contacts.
• For a 1-channel control, connect NC
contact to Y1/S1 and bridge S1/S2
• Connect potential (p-type) outputs of safety
light grids/curtains to S1/S2. The devices
must have the same reference potential.
• Automatic start:
The automatic start is programmed by
connecting the feedback circuit to the
terminals X1/X3. If the feedback circuit
is not required, establish a bridge
LED
Function indication:
The integrated LEDs indicate
the following operational states.
• Position relay K1
• Position relay K2
Note
The wiring diagram is shown for the de-energised condition.
297
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
SRB 301 LCB
Technical data
Standards:
Stop category
Control category:
Start conditions:
Enclosure:
Connection:
Cable section:
Ue:
• Suitable for signal processing of outputs
connected to potentials (AOPDs),
e.g. safety light grids/curtains
• 1 or 2 channel control
• 3 enabling paths, Stop 0
• 1 indication contact (NC)
• Reset with edge detection or automatic start
• 4 LEDs to show operating conditions
• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1
Frequency range:
Ie:
Protection class:
Power consumption:
Max. fuse rating:
Monitored inputs
Feedback circuit:
Drive circuits:
Enabling contacts:
Utilisation category:
Switching capacity:
Max. switching frequency:
Fuse rating:
Signalling contacts:
Switching capacity:
Contact material:
Contact resistance:
Pull-in delay:
Drop-out delay:
Air clearances and creepage distances:
Overvoltage category:
Degree of pollution:
Ambient temperature:
Mechanical life:
Function display:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Approvals
Ordering details
SCR 301 LCB – 24 VAC/DC
SCR 402R-301
298
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 954-1, BG-GS-ET-20
3x Stop 0
4
Reset button with edge detection, auto start
glass-fibre reinforced thermoplastic, ventilated
screw terminals
max. 2.5 mm2 solid or multi-strand lead
(incl. conductor ferrules)
24 VDC –15%/+20%, residual ripple max. 10%
24 VAC –15%/+10%
50/60 Hz (on AC operational voltage)
max. 0.08 A
terminals IP 20
enclosure IP 40 to EN 60529
max. 3.8 VA, 2.4 W
Internal glass fuse F1, tripping current > 0.25 A,
1 or 2 channels
yes
S11/S12, S21/S22: max. 28 VDC
3 enabling paths
AC-15, DC-13
enabling paths: 6 A/230 VAC, 6 A/24 VDC
5 Hz
enabling paths: 6 A gG D-fuse
1 NC contact
Indicating contact: 2 A/24 VDC
AgNi, AgSnO, self-cleaning, positive action
max. 100 mΩ in new condition
≤ 30 ms
≤ 50 ms
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
III to DIN VDE 0110
2 to DIN VDE 0110
– 25 °C … + 45 °C
(Derating curve on request)
10 million operations
4 LEDs
230 g
22.5 x 100 x 121 mm
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
Note
• Input level: dual-channel control (Example
AOPD, with two OSSDs with external
start/restart button J.
• The control recognises cable break and earth
leakages in the monitoring circuit.
• F1 = Glass fuse
• S = Feedback circuit
• Relay outputs: Suitable for 2 channel control,
for increase in capacity or number of contacts
by means of contactors or relays with
positive-guided contacts.
Wiring diagram
SLC/SLG
E
SLC/SLG
Control logic
• For 1-channel control, connect NC contact
to S11/S12 and bridge S12/S22
• Connect potential p-type outputs of safety
light grids/curtains to S12/S22. The devices
must have the same reference potential.
13 23 33 41
S12 S11 S21 S22 X3 X2
A1
AC/
DC
L1
J
R
K1
F1
S
UB
K2
Ui
K1
K2
14 24 34 42
A2
SRB 301 LCB
• Automatic start:
The automatic start is programmed by
connecting the feedback circuit to terminals
S12/X3. If no feedback circuit is required,
establish a bridge.
LED
Function display:
The integrated LEDs indicate
the following operational states.
• Position relay K1
• Position relay K2
• Supply voltage UB
• Internal operating voltage Ui
KB
KA
N
M
3
Note
The wiring diagram is shown with guard doors closed and in de-energised condition.
299
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
AST LC ST-AS
Technical data
Standards:
Enclosure:
AS-Interface
connection type:
Protection class:
AS-Interface
operating voltage:
• Input module for 2 monitored PNP
semiconductor outputs for safety
light curtains and light grids
• AS-Interface LED status display
• AS-Interface M12 connector
• Thermoplastic enclosure
• Long life
• Protection class IP 67
Approvals
Ordering details
AST LC ST-AS
300
Note
EN 50295, EN 60947-5-1,
EN 954-1, EN 61496-1
glass-fibre reinforced
thermoplastic,
self-extinguishing
connector M12
IP 67 to EN 60529
26.5 ... 31.6 VDC,
via AS-Interface,
reverse-polarity proof
AS-Interface operating current:
≤ 50 mA
AS-Interface specification:
(V 2.1)
Profile:
S-0.B
IO-Code:
0x0
ID-Code:
0xB
ID-Code1:
0xF
ID-Code2:
0xE
Inputs:
Contact
Status
Data bits
1
on
D0/D1 = dynamic code
transmission
1
off
D0/D1 = static code “00”
2
on
D2/D3 = dynamic code
transmission
2
off
D2/D3 = static code “00”
Outputs:
A0 ... A3 not used
Parameter bits:
P0 .. P3 not used
Input module address:
default on address 0,
programmable via the
AS-Interface Master or
Hand-held programming device
Indications: AS-Interface: voltage LED green,
communication LED red,
OSSD1/2;
Enabling status:
LED yellow
Power supply
for AOPD:
PELV power supply
to IEC 364-4-41
Reaction time:
≤ 20 ms
EMC rating:
conforming to
EMC Directive
Ambient temperature:
– 25 °C … + 60 ºC
Storage and transport
temperature:
– 25 °C … + 85 ºC
Note
A separate address jack is not available as an
option. The addressing must take place via the
cable end or the M12 connector.
Connector ST
1:
2:
3:
4:
AS-i +
spare
AS-i –
spare
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
+ 24 VDC
spare
GND
spare
FE (functional earth)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
+ 24 VDC
OSSD 1
GND
OSSD 2
FE (functional earth)
Connector ST1
Connector ST2
Safety monitoring modules for optoelectronic safety systems
Note
Wiring diagrame
Emitter
• The wiring diagram shows an active
optoelectronic device (AOPD) (type
SLC/SLG) with a safety input module AST
LC ST-AS (Opto-Tube) connected to the AS-i
Safety at Work system.
Receiver
• The Opto-Tube is directly connected to the
receiver module (ST2). The AOPD receives
its 24 VDC power supply via the second
M12-cable connection (ST1).
• The Opto-Tube itself is connected via the
M12 connector (ST) to the AS-i network.
Before hand the module has to be
programmed with an individual address
(1 - 31).
See note
• The emitter module has be wired up
separately as described in its mounting
and wiring instruction.
301
Safer
by
Design
302
Safety light barriers
System features:
• Control Category 2 and 4 acc. to EN 954-1
or acc. to EN 61496, Type 2 and Type 4
• Up to 4 pairs of one-way light barriers
can be connected
• Different functions
Start/Restart interlock
Contactor monitoring
Cyclic testing
• Integrated soiling check
• Status and error indication
• Signalling outputs for external indications
• Free of maintenance
• Extremely compact design
• Simple and flexible mounting and adjustment
7
Safety light barriers
SLB 200
Technical data
Comprising:
• Control Category 2 to EN 954-1
only in combination with safety
monitoring module SLB 200-C04-1R
• Extremely compact design
• Range to 4 m
• Protection class IP 67
• Maintenance free
• Integral soiling check
• LEDs visible from both sides
• Simple flexible mounting
and adjustment
emitter SLB 200-E31-21
receiver SLB 200-R31-21
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496
Control Category:
2 (only in combination
with SLB 200-C)
Enclosure:
ABS
10 % GF
Enclosure dimensions:
31 x 50.5 x 19 mm
Connection:
emitter: 10 cm conductor,
M 8 x 1, 3-pole coupler socket
receiver: 10 cm conductor,
M 8 x 1, 4-pole coupler socket
Max. cable length:
50 m
Protection class:
IP 67 to EN 60529
Response time:
30 ms
(only in combination
with SLB 200-C)
Range:
4m
Start/Restart interlock: only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Contactor control:
only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Light emission
wavelength:
880 nm
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Angle of radiation:
± 4°
Min. size of object:
9 mm Ø
LED status indication:
soiling, switching
condition and
power on
Ambient temperature:
– 10 °C ... + 55 °C
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 80 ºC
System components
SLB 200-C04-1R
Connector plug M 8 x 1 (with cable)
Mounting angle BF 31
Mounting angle BF UNI 1
Approvals
Ordering details
SLB 200-➀ 31-21
No.
➀
304
Replace
E/R
Description
Emitter / receiver
Note
The system components (safety monitoring
module, connector plug, cable, etc.) are
not included in delivery.
Ordering details
Monitoring of safety light barriers
SLB 200-C04-1R
refer to page 4-6
Connector plug M 8 x 1
emitter:
KDE M8-3 (without cable)
KDE M8-3-2m
KDE M8-3-5m
receiver:
KDR M8-4 (without cable)
KDR M8-4-2m
KDR M8-4-5m
Mounting angles
BF 31
Mounting angles universal
BF UNI 1
Safety light barriers
SLB 400
Technical data
Comprising:
• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1
only in combination with safety
monitoring module SLB 400-C10-1R
• Very compact design
• Range to 15 m
• Protection class IP 67
• Connecting plug can be rotated
• Maintenance free
• Integral soiling check
• LED switching conditions display
• Simple flexible mounting
and adjustment
emitter SLB 400-E 50-21P
receiver SLB 400-R 50-21P
Standards:
IEC/EN 61496
Control Category:
4 (only in combination
with SLB 400-C)
Enclosure:
ABS
Enclosure dimensions:
50 x 50 x 17 mm
Connection:
M 12 x 1, 4-pole coupler
socket, can be rotated
Max. cable length:
100 m
Protection class:
IP 67 to EN 60529
Response time:
25 ms
(only in combination
with SLB 400-C)
Range:
15 m
Start/Restart interlock: only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Contactor control:
only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Light emission
wavelength:
880 nm
Ue:
24 VDC ± 20%
Safety outputs:
only in combination with
safety monitoring module
Angle of radiation:
± 2°
Min. size of object:
13 mm Ø
LED status indication:
soiling, switching
condition and
power on
Ambient temperature:
0 °C ... + 60 °C
Storage and
transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 80 ºC
System components
SLB 400-C10-1R
Connector plug M 12 x 1 (with cable)
Mounting angle BF 50
Mounting angle BF UNI 1
Approvals
H
Ordering details
SLB 400-➀ 50-21P
No.
➀
Replace
E/R
Description
Emitter / receiver
Note
The system components (safety monitoring
module, connector plug, cable, etc.) are
not included in delivery.
Ordering details
Monitoring of safety light barriers
SLB 400-C10-1R
refer to page 4-8
Connector plug M 12 x 1
emitter/receiver: KD M12-4 (without cable)
KD M12-4-2m
KD M12-4-5m
Mounting angles
BF 50
Mounting angles universal
BF UNI 1
305
Safety light barriers
SLB 200-C
• To IEC 61496
• Control Category 2 to EN 954-1, BWS-T
• Up to two pairs of light barrier devices
can be connected
• 1 enabling path
• 1 signalling output
• Operating voltage 24 VDC
• Test input
• LED display of switching conditions
• Response time ≤ 30 ms
• Start/Restart interlock can be
switched active or inactive
• Contactor monitoring can be
switched active or inactive
• Additional cyclic testing
• Co-ordinated for use with
SLB 200 R/E safety light barriers
Approvals
Ordering details
SLB 200-C04-1R
306
Technical data
Standards:
Control category:
Start-up test:
Start conditions:
Feedback circuit:
Enclosure:
Mounting:
Connection:
Cable section:
Protection class:
Ue:
Ie:
Power consumption:
Inputs:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, EN 954-1
2
yes
Test button, start-reset button, on/off coding
yes
polycarbonate
snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 50022
screw terminals
max. 4 mm2 (incl. conductor ferrules)
IP 20 to EN 60529
24 VDC ± 20%
180 mA
–
test input: command device: NC contact
release start/restart interlock (start/reset): enable via command
device (NO contact), contactor monitoring (NC contacts)
Monitored inputs
max. 2 pairs of light barriers
Input resistance:
–
Max. cable length:
–
Test and feedback:
potential-free contact
Outputs:
1 enabling path
Enabling contacts:
1 enabling path
Utilisation category:
AC-15, DC-13
Ie/Ue:
2 A / 250 VAC, 2 A / 24 VDC
Contact load capacity:
max. 250 VAC, max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)
Switching voltage:
max. 250 VAC
Load current:
8A
Max. fuse rating:
4 A gG D-fuse
Signalling output:
1 transistor output
Switch-on conditions:
test duration: ≤ 150 ms (without relay control)
≤ 450 ms (with relay control)
Switch-off time:
response time (complete sy.): ≤ 30 ms
Indications:
red LED for light barrier interrupted
green LED for light barrier free
soiling: flashing red/green
Function display:
4 LEDs
EMC rating:
conforming to EMC Directive
Max. switching frequency:
10 Hz
Overvoltage category:
II to DIN VDE 0110
Degree of pollution:
3 to DIN VDE 0110
Resistance to vibration:
10 ... 55 Hz / amplitude 0.35 mm
Resistance to shock:
10 g / 16 ms
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 50 ºC
Storage and transport temperature:
– 20 °C … + 80 ºC
Dimensions:
45 x 84 x 118 mm
Note:
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are
to be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.
Safety light barriers
Note
Wiring diagram
• For protection in Control Category 2 to
EN 954-1
• Monitoring two pairs of light barrier devices
and the power contactor using the
SLB 200-C safety monitoring module
• Test push button I
The test push button is connected to X13
and X14 in order to carry out a check of
the light barrier monitoring function. The
terminals X15 and X16 must be bridged.
• The wiring diagram is shown for the
de-energised condition.
• Contactor check
To monitor an external contactor, the feedback circuit is connected to X17 and X18.
The terminals X19 and X20 must be bridged.
• Start push button H
The start push button can be used to start
the monitoring of the light barriers for a new
start or after an interruption. The terminals
X3 and X4 must be bridged.
• It is also possible to connect only one
pair of light barrier devices.
Note
In order to set for the desired mode of
operation and number of light barriers
connected, remove the front cover of the
safety monitoring module. As supplied all
switches are in Position 1.
Note
The required functions can be selected by means of the internal DIP switches.
DIP switch 1
DIP switch 2
DIP switch 3
Position 1
With contactor check
With start/restart interlock
Position 2
Without contactor check
Without start/restart interlock
Connection of two
light barriers
Connection of one
light barrier
307
Safety light barriers
SLB 400-C
• To IEC 61496
• Control Category 4 to EN 954-1, BWS-S
• Cross-wire monitoring
• ISD Integral System Diagnostics
• Operating voltage 24 VDC
• Feedback circuit to monitor
external contactors
• Two short-circuit proof additional
transistor outputs
• Response time ≤ 30 ms
• Start/Restart interlock can be
switched active or inactive
• Contactor monitoring can be
switched active or inactive
• Can be coded
• Up to 4 light barrier pairs SLB 400
can be connected
Approvals
H
Ordering details
SLB 400-C10-1R
308
Technical data
Standards:
Control category:
Start-up test:
Start conditions:
Feedback circuit:
Enclosure:
Mounting:
Connection:
Cable section:
Protection class:
Ue:
Ie:
Power consumption:
Inputs:
Monitored inputs
Input resistance:
Input signal „1“:
Input signal „0“:
Max. cable length:
Outputs:
Enabling contacts:
Utilisation category:
Ie/Ue:
Contact load capacity:
Switching voltage:
Load current:
Switching capacity:
Max. fuse rating:
Additional outputs:
IEC/EN 61496-1/-2, EN 954-1
4
yes
Start-reset button, on/off coding
yes
glass-fibre reinforced thermoplastic
snaps onto standard DIN rail to EN 50022
screw terminals
max. 4 mm2 (incl. conductor ferrules)
terminals IP 20, enclosure IP 40 to EN 60529
24 VDC ± 15%
0.3 A without additional transistor outputs
–
S1, S2
max. 4 pairs of light barriers
approx. 2 kΩ to ground
10 ... 30 VDC
0 ... 2 VDC
100 m of 0.75 mm2 conductor
2 enabling paths
2 enabling paths
AC-15, DC-13
2 A / 250 VAC, 2 A / 24 VDC
max. 250 VAC, max. 2 A (cos ϕ = 1)
max. 250 VAC
max. 2 A
max. 500 VA
2 A gG D-fuse
additional transistor outputs Y1, Y2, Ue – 4 V,
100 mA total, short-circuit proof, p-type
Signalling output:
2 transistor outputs, Y1 + Y2 = max. 100 mA, p-type, short-circuit proof
Switch-on time:
–
Response time:
≤ 25 ms
Monitoring for synchronism of muting sensors:
–
Indications:
ISD
Function display:
9 LEDs (ISD*)
EMC rating:
conforming to EMC Directive
Max. switching frequency:
10 Hz
Overvoltage category:
II to DIN VDE 0110
Degree of pollution:
3 to DIN VDE 0110
Resistance to vibration:
10 ... 55 Hz / amplitude 0.35 mm, ± 15 %
Resistance to shock:
30 g / 11 ms
Ambient temperature:
0 °C … + 55 ºC
Storage and transport temperature:
– 25 °C … + 70 ºC
Dimensions:
99.7 x 75 x 110 mm
Note:
Inductive loads (e.g. contactors, relays, etc.) are
to be suppressed by means of a suitable circuit.
Safety light barriers
Note
Wiring diagram
• For protection in Control Category 4 to
EN 954-1
• Monitoring up to four pairs of light barrier
devices and the power contactors using the
SLB 400-C safety monitoring module
• The wiring diagram is shown for the
de-energised condition.
• Connection of two pairs of safety light
barrier devices
When two pairs of safety light barriers
are connected, the terminals X9-X10
and X11-X12 must be bridged.
• Restart push button J
The restart function can be selected by
means of the DIP switches. When a start
push button is connected to X5 and X6,
it must be operated for min. 250 ms and
max. 5 s after an interruption of the
safety light barriers.
ISD
The following faults are registered
by the safety monitoring modules
and indicated by ISD
• Short-circuit on the connecting leads
• Interruption of the connecting leads
• Failure of the safety relay to pull-in
or drop-out
• Fault on the input circuits or the relay control
circuits of the safety monitoring module
• Mutual influence between the connected
pairs of light barrier device and others on
neighbouring systems
Note
The ISD tables (Intergral System Diagnostics) for analysis of the fault indications and their
causes are shown in the appendix.
309
Safety light barriers accessories SLB 200 and SLB 400
System components
System components
Mirror SLB 200/400 SMA 80
Mounting post ST 1250
Mounting angle BF SMA 80-1
Floor-stand base STB 1
Mounting angle BF SMA 80-2
T-slot nut NST 20-8
Ordering details
Mirror
Mounting angles
for mirror
T-slot nut
310
Ordering details
SMA 80
BF SMA 80-1
BF SMA 80-2
NST 20-8
Mounting post
Floor-stand base
ST 1250
STB 1
SAFETY CATEGORY 3 PRESSURE MATS
GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES
SCHMERSAL’s Series SMS Safety Pressure Mats feature a 100% active area,
low actuating force, rugged cable termination, durable “unibody construction”
cable entry, IP67 submersible rating, highly chemical resistant mat material, CEcompliance, and a 3-year warranty. When properly installed with a compatible
safety controller (described herein) they meet the stringent requirements of
EN954-1 safety category 3.
311
SERIES SMS 3
Safety Pressure Mats
Features & Benefits
• 100% active mat area … ramp edge trim and insulating
strip-contact design ensure actuation over entire mat
surface
• High chemical resistance … mat material is tolerant to
most acids, alcohols, aldehydes, caustics, solvents and oils
found in an industrial environment
• Non-slip surface profile … unique surface geometry
designed to enhance traction and minimize slippage
• Meets safety category 3 requirements of EN 954-1 …
suitable for most industrial applications
• Modular design … permits protection over a diversity of
hazardous area shapes/sizes
• Easy-to-install … simple 4-wire connection (without need
of a terminal resistor or additional base plate)
• Integral 6m cable … satisfies wiring requirements for a
wide variety of applications
• Rugged IP67 design … with mechanical life expectancy of
more than 5 million actuations
• Fully CE-compliant … third-party certified to EN1760-1
• Extended warranty … mats are warranteed for 3 years
from date of shipment
Description
The maintenance-free series SMS 3 safety mat system is
designed to safeguard personnel when entering a hazardous
area around dangerous machinery. A person’s presence is
detected upon their stepping/walking on the mat. The
interconnected safety controller (such as the AZR 31 R2,
AZR 31 T2, or AZR 11 RT2) continuously monitors the
integrity of the safety mat system, sending a “stop” signal to
the machinery in the event of a system fault or pressure mat
actuation.
When properly installed with the ramp edge profiles, a 100%
mat actuation area is achieved… thus complying with the
stringent requirements of EN 954-1 safety category 3
Operation
The series SMS 3 safety mat consists of two electrodes
(steel plates) separated by an internal layer of compressible
elastomeric insulating strips. The insulating strips are capped
by a conductive u-shaped strip whose edges overhang the
compressible insulator.
Upon the application of pressure (e.g. walking/stepping on the
mat), the insulating strips compress allowing the conductive
strip to close the normally-open circuit between the steel
electrodes. This closure signal is detected by the system’s
safety controller whose safety output(s) sends a “stop” signal
to the machinery being approached.
AVAILABLE STANDARD MODELS
Model
Length x Width of
Mat without Trim Kit
“Ramp Edge” Trim Kit
(Must be ordered
separatley)*
SMS 3 25-25
250 mm x 250 mm
SMS PF 100-25-25
SMS 3 25-50
250 mm x 500 mm
SMS PF 100-25-50
SMS 3 25-100
250 mm x 1000 mm
SMS PF 100-25-100
SMS 3 50-50
500 mm x 500 mm
SMS PF 100-50-50
SMS 3 50-100
500 mm x 1000 mm
SMS PF 100-50-100
SMS 3 50-150
500 mm x 1500 mm
SMS PF 100-50-150
SMS 3 75-75
750 mm x 750 mm
SMS PF 100-75-75
SMS 3 75-100
750 mm x 1000 mm
SMS PF 100-75-100
SMS 3 75-150
750 mm x 1500 mm
SMS PF 100-75-150
SMS 3 100-100
1000 mm x 1000 mm
SMS PF 100-100-100
SMS 3 100-150
1000 mm x 1500 mm
SMS PF 100-100-150
SMS 3 120-120
1200 mm x 1200 mm
SMS PF 100-120-120
SMS 3 120-150
1200 mm x 1500 mm
SMS PF 100-120-150
Other sizes and non-rectangular shapes available. Please consult factory.
*SMS 3 Safety Mats and Trim Kits must be ordered with a compatible
safety controller module. “Active Edge” trim is also available. Please
consult factory.
312
SERIES SMS 3 SAFETY PRESSURE MAT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Conformance to Standards
Degree of Ingress Protection
Response Time
Mechanical Life Expectancy
Maximum Load
Material
Mat Thickness
Mat Weight
Standard Cable Length
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Warranty Period
Agency Approvals
Chemical Resistance
EN 1760-1
IP67 per IEC 60529
≤ 30ms (single mat only)
> 5 million operations
2000 N/cm2 (2,900 lbs/sq. in)
Mat: Plastisol; Ramp Edge: Aluminum
12mm (.05 in.)
18 kg/m2 (3.7 lbs/sq. ft)
6 meters (19.7 ft) (Other lengths
available. Please consult factory.)
+5°C to +50°C
(+41°F to +122°F)
3 Years (from date of shipment)
CE-Compliant
Water: Excellent
Mineral Acids: Good – Excellent
Organic Acids: Good – Excellent
Alcohols: Good
Aldehydes: Good – Excellent
Caustics: Good – Excellent
Petroleum Solvents: Fair – Good
Oils: Good
TRIM KIT DETAILS
Mat installation with 2-1/2" ramp edge trim
for perimeter finishing and “active threshold
joining trim” for interior multiple-mat bridging.
Ramp edge trim installation detail. Place ramp
edge trim flush against edge of mat as shown.
“Active Threshold” joiner trim installation detail.
7
313
SERIES SMS 3 COMPATIBLE SAFETY CONTROLLERS
The SMS 3 safety mat system includes a choice of three compatible safety controllers … one of
which is required for each installation.
These choices are summarized in the chart below with complete technical specifications shown at the right.
Type Reset
(See Note 1)
Number of
Safety Outputs
Available Signaling
Output
Safety Controller
Input Voltage
AZR3IT2-24VAC
Automatic
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
24VAC
AZR3IT2-24VDC
Automatic
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
24VDC
AZR3IT2-110VAC
Automatic
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
110VAC
AZR3IR2-24VAC
Manual
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
24VAC
AZR3IR2-24VDC
Manual
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
24VDC
AZR3IR2-110VAC
Manual
3
1 N.C. (Voltage-free)
110VAC
AZR11RT2-24VDC
Automatic
(user selectable)
1
1 N.O. (PNP-output)
24VDC
Model Number
Note 1: Manual reset units require the presence of a discrete “trailing edge” signal (24V to 0V) to activate
(reset) the safety outputs. A reset button must be provided.
Automatic reset units do not require a reset signal. These units automatically re-activate (reset)
the safety outputs when pressure is removed from the mat and no other safety circuit faults exist.
A discrete reset button may be used for increased safety.
Each of these DIN-rail mountable safety controllers are designed to monitor the integrity of the SMS 3
safety mat circuit. In the event of mat actuation or the occurrence of a fault in the circuit, the safety
output(s) will be activated to stop the hazardous machinery. Detectable faults include:
•
•
•
•
Open circuit in interconnection wiring
Short in the interconnection wiring
Fault in one or more of the controller’s safety relays
Welded contact in the controlled positive-guided motor contactor or control relay
In addition, each unit features LED system status indicators to aid in installation and trouble shooting.
314
SERIES SMS 3 COMPATIBLE SAFETY CONTROLLERS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Conformance to Standards
EN 60204-1, IEC60204-1, EN954-1, EN292-1,
EN292-2, DIN VDE 0110-1, VDE 0113 Part 1
Housing Material
Polycarbonate
Mounting Arrangement
DIN-rail mounting according to DIN EN 50022
Housing Dimensions
AZR31: 73.2mm x 45mm x 121mm
AZR11: 82mm x 22.5mm x 98.8mm
Degree of Ingress Protection
Terminals: IP20
Housing: IP40
(per IEC 60529)
Operating Voltage
24VAC ± 15% (AZR31)
24VDC ± 15% (AZR31 & AZR11)
110VAC ± 15% (AZR31)
230VAC ± 15% (AZR31 … available on request)
Power Consumption
AZR31: <3W
AZR11: <0.5W
Inputs
Channel A, B: Voltage-free contacts
Output Signals
AZR31: 3 enabling (safety) outputs
(Two N.O. relay contacts in series)
1 signaling contact
(Two N.C. relay contacts in parallel)
AZR11: 1 enabling (safety) output
(Two N.O. relay contacts in series)
1 signalling contact (PNP output, 15mA)
Switching Voltage/
Switching Power
Response Time
AZR31: Max. 440 VAC, 1500 VA
Max. 30VDC, 60W
AZR11: Max. 250 VAC, 1000VA
≤ 15 ms
Signalling
AZR31: Green LEDs for control voltage,
Channel A, channel B, Output
AZR11: Green LEDs for control voltage, Output
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
0°C to +50°C (+32°F to +122°F)
Storage Temperature Range
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Weight
AZR31: Approx. 465 gm (1 lb)
AZR11: Approx. 150 gm (0.35 lb)
Agency Approvals
UL, CSA, CE-Compliant
7
315
OPTIONAL JUNCTION BOX FOR MULTIPLE MATS
9.02 in. (229,1 mm)
9.44 in. (239,8 mm)
Mounting Holes
11.06 in. (280,9 mm)
5.87 in. (149,1 mm)
6.29 in. (159,8 mm)
7.10 in. (180,3 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
3.5 in. (88,9 mm)
0.61 in. (15,5 mm)
5.13 in. (130,3 mm)
0.58 in. (14,7 mm)
4.72 in. (119,9 mm)
6.29 in. (159,8 mm)
6.35 in. (161,3 mm)
7.10 in. (180,3 mm)
Up to 5 Mats
Part Number
Weight
Material
Temp. Range
SMS JB 5
1.9 lbs
Acylonitrile Butadine Styrene (ABS)
-40 F to +180 F with standard Neoprene gasket
(-4 C to +82 C)
-40 F to +266 F with optional silicone gasket
(-4 C to +130 C)
Protection Class NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 and 13
IP65
DIN 40050
Capacity
6 integral cable grips will accept up to 5 Larco
Safety mat cables. 4 plugs provided to seal
unused positions
Control Cable
18/4 SVT Black 20' cable .245" OD
Wires are designated as black-#1, white-#2,
black-#3 and white-#4.
(Maximum cable length: 300')
Terminal Strips
24-position tubular contacts. (No wire lugs
required.) Captive screws and “dead front”
construction eliminate short circuits.
316
Mounting Holes
Up to 10 Mats
Part Number
Weight
Material
Temp. Range
SMS JB 10
2.7 lbs
Acylonitrile Butadine Styrene (ABS)
-40 F to +180 F with standard Neoprene gasket
(-4 C to +82 C)
-40 F to +266 F with optional silicone gasket
(-4 C to +130 C)
Protection Class NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 5, 12 and 13
IP65
DIN 40050
Capacity
12 integral cable grips will accept up to 10 Larco
Safety mat cables. 9 plugs provided to seal
unused positions
Control Cable
18/4 SVT Black 20' cable .245" OD
Wires are designated as black -#1,
white-#2, black-#3 and white-#4.
(Maximum cable length: 300')
Terminal Strips
48-position tubular contacts. (No wire lugs
required.) Captive screws and “dead front”
construction eliminate short circuits.
FAIL-TO-SAFE SAFETY EDGES
SELECTION GUIDE
SCHMERSAL’s Series SE Safety Edges/Bumpers are available as sub-assembly
components or as custom assemblies produced to user specifications. The following
pages provide details regarding operation, construction and ordering details. Among
the user options are safety edge profile, mounting frame profile and length. Please
contact us if you have any questions, special needs or require assistance with
properly specifying the safety edge which meets your requirements.
7
317
SERIES SE
Optical Safety Edges/Bumpers
Features & Benefits
• Can be cut & mounted in the field … easy to fit and adjust
length when placing the edge on the door
• Safety controller SE 100 handles up to 2 safety edges …
reduced cost in multiple door applications
• Rugged corrosion & abrasion resistance rubber profiles
… tolerant to most industrial environments
• Watertight design … meets IP 68 environmental
requirements.
• Low operating force … assures reliable operation
• Automatic gain control … tolerates slight bending
• Simple field installation … low cost & easy to repair
• Meets rigid safety agency standards … BG, UL and CSA
Description
Typical Applications
The series SE Safety edge consists of a rugged high tear
resistant rubber profile, an aluminum mounting rail, a plug-in
optoelectronic transmitter and receiver pair and a
compatible safety controller. The design features a high
reflective internal rubber surface and a self-adjusting gain
optical pair whose performance is uncompromised by slight
bending … and predictable over the specified operating
range.
Ideal wherever crushing or shearing points are to be
safeguarded, such as on guard doors, elevating platforms,
rising stages, moving stock shelving, operating process
tables, loading ramps, hoists or tipping equipment.
Units can be quickly and easily assembled (without special
skills or use of adhesives) for lengths of 400 mm to 10 m.
The self adjusting optical pair assure the same sensitivity
and performance independent of chosen length.
The mechanical design assures encapsulation of the
transmitter and receiver ensuring reliable operation
unaffected by environmental soiling.
Operation
In operation the transmitted IR beam is detected, by the
receiver resulting in enabling of the safety controllers safety
output(s). Deformation of the rubber profile
interrupts/weakens the signal between the transmitter and
receiver. This is sensed by the safety controller disabling the
outputs allowing the hazardous movement to be stopped.
Depending upon the choice of safety controller the system
meets the requirements of EN 954-1 Safety control category
1 or 4.
318
Note: Not recommended for use on overhead doors. Please consult
factory for such applications.
®
is a trademark of SCHMERSAL
SERIES SE ORDERING & ASSEMBLY INFORMATION
AVAILABLE SUBASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
Parts required for a system are:
Aluminum profile, rubber profile,
sensor set and safety controller
Aluminum Profile
SE-AL10-1250
SE-AL10-2500
SE-AL12-1250
SE-AL12-2500
SE-AL20-1250
SE-AL20-2500
SE-AL22-1250
SE-AL22-2500
Rubber Profile
SE- P 40 - 1250 mm
SE- P 40 - 2500 mm
SE- P 70 - 1250 mm
SE- P 70 - 2500 mm
Sensor Set
SE- SET
Safety Controller
SE- 100C
(2 Bumpers)
SE- 400C
SE- 304C
(4 Bumpers)
Accessories
SE- EC 40 (2 required)
SE- EC 70 (2 required)
SE- SC
SE- WA
SE- J1
Description
1.25
2.50
1.25
2.50
1.25
2.50
1.25
2.50
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Description
SE-P40 - 1250
SE-P40 - 2500
SE-P70 - 1250
SE-P70 - 2500
Description
SE - T Transmitter &
SE - R Receiver
}
}
}
}
AL 10 & AL 12 for use with P40 rubber profile.
AL 20 & AL 22 for use with P70 rubber profile
P40 Rubber profile for use with AL 10 & AL 12 mounting rail.
P70 Rubber profile for use with AL 20 & AL 22 mounting rail.
Description
Safety Control Category 1
Safety Control Category 4
Safety Control Category 3
(Please contact
factory for details)
Description
}
End Cap for SE - P 40
End Cap for SE - P 70
Rubber profile shears
Wiring aid
Junction Box
Six steps to install the safety edge
4
1
Cut aluminum rail
to desired length
and fasten in place
2
Cut the rubber
profile to desired
length
5
3
Clip the rubber
profile into the
aluminum rail
6
Press the
transmitter and
receiver units
into the ends of
the rubber
profile
Thread emitter or receiver cable through
profile to desired cable exit end of rubber
profile.
Connect to the desired safety controller
It is ready !
7
319
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
Aluminum Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm)
12
9
1,5
2
12
9
centering groove
centering groove
30
25
SE AL 20
SE AL 10
12
9
2
1,5
12
25
centering groove
9
centering groove
20
30
SE AL 12
20
SE AL 22
Rubber Mounting Rail Profiles & Dimensions (mm)
Table of Properties
Rubber Profile
Rubber Material
Temperature Range
Resistance
SE - P 40 , SE - P 70
EPDM , shore hardness 60
- 40 °C to + 170 °C ( short term)
- 30 °C to + 170 °C ( long term)
good against ozone , moderate
against oils, acids, solvents, fuels
Ø 13,4
0,9
Ø1
0,9
Ø1
58,5
10
33
Ø13,4
31
25
SE P 40
30
320
SE P 70
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
Force/Travel diagram for the rubber
profiles with SE 100 C controller unit
Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-100 C
Force/Travel
Fa [N]
Sa [mm] Fn [N]
Sn [mm]
Testing Speed
100 mm/s
10 mm/s
SE-P40
92
9
250
16
400
18
600
20
SE-P70
22
8
250
46
400
47
600
48
Legend
Fa
Sa
Fn
Sn
Sg
Actuating force
Actuating travel
Overtravel force
Overtravel
Total deformation travel
Force/Travel diagram for the rubber
profiles with SE 400 C controller unit
Force/Travel table of rubber profiles with SE-400 C
Force/Travel
Fa [N]
Sa [mm] Fn [N]
Sn [mm]
Testing Speed
100 mm/s10 mm/s
SE-P40
140
11
250
14
400
16
600
18
SE-P70
23
9
250
43
400
44
600
45
with the above test data.
The measurements are carried out according to EN 1760-2*
Sg = Sa + Sn
The complete system is suitable for finger recognition in accordance
Test conditions
Measurement parameters
Temperature:
T = 20 °C
Mounting position
B (to EN 1760-2*)
Place of measurement
C 3 (to EN 1760-2*)
* preliminary
7
321
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
Transmitter and Receiver Pair
Technical Data for SE - T / SE - R
Technical Data
Material
Protection class
Dimensions
Connecting cable
Cable length
Permissible
cable length
Operating
temperature
-25 °C to +75 °C
l
Fitting the rubber profile in a light bend
Light bends in the profile reduce the maximum possible
length of safety edge.
The infrared signal between the transmitter and receiver
overcomes light bends by reflection in the inner wall of the
profile and self adjusting gain to increase transmission
power.
Large radii offer less resistance in this case than smaller
ones.
The reflective properties of the individual batches supplied
are not absolutely constant and affect the reproducibility
within certain limits.
The reflective characteristics of the SE-P40 and SE-P70
profiles are the same. The SE-P40 profile allows tighter radii
to be used than the SE-P70 because of its smaller
dimensions. When formed into tight bends, rubber profiles
tend to buckle, thus leading to total blockage of the light
channel.
322
SE - T , SE - R
Polyurethane
IP 68
11.5 mm dia., 37 mm long
3 x 0.14 mm2 stranded wire
Transmitter 6.6 m
Receiver 3 m
Max. 200 m
a
r
Maximum
Radius (r)
0m
1m
0,5 m
0,3 m
Bend
Angle (a)
0°
15°
63°
90°
Bend
Length (l)
10,0 m
4,5 m
2,5 m
1,25 m
Note: Maximum edge length is a function of both bend
angle and bend radius.The above values are
guidelines only.
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
SE Series
Safety Controllers
Electrical Specification
Standards
Safety Control Category
Enclosure
Fixing
Screw terminals
Protection class (terminals)
Operational voltage
Fuse rating (supply)
Inputs
Outputs
Safety contacts
Signalling contacts
Max. switching capacity
Utilization category
Rated operational current/voltage Ie / Ue
Switching voltage
Max. switching current
Contact fuse rating
Mechanical life
Readiness time
Switch-on delay
Switch-off delay
Ambient temperature
Shock resistant
Interference
Weight Approx.
Clearance and creepage distances
Power consumption
SE - 100 C
SE - 400 C
EN 1760-2, EN60947-5-1, VDE 0660 Part 200
1 to EN 954-1
PE (black), Crastin (grey)
DIN rail EN 50 022
max. 2 x 2.5 mm2 solid wire
max. 2 x 1.5 mm2 stranded wire with end thimble
(IP 20) Enclosure IP 40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1
24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %)
1A (surge-resistant)
1 or 2 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver
Changeover contacts
11/14
21/22/24
EN1760-2, EN60947-5-1,VDE 0660 Part 200
4 to EN 954-1
PE (black), Crastin (grey)
DIN rail EN 50 022
max. 2 x 2.5 mm2 solid wire
max. 2 x 1.5 mm2 stranded wire with end thimble
(IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/ VDE 0470-1
24VDC (+ 20 % / – 10 %)
1A (surge-resistant)
1 pair SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver
Normally open contacts
13/14, 23/24
Semiconductor X1, Connection to internal
ground Umax. 36 V, Imax. 50 mA
max. 1000 VA
AC-15; DC-13
2 A/230VAC; 3 A/24VDC
250V AC/DC
4A (resistive load)
4A surge-resistant
3 x 107 switching cycles
Approx. 32ms
Approx. 32ms
Typically 15ms
+5 °C to +55 °C
< 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160)
According to EMC Directive
Approx. 0.2kg
Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160
Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160
<4W
max. 1000 VA
AC-15; DC-13
2 A/230VAC; 2 A/24VDC
250V AC/DC
6A (resistive load)
6A surge-resistant
2 x 107 switching cycles
Max. 300ms
Max. 300ms
Typically 15ms
+5 °C to +55 °C
< 5g / 33Hz (VDE 0160)
According to EMC Directive
0.18kg
Degree of soiling 2 to VDE 0160
Overvoltage category III / 4kV to VDE 0160
<4W
Note: Maximum distance to controller: 200m. Use 20AWG to extend bumper leads to safety controller.
7
323
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
SE 304C
Electrical Specification
Standards
Safety Control Category
Enclosure
Mounting
Screwterminals
Protection class (terminals)
Operating voltage
Fuse rating (supply)
Inputs
Outputs
Safety contacts
Signalling contacts
Max. switching capacity
Utilization category
Rated operational current/voltage
Switching voltage
Max. switching current
Mechanical life
Switch-off delay
Ambient temperature
Shock resistant
Interference
Weight
Power consumption
324
SE - 304C
EN 1760-2
3 to EN954-1
Thermoplastic
DIN rail EN50 022
Max. 2x2.5mm2 solid wire
Max. 2x1.5mm2 stranded with end thimble
(IP20) Enclosure IP40 IEC/EN 60529/VDE 0470-1
24VDC (+20%/-10%)
24VAC (+10%/-10%)
1A (Slow-blow)
1 to 4 pairs SE-T/R Transmitter/Receiver
NO contact
13/14
Semi-conductor XI, Imax. 50 mA
Max. 1500VA
AC-15, DC-13
2A/230VAC, 2A/24VDC
250VAC/60VDC
2A
>107 switching cycles
Typically 17ms
+5°C to +55°C
<5g/33Hz (VDE 0160)
According to EMC Directive
0.185 kg
<4W
SERIES SE TECHNICAL DATA
Typical Wiring Diagram
Example with SE - 400 C
Example with SE - 100 C
+24V-
SE1
SE-R
L1
L1
+24V-
SE-T
SE-R
bn
gn
+24V
SE2
SE-T
gn
SE-R
br
bn
gn
wh
wh
A1(+)
A1(+) A4(-)
S12
S22
S
SE-T
A3(+)
21
A4(-)
S12 A3(+)
X1
X2
X3
K1
K1
K2
K2
U-
U-
K2
K1
23
K1
K2
sensors input
relay output
sensors input
relay output
K1
13
11
K2
K1
K2
14
A2(-)
14 2
24 22
A2(-)
24
SE-400C
SE-100C
0V
N
N
M
3
3
M
Example with SE - 304 C
SE1
SE-R
bn
SE4
SE-T
SE-R
bn
gn
wh
SE-T
gn
wh
SE3
SE2
SE-R
bn
SE-T
SE-R
bn
gn
wh
SE-T
gn
wh
gn1
S12
gn3
gn4
S22 A4(-) A3(+) S32
gn2
S42
wh
bn
7
325
Safer
by
Design
326
GENERAL & SPECIFIC-PURPOSE
SAFETY CONTROLLERS
GENERAL PRODUCT FEATURES
SCHMERSAL’s PROTECT Series Safety Controllers have been designed to
satisfy a wide range of application requirements. Features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removable, plug-in screw terminals
Compact size
Electronic fuses
Feedback monitoring
Convection-cooled housings
PNP and/or dry contact monitoring capability
Stop category 0 and Stop category 1 models
Cross short monitoring
Multiple-voltage operation
7
• Safety Category 3 and 4 models
• Monitored manual reset
327
SERIES
SAFETY CONTROLLERS
SELECTION GUIDE
Model
Operating
Voltage (UB)
Types of
Inputs
Monitored
Number of
Input Devices
Monitored
Number of
Safety
Outputs
Number of
Auxiliary
Outputs
Feedback
Monitoring
Type of
Reset
Cross-short
Monitoring
SRB 201 ZH
24VDC
Two-hand control
(dry contacts)
2
2
1 N.C.
Yes
Automatic
Yes
SRB 206 ST*
24VAC/DC
or
48-230VAC
Dry contacts
6
2
6
(Semiconductor)
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
No
SRB 206 SQ*
24VAC/DC
or
48-230VAC
Dry contacts
6
2
6
(Semiconductor)
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
SRB 211 AN
24VAC/DC
Dry contacts
1
2 (stop category 0)
1 (stop category 1)
1
(Semiconductor)
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
(selectable)
SRB 211 ST
24VAC/DC
Dry contacts
or
PNP-type outputs
1
2 (stop category 0)
1 (stop category 1)
1
(Semiconductor)
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
(selectable)
SRB 301 LC
&
SRB 301 LCI
24VAC/DC
Dry contacts
or
PNP-type outputs
1
3
1 N.C.
Yes
Manual
or Automatic
Yes
(selectable)
SRB 301 ST
24VAC/DC
Dry contacts
or
PNP-type outputs
1
3
1 N.C.
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
(selectable)
SRB 301 ST- 48V-230VAC
230V
Dry contacts
1
3
1 N.C.
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
No
SRB 301 SQ- 48V-230VAC
230V
Dry contacts
1
3
1 N.C.
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
Dry contacts
or
PNP-type outputs
1
Yes
Monitoredmanual
or Automatic
Yes
w!
Ne
SRB 324ST
24VAC/DC
w!
Ne
3 (stop category 0) 1 N.C. plus
2 (stop category 1)
3 semiconductors
*Suitable for use in systems designed for up to Safety Control Category 3 per EN954-1.
All others are suitable for use in systems up to Safety Control Category 4 per EN954-1.
DIFFERENTIATED-INPUT SAFETY CONTROLLERS
SRB 202 C
24VDC
Dry Contacts
2
2
2 N.C.
Yes
Depends
upon model*
Depends
upon model*
SRB 400 C
24VDC
Dry Contacts
2
4
None
Yes
Depends
upon model*
Depends
upon model*
*Please see selection chart on Page 282.
SAFETY OUTPUT EXPANSION MODULE
SRB 402 EM
328
24VAC/DC
N/A
N/A
4
2 N.C.
Yes
Automatic
N/A
SAFETY CONTROLLER SELECTION CRITERIA
It helps the selection process to view a safety controller as
having four basic characteristics, each determined by the
application requirements. This approach can be applied to
any safety controller.
FOUR BASIC SAFETY CONTROLLER CHARACTERISTICS
Input
Monitoring
Supply Voltage
SUPPLY VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS
Select your supply voltage. While many voltages are possible (24VDC, 24VAC, 24VAC/DC, 115VAC and 230VAC),
24 VDC gives the most flexibility since virtually all controllers are available in this voltage. Also, since a transformer and rectifier are not required, this unit generally is
less expensive and smaller than a 115VAC model.
It is important to recognize that the safety controller
supply voltage is always converted by the controller
electronics to 24VDC for internal operation and for
powering monitored input devices. Hence monitored
input devices need only be rated for 24VDC.
INPUT MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
The first step is to determine whether you need single
channel (up to Safety Control Category 2) or dual-channel
(Control Category 3 & 4) operation.
Single-channel systems must monitor one N.C. positivebreak contact. Dual-channel systems can monitor
1 N.O./1 N.C. or 2 N.C. contacts. Generally, these need
to be isolated dry contacts since most controllers will view
C-form contacts as a short circuit. Remember that 24VDC
is supplied by the safety controller for monitoring these
contacts.
Safety controllers are also available for monitoring
non-potential free contacts (such as PNP outputs from
light curtains). Models are also available that allow users
to field select the monitored contact configuration.
Another consideration is crossed wire detection (a short
between channels). This requires special circuitry in the
safety controllers and is required for Safety Control
Category 4 safety control systems.
FEEDBACK & RESET CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS
Safety controllers with feedback capability can also
monitor control relays and motor contactors with positive-
Feedback &
Reset Circuit
Output
guided contacts. Such feedback is required for Safety
Control Category 3 & 4 systems. A NC auxiliary contact is
wired into the feedback loop (with or without a reset (start)
button) to detect welded contacts in these external control
devices. The safety controller detects the existence of a
weld when the relay shuts down due to a power loss or
open machine guard and prevents a restart.
In order to reset the controller, the feedback loop must be
closed (at least temporarily). If the NC auxiliary contact
stays open due to a contact weld, the controller cannot be
reset.
Safety Control reset can be automatic or be achieved
using the edge of a 24VDC reset signal. With automatic
reset the controller will automatically reset (outputs close)
when the machine guard is closed. Alternately, a reset or
start button (manual reset) can be added to the feedback
loop if desired. The controller only needs to momentarily
see a 24VDC signal at the feedback terminals to reset.
With a monitored-manual reset, some type of pushbutton
is required. For monitored-manual resets, the feedback
loop circuitry is designed so that it needs to see a 24V to
0V transition (trailing edge) in order to reset. This method
of reset is generally required when a person can actually
get inside a machine guard (where they would be at risk if
the equipment should automatically restart when the
guard closes).
OUTPUT REQUIREMENTS
Determine the number and type of safety controller outputs required for machine control elements and signaling.
Following are the typical types of safety controller outputs:
A. N.O. safety enable circuits — either
instantaneous or timed.
B. N.O. or N.C. auxiliary relay contacts — these
are not to be used for safety functions, but
only for annunciation/signaling.
7
C. Semiconductor outputs for annunciation.
329
SERIES SRB 201 ZH
Two-Hand Control Safety Controller
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
24 VDC
# Discrete Input
Devices Monitored
2
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
(Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Safety Outputs
2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
1 N.C. (Dry Contact)
(Non-Safety or Signalling Output)
Description
The Model SRB 201 ZH is designed expressly for use
with two-hand control units. It is equipped for connection
to two actuators … each with 1Normally-Open (N.O.) and
1 Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Both actuators
(inputs) must be operated simultaneously (that is, within
500ms as required by EN574 type III/C requirements for
machine operation to be enabled. Should the input actuators not be simultaneously operated within this specific
500ms period, both must be released before a start cycle
can be initiated.
Typical Input Devices Monitored
Two-hand control
Type of Reset
Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category Rating
Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Electronic fuse
• Cross-short recognition
• Automatic reset
AVAILABLE MODELS
Model Number
Operating Input Voltage
SRB 201ZH
24 VDC
Front View
330
SERIES SRB 201 ZH
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%,
residual ripple max. 10%
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Power Consumption
1.2 W (max.)
Fuse (Input Power)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
10 switching cycles
Internal electronic fuse*
F1, F2 : tripping current >.02 A
F3 : tripping current >.06 A (Hybrid)
Weight
200 gm
Mounting
DIN rail
7
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
suppressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 2 A
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
≤ 50 ms
≤ 30 ms
Contact Type & Materials AgSnO self cleaning, positively driven
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in self-lifting screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage
(24VDC)
A1
A2
Monitored Input #2
(N.C. Contact)
A2.1
S21
Auxiliary Output
(N.C.)
31
Monitored Input #1
(N.O. Contact)
A2.1
S12
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Monitored Input #1
(N.C. Contact)
A1.1
S11
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
24
Monitored Input #2
(N.O. Contact)
A1.1
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic Reset
X1
X2
7
32
331
SERIES SRB 206 &
SRB 206 SQ
General Purpose Safety Controllers
(for dry contact input monitoring)
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
SRB 206 ST (SQ)
SRB 206 ST (SQ) - 230 V
24 VAC / DC
48 - 230 V AC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
6 (Single or Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.C. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
2 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
6 - short circuit proof, PNP-type
semiconductor Y1 - Y6 max 20mA
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
Description
LED Displays
The Model SRB 206 ST/SQ family are “general purpose”
units designed for use with safety devices having
Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Each is equipped for
connection with up to six input devices such as E-stop
push button and safety interlock switches. In addition it
features user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic
reset, six (non-safety) semiconductor outputs for signalling/annunciation, and two safety outputs. SRB 206 SQ
and SRB 206 SQ-230 also feature cross-short recognition.
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
3
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
(SRB 206 SQ models only)
• Up to 6 monitored devices
• Six auxiliary outputs
• Selectable monitored-manual or
automatic reset
Front View
AVAILABLE MODELS
Model Number
Operating Input Voltage
SRB 206 ST
24V AC/DC
SRB 206 ST - 230V
48 - 230 VAC
SRB 206 SQ*
24V AC/DC
SRB 206 SQ-230*
48 - 230 VAC
*Feature cross-short recognition.
332
SERIES SRB 206 & SRB 206 SQ
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
45mm x 100mm x 121mm
(1.77" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
48 VAC-240VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Power Consumption
3.6 W (max.), 3.6 VA
Weight
300 gm
Fuse (Input Power)
Mounting
DIN rail
24 V
Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after
interruption of supply voltage)
230 V
Primary : Fuse (glass), tripping
current > 1.0 A
Secondary : Internal electronic fuse,
tripping current > 0.12 A
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (shown with 1 input)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 20 mA
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
≤ 200 ms
≤ 40 ms
Contact Type & Materials AgCdO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 206 ST shown)
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Monitored Input #2B
S72
S82
Monitored Input #4B
S92
S102
Monitored Input #6B
S112
S122
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic Reset
X1
X3
Monitored Input #1A
S11
Monitored Input #1B
S12
S71
Monitored Input #3A
S31
Monitored Input #3B
S32
S82
Monitored Input #5A
S51
S92
Monitored Input #5B
S52
S102
Safety Output #1 (N.O.)
13
S72
S112
Safety Output #2 (N.O.)
14
23
24
Monitored Input #2A
S11
S22
Monitored Input #4A
S31
S42
Monitored Input #6A
S51
S62
Feedback Monitoring with
Monitored-manual Reset
X1
X2
7
PNP-Semiconductor Outputs #1 through #6
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
333
SERIES SRB 211 AN
General Purpose Safety Controller
(for dry 1 NO/1 NC contact input monitoring)
TECHNICAL FEATURES
w!
e
N
Input Voltage
24 V AC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.O./N.C (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
3 N.O. (1 delayed : 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
PNP
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C./N.O.)
• Interlock switches (N.C./N.O.)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0 (2 safety outputs)
1 (1 safety output)
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
• Stop category 0 & 1
safety outputs
• Selectable trailing edge or
automatic reset
• Resetable electronic fuse
• Feedback monitoring
Description
The Model SRB 211 AN is a “general purpose” unit
designed for use with safety devices having Normally-Open
and Normally-Closed dry contact switching outputs. It is
equipped for connection of one monitored input device in
dual-channel configuration. In addition it features userselectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring
of positive-guided controlled loads.
Front View
AVAILABLE MODELS
334
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 211 AN
24 V AC/DC
SERIES SRB 211 AN
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>10 switching cycles
Weight
255 gm
Mounting
DIN rail
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
5.2 W, 7.2 VA (max.), plus signaling
output Y1
Fuse (Input Power)
Internal electronic Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 1.5 A
(Resets approx. 1 second)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC 100mA
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
7
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type &
Materials
≤ 40 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnOAgNi, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
24
Auxiliary Output
(PNP-Semiconductor)
Monitored Input #1
(N.O.)
S13
S14
Safety Output #3
(Stop Category 1, N.O.)
37
38
Monitored Input #2
(N.C.)
S21
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic Reset
X1
X3
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Feedback Monitoring with ManuallyMonitored (Trailing Edge) Reset
X1
X2
7
Y1
335
SERIES SRB 211 ST
General Purpose Safety Controller
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Description
The Model SRB 211 ST is a “general purpose” unit
designed for use with safety devices having NormallyClosed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs. It
is equipped for connection of one monitored input device in
single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features
user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic reset, stop
category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback monitoring of
positive-guided controlled loads.
Front View
Input Voltage
24 V AC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Single or Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
3 N.O. (1 delayed: 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Output)
PNP
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• K3/4 (safety relay 3 & 4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0 (2 safety outputs)
1 (1 safety output)
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
• Stop category 0 & 1
safety outputs
• Selectable monitored-manual or
automatic reset
• Hybrid fuse
• Feedback monitoring
AVAILABLE MODELS
336
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 211 ST
24V AC/DC
SERIES SRB 211 ST
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>10 switching cycles
Weight
255 gm
Mounting
DIN rail
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
5.1 W, 5.7 VA (max.), plus signaling
output Y1
Fuse (Input Power)
Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 1 A (Resets after
interruption of supply voltage)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
4 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 4 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC 100mA
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
7
Typical Wiring Diagram
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type &
Materials
≤ 40 ms
≤ 40 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
Terminal Connections
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
24
Monitored Input #1
(N.C. or PNP)
S11
S12
Safety Output #3
(Stop Category 1, N.O.)
37
38
Monitored Input #2
(N.C. or PNP)
S21
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic Reset
X1
X3
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Feedback Monitoring with
Monitored-manual Reset
X1
X2
Auxiliary Output
(PNP-Semiconductor)
Y1
7
337
SERIES SRB 301 LC &
SRB 301 LCI
General Purpose Safety Controller
(for dry contact and PNP-type input monitoring)
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
24 V AC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Single or Dual-Channel)
Monitored Contact
Configuration
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Output)
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor outputs
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Manual (24 V Leading Edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Cross-short recognition
(Field-wired option)
• Screw terminals (LC)
• Detachable terminals (LCI)
• Feedback monitoring
• Electronic fuse (LCI)
• Glass fuse (LC)
Description
The Model SRB 301 LC is a lower cost “general-purpose”
unit designed for use with safety devices having NormallyClosed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. It is equipped
for connection of one input device in single- or dual-channel
configuration. In addition it features feedback monitoring of
positive-guided controlled loads, automatic or manual reset
and optional cross-short recognition.
Front View
AVAILABLE MODELS
338
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 301 LC
24V AC/DC
SRB 301 LCI
24V AC/DC
SERIES SRB 301 LC & SRB 301 LCI
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Operating Voltage
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
Power Consumption
1.7 W (max.), 1.9 VA
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Fuse (Input Power)
Weight
230 gm (0.5 lbs.)
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
• Internal glass fuse F1: T 1.25 A
(SRB 301 LC)
• Internal electronic fuse*
(SRB 301 LCI)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable
supressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 2 A
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type &
Materials
≤ 30 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, screw terminals for
13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
24
Monitored Input #1
(N.C.)
S11
S12
Safety Output #3
(N.O.)
33
34
Monitored Input #2
(N.C.)
S21
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic or
Manual (Leading Edge) Reset
X1
X2
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Auxiliary Output
(N.C.)
41
42
7
339
SERIES SRB 301 ST
SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V
SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V
General Purpose
Safety Controllers
(for dry contact and
PNP-type input monitoring)
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
SRB 301 ST
SRB 301 ST - 230 V
SRB 301 SQ - 230 V
Model SRB 301 ST shown.
Description
The above “general-purpose” safety controllers are
designed for use with safety devices having NormallyClosed (N.C.) or PNP-type switching outputs. Each is
equipped for connection of one input device in singleor dual-channel configuration. In addition they feature
plug-in screw terminals, user-selectable monitoredmanual or automatic reset, feedback monitoring of
positive-guided controlled loads and cross-short
recognition (on selected models).
Front View
24 VAC / DC
48 - 230 V AC
48 - 230 V AC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Single or Dual-Channel)
Monitored Contact
Configuration
N.C. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
3 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Output)
1 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP semiconductor
outputs (SRB 301 ST only)
Type of Reset
(Selectable)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals,
SRB 301 ST only)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Type Fuse
Hybrid
Selected Features
• Cross-short recognition (SRB
301ST 24 VAC / DC &
SRB 301 SQ only)
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Selectable monitored-manual or
automatic reset
• Feedback monitoring
AVAILABLE MODELS
Model SRB 301 ST shown.
340
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 301 ST*
24V AC/DC
SRB 301 ST - 230 V
48-230VAC
SRB 301 SQ - 230 V*
48-230VAC
*Feature cross-short recognition.
SERIES SRB 301 ST
SERIES SRB 301 ST - 230V
SERIES SRB 301 SQ - 230V
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Weight
SRB 301 ST
SRB 301 ST - 230V
240 gm (0.5 lbs.)
250 gm
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
Operating Voltage
SRB 301 ST
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 48 VAC - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
SRB 301 ST
2.4 W (max.), 3.8 VA
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V 2.8 VA
Fuse (Input Power)
24 V
230 V
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Internal electronic (hybrid) Fuse F1,
Tripping current > 0.6 A (Resets after
interruption of supply voltage)
F1 : glass bulb, tripping current 0.5 A
Secondary : electronic fuse, tripping
current 0.12 A
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable surge supressor)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 2 A
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13, EN 60 947-5-1
Pick-up Delay
SRB 301 ST
≤ 200 ms
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms
Drop-out Delay
SRB 301 ST
≤ 20 ms
SRB 301 ST (SQ) - 230V ≤ 30 ms
Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, plug-in screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS (Model SRB 301 ST shown)
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #2 (N.O.)
23
24
Monitored Input #1 (N.C.)
S11
S12
Safety Output #3 (N.O.)
33
34
Monitored Input #2 (N.C.)
S21
S22
Feedback Monitoring
with Automatic Reset
X3
S12
Safety Output #1 (N.O.)
13
14
Feedback Monitoring with
Monitored-manual Reset
X2
S12
7
Auxiliary Output (N.C.)
41
42
341
SERIES SRB 324 ST
General Purpose Safety Controller
(for dry contact & PNP-type input monitoring
TECHNICAL FEATURES
w!
e
N
Input Voltage
24V AC/DC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
1 (Single or Dual-Channel)
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
N.C. (Dry Contacts) or
PNP-switching
Number & Type
Safety Outputs
5 N.O. (2 delayed: 1-30 sec.)
(dry contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
1 N.C. (dry contact)
3 - PNP
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
• Devices with PNP outputs
Type of Reset (Selectable)
• Monitored-manual (trailing edge)
• Automatic
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1-K4 (safety relays 1-4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0 (3 safety outputs)
1 (2 safety outputs)
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
•
•
•
•
Description
The Model SRB 324 ST is a “general purpose” unit
designed for use with safety devices having NormallyClosed (N.C.) dry contacts or PNP-type switching outputs.
It is equipped for connection of one monitored input device
in single- or dual-channel configuration. In addition it features user-selectable monitored-manual or automatic
reset, stop category 0 & 1 safety outputs, and feedback
monitoring of positive-guided controlled loads.
Front View
Plug-in screw terminals
Cross-short recognition
Stop category 0 & 1
Selectable monitored-manual or
automatic reset
• Hybrid fuse
• Feed back monitoring
AVAILABLE MODELS
342
Model Number
Operating Voltage
SRB 324 ST
24 V AC/DC
SERIES SRB 324 ST
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
45mm x 100mm x 121mm
(1.8" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Weight
480 gm
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
4.8 W, 7.8 VA max.
(Plus signalling contacts Y1-Y3)
Fuse (Input Power)
• Internal electronic Fuse F1,
tripping current > 2.5 A
(reset approx. 1 second)
• Internal hybrid fuse F2,
tripping current > 1.0 A
(reset after interruption of
supply voltage)
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs Stop 0)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable supressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
Y1-Y3: 24 VDC, 100mA (PNP)
61/62: 24 VDC, 2 A max. (Dry)
Application Category
AC-15 / DC-13 : EN 60 947-5-1
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Pick-up Delay
≤ 30 ms
Drop-out Delay
≤ 30 ms (13/14, 23/24, 33/34)
Contact Type & Material
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage
A1
Monitored Input #1
A2
S11
Safety Output #2 (NO)
23
X1
X2
S12
S21
33
34
Monitored-Manual Reset
X3
X4
Safety Output #1 (NO)
S22
13
Safety Output #4
Stop Category 1 (NO)
Safety Output #3 (NO)
24
Feedback Monitoring
Monitored Input #2
47
Automatic Reset
X4
X5
Safety Output #5
Stop Category 1 (NO)
48
57
Jumper
S31
14
S32
58
Auxiliary PNP Output
Y1
Y2
Y3
7
343
SERIES SRB 202 C &
SRB 400 C
Differentiated-Input Controllers
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
24 VDC
# Discrete Input Devices
Monitored
2
Compatible Input Device
Contact Configuration
Input #1: 2 N.C. (Dry contacts)
Input #2: 2 N.C. or 1 N.O./1 N.C.
Number & Type Safety
Outputs
2 N.O. (SRB202 models)
4 N.O. (SRB400 models)
Number & Type Auxiliary
(Non-Safety or
Signalling Outputs)
SRB202: 2 N.C.
SRB400: None
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops (N.C.)
• Interlock switches (N.C.)
Type of Reset
(Depends on model)
• Monitored-manual
(24 VDC trailing edge)
• Automatic or Manual
Feedback Monitoring
Yes
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1 (safety relay 1)
• K2 (safety relay 2)
• K3 (safety relay 3)
• K4 (safety relay 4)
• Ui (voltage beyond internal fuse)
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
4
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Cross-short recognition
(“Q” models only)
• Electronic fuse
• Feedback monitoring
Description
The Series SRB202C and SRB400C are (general purpose)
units designed for use with safety devices having two
Normally-Closed (N.C.) and/or one Normally-Open (N.O.)
and one Normally-Closed (N.C.) dry contacts. Uniquely,
they provide for differentiated switching of the safety outputs depending on the input that is actuated.
For example, actuating an E-Stop as Input #1 would disable all of the unit’s safety outputs. Conversely, actuation
of Input #2 (e.g., a safety guard interlock switch) would
only disable half of the available safety outputs (safety
output #2 on SRB202C units and safety outputs #3 & #4
on SRB400C units).
Thus this functionality, which would normally require
two discrete safety controllers, can be achieved
with a single unit (controller).
Selection Chart
Front View
Outputs
Model #
344
Input #1
Safety Aux Contacts
SRB202CA
2
2
2 N.C.
SRB202CS
2
2
2 N.C.
Reset
Auto
or
Manual
Input #2
Crossshort
Contacts
No
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
No
2 N.C.
SRB202CA/Q
2
2
2 N.C.
Yes
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
SRB202CA/T
2
2
2 N.C.
No
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
SRB202CS/T
2
2
No
2 N.C.
SRB202CA/QT
2
2
2 N.C. Monitoredmanual
2 N.C.
Yes
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
SRB400CA
4
0
2 N.C.
No
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
SRB400CS
4
0
2 N.C.
No
2 N.C.
SRB400CA/Q
4
0
2 N.C.
Yes
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
SRB400CA/T
4
0
2 N.C.
SRB400CS/T
4
0
2 N.C.
SRB400CA/QT
4
0
2 N.C.
Auto
or
Manual
Monitoredmanual
*Suitable for use with BNS coded-magnet switches.
No
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
No
2 N.C.
Yes
1 N.O./1 N.C.*
Reset
Auto
or
Manual
Auto
or
Manual
Auto
or
Manual
Auto
or
Manual
SERIES SRB 202 C & SRB 400 C
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 100mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.9" x 4.75")
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Power Consumption
4.4 W
Fuse (Input Power)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Internal electronic fuse* F1,
Tripping current > 1 A
Weight
235 gm
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable suppressor circuit)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC 100mA
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13 : EN 60 947-5-1
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
Contact Type &
Materials
≤ 40 ms
≤ 50 ms
AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Plug-in, self-lifting, screw terminals
for 13 to 20 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
*Resets automatically after a short time-delay.
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Input Power
A1
A2
Monitored Input #2B (N.C.)
S41
S42
Monitored Input #1A (N.C.)
A1
S12
Monitored Input #2B (N.O.)*
S43
S44
Output #1
Output #2
13
13
14
Auxiliary Output #1
(SRB202 only)
31
32
24
Auxiliary Output #2
(SRB202 only)
31
*For models having 1 N.O./1 N.C. contacts on Input #2.
Monitored Input #1B (N.C.)
A1
S22
Feedback and Reset
Input #1
A1
X1
Output #3 (SRB400 only)
33
34
Monitored Input #2A (N.C.)
S31
S32
Feedback and Reset
Input #2
A1
X2
Output #4 (SRB400 only)
33
44
7
42
345
SERIES SRB 402 EM
Safety Output Expansion Module
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Input Voltage
24 V AC/DC
Number & Type Safety Outputs
4 N.O. (Dry Contacts)
Number & Type Auxiliary
2 N.C. (Dry Contacts)
(Non-Safety or Signalling Outputs)
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• K1/K2 (safety relay 1 & 2)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category Rating
Per EN 954-1
Function of Master Safety
Controller (mounted in same
control cabinet)
Selected Features
• Plug-in screw terminals
• Compatible with all SRB
PROTECTSM Series models
AVAILABLE MODELS
Description
Model Number
Operating Voltage
The Model SRB 402 EM is designed for use as an
accessory for SCHMERSAL’s PROTECTSM Series safety
controllers. It provides additional safety (enabling) outputs
where required to satisfy the system control requirements.
SRB 402 EM
24 V AC/DC
Front View
346
SERIES SRB 402 EM
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
24 VAC -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz
-25°C to +45°C
(-13°F to +113°F)
Power Consumption
1.0 VA (max.)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Fuse (Input Power)
Glass fuse F1 : 1.0 A / 250 V
(Slow-blow)
Weight
215 gm (0.47 lbs.)
Mounting
DIN rail (35mm)
Dimensions (W x H x D)
22.5mm x 90mm x 121mm
(0.9" x 3.54" x 4.75")
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
Fuse (Safety Outputs)
6 A Slow-blow (Recommended)
Switching Capacity
(Safety Outputs)
230 VAC, 6 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable supressor)
Switching Capacity
(Auxiliary Contacts)
24 VDC, 2 A
Application Category
AC 15 / DC 13, DIN VDE 660 Teil 200
Pick-up Delay
Drop-out Delay
≤ 30 ms
≤ 35 ms
Contact Type & Materials AgSnO, self cleaning, positive-guided
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Self-lifting, screw terminals for
13 to 24 AWG
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Safety Output #4
(N.O.)
43
44
Safety Output #1
(N.O.)
13
14
Feedback Monitoring to
Main Module
X1
X2
Safety Output #2
(N.O.)
23
24
Auxiliary Output #1
(N.C.)
51
52
Safety Output #3
(N.O.)
33
34
Auxiliary Output #2
(N.C.)
61
62
7
347
SERIES PROTECT-IE-02 &
PROTECT-IE-11
Input Expansion Module
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Description
The Protect-IE is designed for use as an accessory for
Schmersal’s Protect Series Safety Controllers. It provides 4
additional sensor inputs where required to satisfy the system
control requirements. Depending on the version, the ProtectIE monitors 1 NO/1NC or 2 NC contacts. It is possible to
cascade multiple units to monitor up to 80 sensors.
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Number & Type of
Outputs
2 N.O. (dry contacts) to master
safety controller
Number & Type Auxiliary
(non-safety or signalling
outputs)
4 – 24 VDC (Y1-Y4)
Reset & Feedback
Monitoring
Performed by master controller
Typical Input Devices
Monitored
• E-stops
• Interlocks
• Coded-magnets
LED Displays
Green LEDs for:
• UB (voltage at input terminals)
• Y1-Y4 (signalling output)
Conformity to Standards
UL, CSA, BG (CE-compliant)
(In preparation)
Stop Category
0
Safety Control Category
Rating Per EN 954-1
A function of the master safety
controller (mounted in same
control cabinet), with a maximum
of Control Category 3
Selected Features
• Cage-clamp terminals
• Cross-short recognition
• Electronic fuse
• Compatible with all SRB
Protect Series models with
2 N.C. inputs
AVAILABLE MODELS
Front View
Monitoring Configuration
of Sensors
Operating
Voltage
Protect-IE-02
2 NC
24 VDC
Protect-IE-11
1 NO/1 NC
24 VDC
Model Number
348
SERIES PROTECT-IE-02 & PROTECT-IE-11
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (W x H x D)
48mm x 126mm x 61mm
(1.89" x 4.96" x 2.4")
Operating Voltage
24 VDC -15% / +20%, residual ripple
max. 10%
Ambient Operating
Temperature Range
-25°C to +55°C
(-13°F to +131°F)
Power Consumption
1.7 W max.; plus Y1-Y4
Fuse (input power)
Mechanical Life Expectancy
>107 switching cycles
Internal electronic fuse,
tripping current > 100 mA
Weight
140 gm
Fuse (outputs)
2 A slow-blow
Mounting
DIN rail
Switching Capacity
(outputs)
24V, 2 A Resistive
(inductive with suitable suppressor)
Switching Capacity
(auxiliary contacts)
24 VDC, 100 mA (Y1-Y4)
Typical Wiring Diagram (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)
Pick-up Delay
≤ 20 ms
Drop-out Delay
≤ 20 ms
Contact Resistance
100 mOhm (max. in new state)
Air Clearance &
Creepage Distance
DIN VDE 0110-1 (04.97), 4 kV/2
Cable Connections
• Cage-clamp terminals for
min. 0.08mm2 & max. 2.5mm2
• Stranded or multi-core with
wire end ferrule
Terminal Labeling
DIN EN 50 005 / DIN 50 013
Terminal Connections (Model Protect-IE-02 shown)
Supply Voltage
A1
A2
Monitored Input
#1A (N.C.)
+
S1
Monitored Input
#3A (N.C.)
+
S5
Output #1
(N.O.)
Output #2
(N.O.)
13
23
14
Monitored Input
#1B (N.C.)
–
S2
Monitored Input
#3B (N.C.)
–
S6
24
Monitored Input
#2A (N.C.)
+
S3
Monitored Input
#4A (N.C.)
+
S7
Signalling Outputs
(24 VDC)
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Monitored Input
#2B (N.C.)
–
S4
Monitored Input
#4B (N.C.)
–
S8
7
349
Safer
by
Design
350
APPENDICES
Topic
Page
• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Man-Machine
Safeguarding Requirements & Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
• Frequently Asked Questions Regarding Safety Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . 380
• Selected Machine Safeguarding Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
• Machine Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
• Selected Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
• NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC Ingress Protection Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
351
352
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Topic
I.
Man-Machine Safeguarding Principles and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
II. Control Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
III. Risk Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
IV. Safety Standards, CE Marking and the European Machinery Directive . . 340
V. Safety Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VI. Applications and Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Positive-Break Contacts
Positive-Mode Mounting
Positive-Guided Contacts
Risk Assessment
353
I. Man-Machine Safeguarding
Principles & Practices
1
Why should machine guard interlocks be
“tamper resistant”?
Safety professionals recognize that, in many factories,
workers often override or bypass safeguards intended to
protect them from injury. Reported motivation includes
real or perceived inconvenience, production incentives,
familiarity with the equipment, or simply the challenge
presented by the presence of the safeguard to be defeated.
Consequently, manufacturers are increasingly recognizing the need for, and their obligation to provide, safety
interlocks which are not easily defeated/bypassed by the
operator or maintenance personnel.
Additionally, safety standards-making groups encourage
use of interlocks which are not easily defeated using simple, readily-available means (such as a paper clip, tape,
rubber band, piece of rope, screwdriver, etc.).
For example, the American National Standards
Institute’s (ANSI) B11.19 2003, Reference Standard for
Safeguarding Machine Tools specifically requires:
2
With the growing number of product liability cases, companies are recognizing the benefits of designing safety
circuits with interlock devices that are difficult to defeat.
To further reduce their liability exposure, firms are selecting only those devices that have been tested and certified for use in safety applications by a recognized, independent third-party agency.
Manufacturers are encouraged to surpass safety design
expectations. As cited at a recent DESIGN NEWS seminar entitled “Product Liability — A Survival Kit for the
90’s”, jurors expect companies to go beyond mere compliance. They give greater benefit to firms who have
designed their products with the latest state-of-the-art
machine guarding safety devices.
What is meant by the term “difficult to defeat”
when related to safety interlock switches in
safety standards such as ANSI B11.19, ANSI
B11.20, ANSI-RIA 15.02, OSHA 1910.212, et al?
“Difficult to defeat” is a subjective term related to workers’ propensity to override or bypass safety devices
intended to protect them from injury. Colloquially it
means that the relevant devices or systems cannot be
defeated or bypassed using readily available means
354
. Barrier guards that protect against unauthorized
adjustment or circumvention.
. Interlock devices that are not easily bypassed.
. Reduced liability
(such as a piece of wire, tape, simple hand tool, etc.). It
implies the basic safety interlock switch design serves as
a deterrent to easily overriding or bypassing its intended
function.
3
How is this requirement (“difficult to defeat”)
being addressed by safety interlock switch
manufacturers?
Safety interlock switch manufacturers are addressing
this requirement by:
. Designing two-piece keyed interlocks which feature a
geometrically-unique actuating key and associated
operating mechanism which function together to
deter “bypassing”.
4
. Designing “coded-magnet” sensors whose multiple
reed contacts can only be actuated in the presence
of a matched magnetic field array.
. Encouraging “positive-mode” mounting of singlepiece interlock switches.
What are “positive-break” safety interlocks?
“Positive-break” safety interlocks are electromechanical
switches designed with normally-closed (NC) electrical
contacts which, upon switch actuation, are forced to
open by a non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism.
(Spring actuators are not considered positive-break
mechanisms.)
One example of a “positive-break” safety interlock is
shown in the photo below. This third-party certified and
widely used safety switch features a two-piece construction: an electromechanical switching mechanism and a
geometrically-unique actuator key.
A simple illustration of this design concept is shown in
Figure 2.
The actuator key is typically mounted to a movable guard
– such as an access door, protective grating, equipment
hood, or plexiglass safety cover. When the guard is
closed, the actuator mates with the electromechanical
switching mechanism. Upon opening of the movable
guard, the actuator key mechanically rotates a cam
mechanism – forcing the NC electrical contacts to open
the safety circuit.
For machine applications with residual motion after shutdown, key actuated interlocks are available with a solenoid latch – which, in conjunction with a time-delay,
motion detector, position sensor or other machinery status monitor, can delay access to hazardous areas until
safe conditions exist.
Actuator key
typically mounted to
movable guard
Four optional
actuator key
entry locations
(one on back
of unit)
“Positive-break” switch
mechanism, typically
mounted to guard
frame
FIGURE 1
355
FIGURE 2
Conventional versus Positive-Break Contacts
356
5
Are conventional electromechanical limit
switches designed with “positive-break”
contacts?
Conventional “limit” switches are typically designed to
use a spring force to open normally-closed electrical
contacts. Such designs are subject to two potential failure modes:
. Spring failure
. Inability of the spring force to overcome “stuck” or
SCHMERSAL offers several “limit” switches designed
with “positive-break” contacts in both snap-acting and
slow-action models for use in safety applications.
“welded” contacts.
6
When “actuated,” either situation may result in an unsafe
condition due to failure to open normally-closed contacts. Consequently, such designs are not certified or
recognized as suitable for safety applications.
How can I recognize “positive-break” safety
interlock switches?
Devices which feature a “positive-break” design carry the
following internationally-recognized (IEC) safety symbol:
These designs meet the international requirements
established for such safety interlock switches.
Typically, the positive-break symbol
can be found on products as part of
product specification identification,
as shown below.
FIGURE 3
357
7
What is meant by a “positive linkage” switch
actuator, and why is it recommended for safety
applications?
A “positive linkage” switch actuator is designed to eliminate possible slippage between the actuator and its
Pinned
mounting shaft. Examples of such designs are pinned,
square and serrated shafts (see Figure 4, below).
Square
Actuator
Serrated
Positive Linkage
FIGURE 4
8
What is “positive-mode” mounting and why is it
essential in safety applications?
“Positive-mode” mounting assures that an electromechanical safety interlock switch is positively-actuated
when equipment or machinery shut-down is desired.
Safe “Positive-Mode” Mounting (Figure 5)
When mounted in the positive-mode, the non-resilient
mechanical mechanism which forces the normally
closed (N.C.) contacts to open is directly driven by the
safety guard. In this mounting mode, opening the safety
guard physically forces the N.C. contacts to open when
the guard is open.
FIGURE 5
POSITIVE-MODE INSTALLATION
358
Unsafe “Negative-Mode” Mounting (Figure 6)
When mounted in the “negative-mode,” the force applied
to open the normally-closed (N.C.) safety circuit contacts
is provided by an internal spring. In this mounting mode
the N.C. contacts may not open when the safety guard is
“Open.” (Here welded/stuck contacts, or failure of the
contact-opening spring, may result in exposing the
machine operator to a hazardous/unsafe area of the
machinery.)
Positive-mode installation is especially important when
using single-piece safety interlock switches. This installation mode takes full advantage of the device’s “positivebreak” design — using the external force applied by the
safety guard to open the N.C. contacts.
FIGURE 6
NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATION
9
What are the risks of installing single-piece,
safety interlock switches in the “negative
mode”?
When mounted in the “negative-mode” (see Figure 6
above), single-piece safety interlock switches can be
easily defeated/circumvented by the operator … often
simply by taping down the switch actuator when the safety guard is open.
In addition, spring-driven, normally-closed contacts can
fail to open due to sticking, contact welding, or a spring
failure.
Under such circumstances the operator or maintenance
personnel may be exposed to an unsafe or hazardous
condition.
Consequently, where possible, two-piece, key-actuated,
tamper-resistant safety interlocks are recommended.
These devices are designed to be difficult to defeat,
while providing the assurance of safety circuit interruption inherent with “positive-break” interlock switch
designs.
359
10
What are “self-checking,” “redundancy,”
and “single-fault tolerance”?
Self-Checking: The performing of periodic self-diagnostics on a safety control circuit to ensure critical individual
components are functioning properly. Faults or failures in
selected components will result in system shut-down.
Redundancy: In safety applications, redundancy is the
duplication of control circuits/components such that if one
component/circuit should fail, the other (redundant) component/circuit will still be able to generate a stop signal.
When coupled with a “self-checking” feature, a safety circuit component failure, or component failure within the
safety circuit monitoring module or safety relay module,
11
Single-Fault Tolerance: A safety circuit is considered to
be single-fault tolerant if no foreseeable single fault will
prevent normal stopping action from taking place.
Rugged, “fail-to-safe,” safety circuit controllers (often called
safety relay modules) are also available that incorporate
the above features to satisfy the “control reliability” requirements of existing domestic and international safety standards.
Are cable-pull switches acceptable for use in
E-Stop circuits?
OSHA and the European safety standards permit use of
cable-pull switches in E-Stop circuits provided they:
(1) Operate whether the cable is pulled or goes slack (e.g.
breaks or is cut).
(2) Feature positive-break NC contacts.
(3) Must be manually reset before the controlled equipment can be restarted.
12
will be automatically detected and the machine shut down
until the failure is corrected.
In addition, European Norm EN418 requires that the
switch latch at the same time that the contacts change
state.
SCHMERSAL offers a variety of cable-pull switches that
meet both EN418 and the OSHA guidelines. These are
complemented by several safety circuit controllers and
safety relay modules designed expressly for use in E-Stop
circuits.
Are reed switches recommended or acceptable
in safety circuits and, if so, under what
conditions?’
Reed switches may be used as interlocks in safety circuits provided:
One such combination is shown in Figure 8, below.
. they are designed to be actuated by a specific
Coded-magnets are required to actuate the sensor, thus
making it difficult for the operator or maintenance personnel to “defeat” or “bypass.”
(coded) magnetic-field array matched to the switch’s
reed-array pattern.
. they are used in combination with a safety controller
capable of periodically checking the integrity and performance of the reed switch contacts.
360
The safety controller features multiple safety relays with
positive-guided contacts, redundant control circuits, and
self-diagnostics that check safety system operation.
Additionally, reed switches tend to fail in the
“closed” position. This failure mode cannot be
addressed by using a fuse. To ensure reliability of
a safety circuit using reed-type switches, use of a
safety controller is required. Depending upon the
application, it is also recommended that they feature two independent contacts to permit dualchannel monitoring.
In the event of a component or interconnection wiring
failure in the safety circuit, or in the safety circuit controller, the unit will shut down the system in a “safe” state.
Note: Reed switches used without an approved safety
circuit controller do not satisfy safety requirements. Reed switches are susceptible to sticking
due to power surges, shock, or vibration.
FIGURE 8
13
What is meant by “controlled access”?
“Controlled access” generally refers to a movable
machine guard that is designed such that it can only be
opened under specific conditions. Typically such movable
guards restrict access to an area of a machine which
continues to present a hazard to the operator immediately upon the removal of power. In these situations
opening of the guard is prevented until the hazardous
condition has abated.
14
This is usually achieved by a solenoid-latching interlock
switch controlled by a motion detector, position sensor,
time-delay or other machine-status monitor which releases the interlock (allowing the operator to open the guard)
only after safe conditions exist.
What is “diverse redundancy,” and how does it
heighten the reliability of a safety circuit?
“Diverse redundancy” is the use of different types of
components and software in the construction of redundant circuits/systems performing the same function. Its
use is intended to minimize or eliminate failure of redun-
dant circuits and components due to the same cause
(“common-cause” failure). Such designs serve to
increase the functional reliability of the safety circuits and
systems.
361
15
Why are safety interlock switches and safety
controllers required?
For machinery builders who export to the European
Union, the use of such components designed expressly
for machine guarding safety systems is mandated by the
requirements of the European Machinery Directive and
the need to comply with relevant safety standards. These
requirements include:
. Use of interlock switches that feature positive-break
normally closed contacts.
. Use of interlock switches or machine guarding position sensors, which are tamper-resistant/difficult to
defeat.
. (Where risk level dictates) the need to monitor the
For machinery builders selling in the U.S., the use of
such components is encouraged by the safety guidelines
and standards of the Federal government and several
industry standards-making groups including:
. OSHA (Occupational Health & Safety Administration)
. ANSI (American National Standards Institute)
. UL (Underwriters Laboratories)
. ISA (Instrument Society of America)
. SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers).
integrity of the safety circuit components and its
interconnection wiring to ensure the system will
function properly when called upon to do so.
16
As an OEM, what are the benefits of using
positive-break and tamper-resistant interlocks
in safety applications?
Proper selection and installation of safety interlocks which
have been tested and certified by an approved, independent safety testing body benefits the equipment manufacturer by:
. Providing greater protection from injury for machine
operators, maintenance personnel, set-up and other
user personnel.
. Satisfying international safety regulations … a must for
U.S. equipment manufacturers who wish to export to
the European Economic Community.
362
. Enhancing product marketability.
. Satisfying safety standards and guidelines against
which manufacturer’s responsibility, in the event of an
injury, is judged.
. Reducing liability risks.
. Minimizing insurance claims/costs.
17
As an “in-plant” user, what are the benefits of
using positive-break, and/or tamper-resistant
interlocks in safety applications?
Proper selection and installation of such safety interlocks
which have been tested and certified by an approved,
independent testing body benefit the in-plant user by:
. Providing greater protection from injury for machine
operators, maintenance personnel, and other
employees.
. Reducing liability risks.
18
. Minimizing insurance claims/costs.
. Satisfying safety standards and guidelines against
which employer responsibility, in the event of an
injury, is measured.
. Reducing the indirect costs associated with worker
injury (e.g. lost production, loss of skilled workers,
reduced productivity due to employee stress, etc.)
What are the benefits of using SCHMERSAL
safety interlock switches and related controls?
While SCHMERSAL is not the only manufacturer of such
devices, there are a number of factors which favor your
consideration. These include:
(5) SCHMERSAL’s safety interlocks and related controllers have been proven in thousands of installations worldwide.
(1) All SCHMERSAL safety interlocks have been thirdparty tested and certified to meet relevant directives
— all are CE-compliant.
(6) SCHMERSAL’s microprocessor-based Series AES
safety controllers feature integrated systems diagnostics which, using a visual colored LED display
pattern, help identify the type of system fault that has
occurred and its location (to minimize downtime).
(2) Each can be provided with a Declaration of
Conformity.
(3) Each has been designed expressly for safety applications to meet the requirements of ANSI, OSHA
and the European Machinery Directive.
(4) SCHMERSAL’s individually-coded keyed interlocks
(AZ16zi, AZ17zi, and AZM170zi) provide the highest
level of tamper resistance.
(7) SCHMERSAL’s safety controllers are easily integrated with their more than 200 “positive-break” interlock
switches and coded-magnet sensors to achieve any
desired safety level. And, they are also compatible
with other manufacturers’ safety-approved components.
363
II. Control Reliability
19
What is meant by “control reliability”?
“Control reliability” implies that the safety device or system is designed, constructed and installed such that the
failure of a single component within the device or system
20
How does this definition of “control reliability”
relate to the European machinery safety
requirements?
Safety systems which are “single component failure control reliable” meet the requirements of a Category 3
364
shall not prevent normal machine stopping action from
taking place … but shall prevent a successive machine
cycle from being initiated.
safety-related control system as defined by the harmonized European machinery safety standard EN954-1.
21
What are “positive-guided” or “force-guided”
relays, and why are they preferred over conventional relays when designing safety systems?
Positive-guided relays feature N.O. and N.C. contacts
which operate interdependently. For such relays, the N.O.
and N.C. contacts can never be closed simultaneously. In
the event one of the contacts welds closed, the other contacts cannot change state. For example, should one or
more of the N.O. contacts weld/stick shut when closed, the
N.C. contact(s) will remain open with a minimum gap of
0.5mm.
This unique feature is desirable in machine safety circuits
where “fail- to-safe” and/or “single component failure control reliability” is desired. The positive relationship (interdependent operation) between N.O. and N.C. contacts permit self-checking/monitoring of the performance of these
devices. Such relays provide a higher level of safety system integrity and reliability.
A simple illustration of the interdependent function of positive-guided contacts is shown in Figure 9.
FIGURE 9
POSITIVE-GUIDED VS. CONVENTIONAL CONTACTS
365
22
What are “redundant” logic circuits, and what
are their benefits in safety circuit applications?
“Control reliability” implies that the safety device or system is designed, constructed and installed such that the
failure of a single component within the device or system
shall not prevent normal machine stopping action from
taking place … but shall prevent a successive machine
cycle from being initiated. To achieve this, safety controllers are typically designed with dual logic circuits,
each of which can provide safety circuit checking/monitoring. These functionally-equivalent logic circuits crossmonitor each other, as well as checking the safety circuit
for component failures, short circuits, open circuits, etc.
Since these controllers detect faults in the safety circuit
components and interconnection wiring to effect
machine shutdown, such “redundant” self-monitoring circuits enhance safety system reliability. In so doing they
23
To heighten the integrity and reliability of these units,
SCHMERSAL engineers have had each of the redundant logic circuit microprocessors programmed by a different software specialist … thus reducing the probability of a simultaneous logic-circuit malfunction due to a
programming error.
Use of such safety controllers, in combination with safety interlock switches, tamper-resistant coded-magnet
switches, and emergency cable-pull switches enables
control engineers to achieve the “single component failure control reliability” required by OSHA, ANSI, and international machine guarding safety standards/guidelines.
What characterizes “fail-to-safe” operation?
“Fail-to-safe” safety devices are designed such that a component failure will cause the device to attain rest in a safe
condition. This term is generally applied to electronic safety interlock systems using non-mechanical presence or
position sensors (such as reed switches, proximity switch-
366
provide a higher level of safety for the machine operator
and maintenance personnel.
es, et al) and/or safety controllers. Such controllers are
often designed to feature redundancy, self-diagnostics,
and positive-guided contacts.
24
Why should I upgrade or enhance my current
safety interlock or safety barrier design?
Heightened awareness and concern for worker safety has,
and is, precipitating compelling reasons for such upgrades
or enhancements. These are embodied in a variety of
industrial safety standards and guidelines against which
machinery manufacturers’ and users’ level of responsibility and degree of liability are measured.
Several of these current and emerging standards and
guidelines are listed under references at the end of this
booklet. The following excerpts are provided simply to
illustrate the importance and need to consider providing
new or improved safety systems.
OSHA Guidelines
OSHA 1910.212 “General Requirements for all
machines”: “One or more methods of machine guarding
shall be provided to protect the operator and other
employees from hazards… The guarding device shall be
in conformity with any appropriate Standards thereof…”
OSHA 1910.5 “Applicability of Standards”: “Any Standard
shall apply according to its terms to any employment and
place of employment in any industry even though particu-
25
lar Standards are prescribed for the industry…”
OSHA 1910.6 “Incorporation by Reference”: “The
Standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and
organizations which are not agencies of the U.S.
Government which are incorporated by reference in this
part, have the same force and effect as other Standards in
this part…”
ANSI B11.19-2003 Machine Tool Safeguarding…
7.2.6: “The user shall ensure that barrier guards are
installed, maintained, and operated so as to protect
against unauthorized adjustment or circumvention…”
Annex C: Performance of safety-related function(s)
“Control reliability is not provided by simple
redundancy. There must be monitoring to
assure that redundancy is maintained. Control
reliability uses monitoring and checking to
determine that a discernable component, module, device or system has failed and that the
hazardous motion (or situation) is stopped, or
prevented from starting or restarting. Control
reliability ensures that a failure of the control
system or device will not result in the loss of the
safety-related function(s).”
What is “fault exclusion” and how does it affect
safety circuit design?
In selected situations the occurrence of known possible
component failures (“faults”) can be minimized by the
safety system design or component selection. Simple
examples are:
(3) use of positive-break safety interlock switches together with a safety controller, such that the possibility of a
contact weld resulting in the loss of the safety function
is eliminated.
(1) the use of an overrated contactor to preclude the possibility of contact welding.
The elimination of such faults are a compromise between
the technical safety requirements and the theoretical probability of their occurrence. Design engineers are permitted
to exclude such faults when constructing the machinery’s
safety system. However, each “fault exclusion” must be
identified, justified, and documented in the Technical File
submitted to satisfy the European Machinery Directive.
(2) design of a machine guard such that the interlock
switch actuator cannot be damaged.
367
III. Risk Assessment
26
What is “risk assessment”?
Various machines present different types of hazards and
risks to the operator and/or maintenance personnel. Risk
assessment is a systematic means of quantifying these
27
risk levels in order to determine the scope of the required
safety system needed to protect personnel from possible
injury.
How do I go about assessing the risk level presented by a machine or manufacturing process?
Different machines and processes have different levels of
relative risk. Determining this relative risk level involves
evaluating four major factors. These include:
(1) Severity of the potential injury.
(2) Frequency of exposure to the potential hazard.
(3) Possibility of avoiding the hazard if it occurs.
One approach provides guidelines for risk assessment
based upon five defined levels of risk. These levels range
from the lowest risk (level B) in which the severity of injury
is slight and/or there is relatively little likelihood of occurrence, to the highest risk (level 4) in which the likelihood of
a severe injury (if the safety system fails) is relatively high.
This particular method is depicted in Figure 10, in which
the following qualitative definitions apply:
S: Severity of potential injury
S1: slight injury (bruise)
S2: severe injury (amputation or death)
F: Frequency of exposure to potential hazard
F1: infrequent exposure
F2: frequent to continuous exposure
P: Possibility of avoiding the hazard if it occurs (generally related to the speed/frequency of movement of
hazard point and distance to hazard point)
P1: possible
P2: less possible
For further details of the above, the reader is referred to
the EN 954-1 (Safety of Machinery: Principles for the
Design of Related Control Systems).
368
Selection of the Safety Category:
A brief overview of these safety categories is provided
in Figure 11.
Preferred categories
Possible categories, which require additional
measures
Over-dimensioned measures for the relevant risk
FIGURE 10
Another methodology is outlined in ANSI’s Technical
Report B11.TR3. This guideline suggests a “task-based”
review of potential hazards by both the equipment designer and the ultimate end-user.
28
What are the defined levels of relative risk for
machinery within which the safety system
should be designed?
The European harmonized standard, EN954-1 (Safety of
Machinery — Design of Safety Related Control
Systems), outlines five relative levels of risk associated
with the operation/maintenance of machinery. The
greater the possibility and/or severity of injury, the
º Safety
greater the requirements are on the design and integrity
of the machine safety systems.
In general, these levels of risk are defined as follows:
General Safety
System Requirements
General Safety
System Behavior
Safety
Cat.
General Safety
System Requirements
General Safety
System Behavior
B
Safety system designed to
meet operational requirements
and withstand expected external
influences.
(This category is usually satisfied by selecting components
compatible with the application
conditions … e.g. temperature,
voltage, load, etc.)
A single fault or
failure in the safety system can
lead to the loss of
the safety function.
3
Here a single
fault or failure in
the safety system
will not lead to the
loss of the safety
function and,
where possible,
will be detected.
1
Safety system must meet the
requirements of Category B, but
must use “well-tried” safety principles and components.
“Well-tried” principles and components include those which:
avoid certain faults … e.g.
short circuits.
reduce probability of faults
… e.g. over-rating selected components, over-dimensioning for
structural integrity.
detect faults early … e.g.
ground fault protection.
assure the mode of the fault
… e.g. ensure an open circuit
when it is vital that power be
interrupted should an unsafe condition arise.
limit the consequences of
the fault.
A single fault or
failure in the safety system can
lead to the loss of
the safety function. However, the
use of “well tried”
safety principles
and safety components results in a
higher level of
safety system reliability.
Safety system must meet the
requirements of Category B. In
addition the safety control system
must be designed such that a
single fault will not lead to the
loss of the safety function. And,
where practical, the single fault
will be detected.
(This requires redundancy in
the safety circuit monitoring module and the use of dual-channel
monitoring of the input and output devices such as machine
guard interlock switches, E-stop
pushbuttons, safety relays, etc.)
4*
Here a single
fault or failure in
the safety system
will not lead to the
loss of the safety
function, and it will
be detected in
time to prevent the
loss of the safety
function.
Safety system must meet the
requirements of Category B. In
addition the machine shall be
prevented from starting if a fault
is detected upon application of
machine power, or upon periodic
checking during operation.
(This suggests the use of a
safety relay module with redundancy and self-checking. Singlechannel operation is permitted
provided that the input devices …
such as machine guard interlocks, E-stop pushbuttons, et al
… are tested for proper operation
on a regular basis.)
Here, too, a single fault or failure
in the safety system can lead to
the loss of the
safety function
between the
checking intervals.
However, periodic
checking may
detect faults and
permit timely
maintenance of
the safety system.
Safety system must meet the
requirements of Category B. In
addition the safety control system
must be designed such that a
single fault will not lead to the
loss of the safety function and
will be detected at or before the
next demand on the safety system. If this is not possible, then
the accumulation of multiple
faults must not lead to the loss of
the safety function.
(This also requires redundancy
in the safety circuit and the use of
dual-channel monitoring of the
input and output devices such as
machine guard interlock switches,
E-stop pushbuttons, safety relays,
etc. Here the number of allowable
faults will be determined by the
application, technology used, and
system structure.)
Cat.
.
.
.
.
.
2
*Category 4 safety requirements are usually associated
with extremely high-risk applications. Since general machine
design practice respects classic safety hierarchy, in which
most machine hazards are either:
designed out,
guarded against (if they cannot be designed out), and,
(as a last resort) warned against,
Category 4 requirements may arise relatively infrequently.
.
.
.
FIGURE 11
369
29
Which of these risk category safety system
requirements is consistent with OSHA and
ANSI’s requirement for a “control reliable”
safety circuit?
Within the above defined levels of risk, a Category 3 safety system would satisfy OSHA and ANSI’s requirement for
a “control reliable” safety circuit. Here use of an appropriate fail-to-safe, safety controller in combination with one or
more safety interlock switches and/or coded-magnet sen-
30
How can the safety system requirements, and
the requirement for machine safety system
“control reliability,” be satisfied?
Machine safety system control reliability can be achieved
through use of:
. Safety components which feature fail-to-safe design.
. Electromechanical safety interlocks which feature
positive-break N.C. contacts.
. Use of safety relays which feature positive-guided
contacts.
31
. Use of self-checking safety controllers.
. Use of redundant monitoring/checking circuits and
related safety system components.
The selection of these components will, of course, be a
function of the application and its level of risk assessment. SCHMERSAL has available an applications and
safety circuit wiring handbook to serve as a reference for
selecting, designing and wiring the appropriate safety
circuit for a given level of risk assessment.
Are safety controllers needed when
addressing Category 1 or 2 safety system
requirements?
Category 1 and 2 safety system requirements can be
achieved without the use of safety controllers. However,
this requires very careful design of the safety control circuit and a thorough understanding of the standards relat-
370
sors will meet the single component failure detection
and system shutdown criteria, while preventing a successive machine cycle from being initiated when a fault is
detected.
ed to the Machinery Directive. Use of a safety circuit controller ensures meeting Category 1 and 2 requirements
without a time-consuming study of the machine control
system.
32
How common are Category 4 safety system
requirements and how can they be satisfied?
Category 4 safety system requirements are typically associated with extremely high-risk applications in which:
(a) The severity of a potential injury is extremely high (e.g.
amputation or death).
(b) The employee/operator is exposed to the hazard highly frequently or continuously.
(c) There is little possibility of the employee/operator
avoiding the hazard.
Classic safety hierarchy states that dangers should be:
(1) designed out;
(2) guarded against, if they cannot be designed out; and
then
(3) (as a last resort) warned against.
When Category 4 safety requirements are encountered
(that is, when the safety control system must be able to
detect any single fault, or provide multiple fault tolerance,
without loss of the safety function), it is important to
remember these define the performance requirements of
the overall safety system … not of the individual components. (This, of course, is true for all safety categories …
not only Category 4.)
In this “system” context, it is clear that safety system component selection and design for equipment assessed as a
Category 4 risk will be dictated by the number of faults the
system can tolerate without loss of the safety function.
Hence the appropriate safety system components are
application-specific, requiring a thorough understanding of
the operation of the machinery and its control system.
Use of a safety controller rated at Category 4 does not, in
itself, assure the overall safety system meets this level of
performance requirements.
Since this classic safety hierarchy reflects general
machine design practice, few machines present Category
4 risk conditions.
371
IV. Safety Standards,
Marking and the
European Machinery Directive
33
What is the “
” mark and what does it mean?
The “CE” mark (for Conformite Europeene) is a symbol
applied to finished products and machinery which meet
applicable European Directives. For electrical and electronic “finished products,” these include the Low Voltage
Directive and, where relevant, the Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive.
34
Does the mark on a safety interlock switch,
coded-magnet sensor, safety controller or other
finished product intended for use in a safety
circuit signify the product is safe?
No, the CE mark is not a safety mark. It simply serves to
advise European customs officials that the product meets
all applicable European Directives, allowing it to be placed
35
on the European Economic Market Area (The European
Union and the countries of Iceland, Liechtenstein and
Norway).
Are third-party approvals needed to apply the
mark to safety components?
Third-party examination by an approved, independent
testing agency or notified body is required for some safety components. Specific products include light curtains,
safety mats, and two-hand controls. In addition some
countries, such as Germany, require third-party certification for safety circuit controllers.
For most other safety components (such as interlock
switches, coded-magnet sensors, limit switches, et al)
self-certification by the manufacturer is acceptable.
372
The CE mark on a machine indicates that the machine
as a whole conforms to the requirements of the
European Machinery Directive (EMD). The EMD states
that the machine must comply with the Essential Health
& Safety requirements and the EMC.
Despite this liberty, as policy SCHMERSAL has all of
their safety products certified by an independent third
party (such as the BG).
Whether third-party or self-certified, all CE-marked components must be documented by a Declaration of
Conformity. This document, signed by a highly positioned
technical manager (e.g. Director of Engineering, et al),
lists all standards and directives to which the product
conforms. In addition, component manufacturers must
maintain technical files documenting test results, etc.
36
Are machine guarding safety interlock switches
and related safety control products
subject to -marking?
SCHMERSAL considers all of their safety interlock
switches, sensors and related control accessories as
products requiring mandatory CE-marking. Consequently these products are designed to meet the EMC
37
and Low Voltage Directives as required. The CE-marking
on SCHMERSAL’s products affirms their compliance with
these applicable Directives.
Since -marking of safety products is (for
most items) a self-certification process, how
can a user be assured “ -marked” products
truly meet relevant European Directives?
Users of CE-marked products have three vehicles of
assurance at their disposal. These include an EC
Declaration of Conformity, EC Type-Examination, and
Type-Certification (Technical Report). Each of these is
described below.
EC Declaration of Conformity
The Declaration of Conformity is mandatory for all products that are CE-marked. It is also mandatory for
machine components which, if they fail, could lead to a
dangerous or hazardous condition on the machine.
These mandates are defined in the European Machinery
Directive, and must be issued by the manufacturer for all
products that are CE-marked.
This document, signed by a highly-positioned technical
manager (e.g. Director of Product Development, Director
of Research, Head of Engineering, et al), lists all the
Standards and Directives to which the product conforms.
It is a self-certification procedure normally undertaken by
the manufacturer.
All SCHMERSAL safety products have a Declaration of
Conformity document according to the European
Machinery Directive mandates.
EC Type-Examination
This is a third-party examination conducted by an
approved, independent testing agency/notified body
(such as the BG in Germany), and is compulsory for
selected safety equipment. Here the product is investigated to confirm that it conforms to all the Standards and
Directives listed in the Declaration of Conformity.
The examination procedure, the definition of an
approved independent testing agency/notified body, and
the types of safety equipment for which this examination
is mandatory is defined in the European Machinery
Directive. (Specific products for which an EC TypeExamination is mandated include light curtains, safety
mats, and two-hand controls. In addition the German
authorities include safety circuit controllers as requiring
such testing.)
This examination may only be conducted once, by one
approved body, whose findings are then valid for the
entire European Economic Community.
All SCHMERSAL safety controllers are so tested and
certified. And each can be supplied with an “EC TypeExamination Certificate” issued by a recognized,
approved body/notified body.
Type Certification (Technical Report)
This is similar to the EC Type-Examination, but is not
compulsory. Here the product is investigated by an
approved independent testing laboratory (usually by a
notified body) to confirm that it conforms to all the
Standards and Directives listed in the Declaration of
Conformity. This examination may be carried out in as
many countries and as often as required.
All SCHMERSAL safety products not covered by an EC
Type-Examination certificate (such as our electromechanical safety interlock switches) have been so tested and certified. And each can be supplied with a “Type
Certificate” issued by a recognized, notified body (e.g.
BG, TÜV).
373
38
To what type machines does the European
Machinery Directive apply?
The European Machinery Directive applies to all machinery that is powered and has moving parts. Excluded are
manually-powered equipment, motor vehicles, medical
39
Who is responsible for certifying that an
affected machine complies with the “essential
health and safety requirements” embodied in
the European Machinery Directive?
For most classes of machines, the affixing of the CE
mark to demonstrate compliance with relevant European
Directives is a self-certification process. For the most
dangerous types of machines (Schedule 2, Annex IV of
the European Union Machinery Directive, such as presses, sawing machines, manually-loaded injection/compression plastics molding machines and others listed in
this Schedule), certification must be done by a recognized, independent, third party (known in Europe as a
“notified body”). A list of notified bodies is available from
40
The Official Journal of the European Communities, U.S.
Contact, UNIPUB; Lanham, MD.
While self-certification of many machines is legally
acceptable, many machinery buyers prefer purchasing
machines which have been evaluated and certified by
independent, recognized third parties. This preference, in
some cases, has been precipitated by sale of self-certified machines which were found to not meet relevant
Directives.
What are “Consensus Standards,”and how do
they relate to OSHA guidelines?
“Consensus Standards” are those industry standards
developed by groups of professionals representing a
cross-section of firms within that industry. Examples are
standards prepared by ANSI (American National
Standards Association), ISA (Instrument Society of
America), ASME (American Society of Safety
Engineers), SAE (Society of Automatic Engineers) and
RIA (Robotics Industry Association). These standards
provide safety guidelines for machinery designers and
users.
374
machinery and other special equipment … some of
which is regulated by other legislation under European
Community Directives.
OSHA specifically requires that guarding devices at the
point-of-operation be in conformity with any appropriate
standards (which include any OSHA or “industry consensus standards”). Hence OSHA may cite such consensus standards as a basis for their findings and
enforcement.
V. Safety Controllers
41
What are “safety controllers” and
what are their functions?
Safety controllers (such as SCHMERSAL’s AES and
AZR Series) are connected between machine guarding
interlock/E-Stop switches and the machine’s stop control
elements (such as a motor contactor or control relay).
These controllers contain dual, self-checking safety system monitoring circuits and positive-guided output
relays. Each is designed to monitor faults in the safety
system’s interlock/E-Stop switches, the safety circuit
interconnection wiring, and their own internal monitoring
circuits and output relays.
Detection of a fault in the machine’s safety circuit or of an
open machine guard, disables the module’s output signal(s) facilitating machine stoppage, and/or prevents the
restarting of the machine until the fault has been corrected.
In addition to detecting open guards and/or actuated EStop switches, safety controllers are capable of detecting
the following types of safety system faults:
. “Open-circuit” in interconnection wiring
. “Short-circuit” in interconnection wiring
. “Short-to-ground” in interconnection wiring
. Welded contact in controlled output device
. (such as positive-guided motor contactor)
. Failure of safety controller’s positive-guided relay(s)
. Fault in safety system monitoring circuit
. Insufficient operating voltage.
Some microprocessor-based safety controllers, such as
SCHMERSAL’S AES Series, also feature integrated system diagnostics with visual LED outputs which indicates
fault type and location — thus minimizing machine downtime.
. Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure
Safety controllers detect and locate system faults. Units are available for use with guard interlock switches,
coded-magnet sensors, safety edges, light curtains, E-stops and emergency cable-pull switches to satisfy
a broad range of application requirements.
375
42
Why should safety controllers be used with
safety interlocks/E-Stops?
Safety controllers increase the reliability of the machine
guarding safety system. Their ability to detect safety cir-
43
What is the difference between a single and
dual-channel safety controller, and when
should each be used?
A single-channel safety controller is capable of accepting
only one (normally-closed) input. When used in safety
circuits they are unable to detect a short-circuit failure in
the interconnection wiring, or a failure of the monitored
input to change state.
A dual-channel safety controller is capable of accepting
two inputs; one to each of its two, redundant self-monitoring safety circuits. When used in safety circuits they
are typically capable of detecting interconnection wiring
faults (such as short-circuits, open circuits, and ground
faults) or a failure of one of the monitored input(s) to
44
cuit faults, and shut down the machine until the fault is
corrected, greatly heighten the safety level.
change state. As such they provide a higher level of safety than single-channel units.
Single-channel safety controllers are suitable for relatively low levels of risk assessment (e.g. EN 954-1 Safety
Categories B, 1 and 2). Dual-channel units are appropriate when designing “control reliable” safety systems —
that is, systems in which a single component failure will
not prevent normal machine stopping action from taking
place, but will prevent a successive machine cycle from
being initiated.
How do I decide which safety
controller to use?
Safety controller selection is usually based on:
(1) the type of inputs being monitored (e.g. E-Stops,
interlock switches, light curtains, coded-magnet sensors, et al).
(4) the need/desire to monitor the integrity of the positive-guided contacts in the controlled output device
(e.g. motor contactor, control relay, et al).
(5) the level of safety desired (this is usually determined
by a structured risk assessment).
(2) the number of inputs being monitored.
(3) the number and type of outputs required from the
safety controller (e.g. number of parallel outputs from
the module’s positive-guided relays and the number
of auxiliary/signaling outputs).
376
These application parameters will normally narrow, and
simplify, the choice of safety controller to one or two
units.
45
When is it necessary to design a safety system
tosatisfy the requirements of EN 954-1
Category 4?
Category 4 safety requirements are usually associated
with extremely high-risk applications. Consequently the
safety system needed to satisfy these conditions can be
quite complex and costly.
Since general machine design practice respects classic
safety hierarchy, most extremely high-risk hazards —
that is:
(a) those which the operator cannot avoid
(b) those in which the operator is exposed frequently or
continuously, and
(c) those which could result in serious injury, amputation
or death
Consequently for most applications it is generally not
necessary to incur the cost/complexity of Category 4
safety system design. Many low-risk situations can be
satisfied by safety systems that meet the requirements of
Category B, 1 or 2 as defined by EN 954-1.
In most higher-risk situations, a suitable safety system
(and one which meets ANSI’s requirement for “control
reliability”) can be achieved with a system designed to
meet the Category 3 requirements of EN 954-1.
When needed, Category 4 requirements can be satisfied
by proper selection from SCHMERSAL’s wide range of
CE-compliant safety interlocks and related safety controllers.
are designed-out during machine development or are
guarded against (if they cannot be designed-out).
377
VI. Applications and Solutions
46
What are some of the applications in which
positive-break and tamper-resistant safety
interlocks are used?
Positive-break and tamper-resistant safety interlocks are
inherently safer alternatives to conventional industrial
components such as:
. (Non-safety) electromechanical limit switches
. Inductive proximity switches
. Snap-acting position switches (without positive-break)
. Uncoded reed switches
. Hall-effect sensors
. Magnetic position switches
. Photoelectric sensors
Such conventional industrial sensors/switches are not
recommended for safety applications.
For increased safety and reduced liability, only components which have been tested and certified by an independent, recognized safety commission/agency are recommended.
47
. Metal cutting machine tools
. Metal forming machine tools
. Grinding machines
. Woodworking machinery
. Packaging equipment
. Printing presses
. Stamping/punch presses
. Textile machinery
. Material handling/conveyor lines
. Forging equipment
. Crushing machines
. Sawing systems
. Robot work-cell enclosures
. Emergency trip-wire systems
. Assembly equipment
What type safety interlock switches are
available that are positive-break, tamper
resistant, and certified for safety applications?
The examples on the following pages are representative
of the growing family of safety switches from
378
Typical applications for these safety interlocks include:
SCHMERSAL which satisfy these requirements.
Safer
by
Design
379
Frequently Asked Questions
Selection & Application of Safety Light Barriers
With
380
Glossary of
Light Curtain
Terminology
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Topic
I.
Selection & Application Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
II. Safety Distance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
III. Wiring & Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
IV. Standards & Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
V. Glossary of Selected Light Curtain Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
direction of
approach
reference plane
381
I. Selection & Application Characteristics
1
2
382
What is meant by “protected height”?
“Protected height” is the length of the light curtain’s active sensing area… that is the distance from center of the first beam to the
center of the last beam in the light curtain’s transmitter/receiver
array.
What is meant by “range” of a light curtain?
“Range” is the maximum effective distance that may exist between the
light curtain’s emitter (transmitter) and its receiver. The effective range
is generally reduced by use of reflecting mirrors and environmental
contaminants (such as fog, smoke, steam, dust, moisture, etc.)
3
What is meant by “response time”
of a light curtain?
The “response time” of the light curtain is the time it takes for the light
curtain to transmit the output (alarm) signal to the safety interface or
machine control element after the protection field has been interrupted.
The overall response time of the light curtain safety system includes the
response time of the light curtain, the response time of any interposed
interface (such as a safety controller or safety PLC), and the response
time of the machine primary control elements (e.g. motor contactor or
control relay). Response time is one of the important factors that must
be considered when calculating the proper minimum safety distance.
4
What is meant by “minimum object sensitivity”
and does it mean the same as “optical pitch”
or “beam spacing”?
“Minimum object sensitivity” refers to the smallest object (diameter) that
the light curtain can detect. It is commonly stated as the “resolution” of
the light curtain and is also referred to as “detection capability”.
“Optical” or “beam spacing” refers to the distance from the center line
of one beam to the center line of the next beam.
It is important to understand that it is possible for an object to be in such
a position that it does not block the path of a single beam even though
it is the same diameter of the optical pitch. Therefore the resolution of a
light curtain is equal to the optical pitch plus one lens diameter.
P=Pitch between two lenses
D=Diameter of one lens
R=Resolution
383
5
What light curtain resolutions are
commonly used?
The most common light curtain resolutions are:
• 14mm (0.55 inches) for finger protection
• 30mm (1.25 inches) for hand protection
• 50mm (2.0 inches) to 500mm (20.0 inches) for body protection.
Finger Detection
6
Hand Detection
Whole Body Protection
What do “angle of divergence” and “angle of
acceptance” mean and what are the application
considerations that they imply?
“Angle of divergence” is the cone angle of the emitted light from the
transmitter. “Angle of acceptance” is the cone angle within which
the receiver will detect this emitted light. The wider the angles, the
easier it is to align the light curtain. However, one must recognize
that a wider angle of acceptance can result in possible interference
from another photoelectric device emitting light energy within the
receiver’s angle of acceptance. Contemporary light curtain standards (IEC 61496) require a maximum angle of divergence of
± 2.5 degrees for Safety Category 4 units. (SCHMERSAL Series
SLC/SLG light curtains feature a coded signal, and hence are not
affected by interference from other photoelectric devices).
384
7
What are “two box” and “three box”
light curtain systems?
A “three box” light curtain system consists of an emitter, a receiver
and a separate safety controller (safety relay module). A “two box”
system consists of an emitter and a receiver with the safety controller
functions integral to the emitter-receiver pair. A two box light curtain
system generally results in lower wiring and installation cost.
8
9
What is an “OSSD”?
“OSSD” is the abbreviation for “Output Signal Switching Device”
(also known as the light curtain’s safety outputs). For example the
SCHMERSAL Series SLC 410 light curtains have two OSSD’s (two,
500mA PNP safety outputs).
What is “fixed blanking” and
“floating blanking”?
“Fixed Blanking” is when a fixed set of adjacent light beams are rendered permanently inactive for the purpose of allowing product or
part of the process to enter the sensing area without deactivating
the light curtain safety outputs. An example would be the “blanking”
of a small segment of the light curtain to allow finished parts to eject
from a machining operation through this specific “opening” in the
protected field.
“Floating blanking” is when a set number (one or more) of adjacent
beams is allowed to ignore the presence of an object within their
portion of the protection field. However, unlike fixed blanking (where
the specific set of inactive beams are fixed), “floating blanking”
allows the set number of adjacent beams to “float” within protected field … thus allowing the object to be ignored to move within the
protected field without deactivating the light curtain safety outputs.
As long as no more than the selected number of adjacent beams is
interrupted, the system remains operational and does not stop the
machine. If one or more additional beams are interrupted, the light
curtain system will provide a signal to initiate machine stoppage. An
example would be similar to the ejected parts example above, but
where the parts eject through a “moving opening” … that is, at different points through the protected field.
385
10
What is “muting”?
“Muting” is the provisional and automatic overriding of the light curtain safety output function during normal, uninterrupted machine
cycle operation. This is an important function in applications in
which the light curtain or light grid must be interrupted by some part
of the machine or the materials being processed without stopping
the operation or process.
An example is a palletizing system within which the palletized product must be allowed to pass through the opening protected by the
light curtain, while the entry of a person must stop the machine.
Muting is typically accomplished using additional sensing devices
(such as safety limit switches or photoelectric sensors that can be
checked for functionality) in conjunction with a light curtain and a
muting controller (such as SCHMERSAL’s model SCM 3R) to detect
the presence of the material/machine element and override the light
curtain’s safety function.
• materials authorized
• people non-authorized
386
to go through the barrier
11
12
What is “PSDI”?
“PSDI” (Presence Sensing Device Initiation) refers to the use of the
sensing device (e.g. light curtain) to activate the machine/ manufacturing process once it has been determined that a human is no
longer in the hazard area.
I want to set up my light curtain so it
operates in PSDI mode. What are some
of the requirements?
Use of a light curtain in the “PSDI” mode requires that it have a maximum
object sensitivity of not less than 31.75 mm (1.25 inch) and be located at
the correct “safety distance” from the point of the hazard. “Blanking” of
the sensing field is not permitted when operating in this mode.
13
What application characteristics suggest that a
light curtain may be a more suitable means of
protection than some other alternative safety
device? (such as a safety pressure mat, interlocked movable guards, or a laser scanner)?
Some of the application characteristics that may suggest use of a
light curtain are:
• The hard guards require frequent (and costly) cleaning
… such as in a food processing application.
• The operator is required to gain frequent access to the
hazardous area … such that hard guards or movable
guards are inconvenient and/or compromise efficient
process operations.
• Products of different sizes/shapes are required to pass
through the guarded area without interrupting production.
• A single light curtain might be less costly and may be
used without compromising the safety of personnel.
• Fork lifts or other vehicles must frequently enter the hazardous area.
387
14
What questions might I ask to better evaluate
if a light curtain is suitable solution for my
application?
Typical application “screening" questions might include:
• Will the presence of dirt, dust, moisture, oil mist, or
other environmental contaminants adversely affect a
light curtain’s performance?
• Can the light curtains be installed such that their
alignment and performance are maintained?
• Can the light curtains be installed to respect the
required safety distance for the application?
• Will ambient light conditions (such as welding arcs,
AGV or forklift strobe lights) adversely affect the light
curtain’s performance?
388
II. Safety Distance Requirements
15
16
How do I define the “danger zone?”
The “danger zone” is that area of a machine or manufacturing cell
within which a person will be exposed to a hazard and potential
injury. When using safety light curtains it is important to locate them
at the proper “safety distance” such that they initiate the stopping of
the machine/process before personnel reach a point-of-hazard.
How important are “safety distance”
calculations, and who should assume
the responsibility for making this
calculation?
“Safety distance” calculations are essential to the effective application
and use of safety light curtains. Failure to respect the required safe
distance in a given application may place personnel at risk of injury.
Since proper safety distance calculations require consideration of
ambient conditions, equipment stop times, response times of other
interposing light curtain safety system components (such as motor
contactors, control relays, safety controllers, etc.), such calculations
are best done by the OEM supplying the light curtain as an integral
component to their machine or equipment, or alternatively by the
end-user in whose facility the light curtain is being installed.
389
17
How do I calculate the correct “safety distance”
between the hazard and the location of the
light curtain?
For the U.S., the “safety distance” is typically calculated using OSHA’s
suggested formula:
Ds = Hs x (Ts+Tp+Tr+2Tm) Dp
Where:
Ds = Minimum safety distance (in inches).
Hs = Hand Speed constant of 63 inches per second (1.6 m/s).
Ts =
Maximum machine stopping time (in seconds).
Tp = Maximum response time of the light curtain (in seconds).
Tr =
Maximum response time of all other interposing control elements… e.g. safety controller, motor contactor, safety PLC (in
seconds).
Tm = Increase in the press stopping time allowing for brake wear
(in seconds).
Dp = Penetration depth factor (using the OSHA Penetration Depth
Factor Calculation chart or formula)
In addition ANSI (American National Standards Institute) has established a
formula that will result in a similar calculation.
In Europe, the following formula (adopted from EN 999) should be used and
documented in the technical file:
S = K (t1+t2+t3) +C
Where
390
S=
minimum safety distance (mm)
K=
approach speed of object to the hazard (mm/sec)
t1 =
response time of the safety light curtain (in seconds)
t2 =
response time of the safety interface… e.g. safety controller,
PLC (in seconds)
t3 =
machine response time (in seconds)
C=
additional distance (safety factor)
Note: C and K will vary depending on application characteristics and light curtain
resolution. For further details see SCHMERSAL Safety Light Curtain
Catalog-Handbook GK-3.
Example:
Calculate the safety distance required when using a
14mm resolution light curtain to guard a point-ofoperation hazard for which the response time of the
light curtain is 6ms, the response time of the interposing safety controller is 12ms, the machine stop time is
60ms and the safety factor is negligible.
S=
1600 mm/sec x (0.006 + 0.012 + 0.060)
S=
125 mm (5 inches)
safety barrier
point of danger
direction of
approach
reference plane
18
How do I calculate the “Penetration Depth
Factor?”
“Penetration Depth Factor” can be calculated using OSHA’s
Penetration Depth Factor Calculation chart or by using the following formula:
Dp = 3.4 (S - 0.276)
Where
Dp = Depth penetration factor
S = Object Sensitivity or Light Curtain resolution (in inches)
391
19
After doing the “safety distance” calculations,
I have found that due to space limitations I
cannot locate my light curtain the required
distance from the point-of-hazard to stop the
machine in time. What can I do to provide a
safe situation?
Depending upon the application, there are a few possible solutions.
These include the following:
1. If the machine presenting the hazard is controlled by an AC
motor, one can install a dynamic brake to reduce the stopping time of the machine.
2. If the equipment presenting the hazard is controlled pneumatically or hydraulically, one can install a safety valve that
produces equal pressure on both sides of the control cylinder’s actuator reducing the stopping time of the equipment.
3. One can install a movable hard guard (in lieu of a light curtain) that allows access to the hazardous area only after the
system has stopped or the hazard no longer exists.
392
III. Wiring & Installation Considerations
20
21
22
How can I guard multiple sides
of a machine with one light curtain?
Multiple sides of a machine or manufacturing cell can be guarded
with a single light curtain using reflecting mirrors to bend the light
beams around the corners … provided that the performance characteristics of the light curtain and mirrors are adequate to span the
sensing distance effectively.
Does the use of reflecting mirrors affect the
maximum sensing range of the light curtain?
Yes. Each mirror typically reduces the maximum sensing range by 10%
to 25% depending upon the light curtain and the type of mirror used
(e.g. front-surface reflecting, rear-surface reflecting, metal mirror, etc.)
What, if any, environmental conditions must be
considered when using safety light curtains?
Abnormal or unusual environmental conditions can compromise
the performance of a safety light curtain system. For example:
• Sudden changes in temperature may result in condensation on the light curtain lenses or deflecting
mirrors.
• The presence of fog, smoke or dense fumes typically reduce the effective range of a light curtain.
• The presence of steam or dust also typically reduces
the effective range of a light curtain.
23
Must I be concerned about other light sources
creating problems with my light curtain?
Yes, one must be aware of other light sources (such as sunlight, reflections from nearby surfaces, welding arcs, light energy from other light
curtains). Each should be considered when using safety light curtains.
393
24
Must light curtains only be used in the
vertical position?
No, some applications call for light curtains to be used in the horizontal orientation. When using light curtains horizontally, relevant
industry standards (such as ANSI-RIA 15.06) should be respected.
25
Some light curtains are “matched sets” and
some are not. Why and what does that mean to
a user?
A “matched set” means that the light curtain transmitter and receiver are matched at the factory (during manufacturing) for optimal
performance. If during operation of the light curtain, the transmitter
or receiver is damaged or fails, both must be replaced and returned
to the factory for repair and adjustment.
If the light curtain’s transmitter and receiver are not matched, and a
receiver or transmitter unit fail or become damaged, it can simply
be replaced with another unit. SCHMERSAL’s light curtain pairs
(transmitter and receiver) need not be matched.
26
Does my light curtain have to be hard-wired or
may I use quick-disconnects?
Both types of terminations are permitted. In either case, disconnecting the receiver or transmitter will result in a shut-down.
27
If I am using a Safety PLC, do I still have to use
a safety controller (safety relay module) with
my light curtain?
A safety PLC may be used without a safety controller (safety relay
module) provided that it:
• Can accept the light curtain’s safety output signals,
• Has the correct diagnostics to meet the control reliability requirements, and
394
• Can provide a safety output suitable for initiating stoppage of the machine posing the hazard.
28
When using a light curtain with two safety
outputs, may I use one for “safety” and one
for “annunciation” (e.g. to send a signal to
my PLC that the light curtain has been
interrupted)?
The answer depends on the safety category desired, as well as other
elements in the safety system. For higher safety categories (Category
3 or 4) dual (redundant) safety outputs are needed to satisfy control
reliability requirements. For such applications the answer is no.
29
How does one select the proper light curtain
system for a given application?
Typical selection factors include:
• How large is the object/body part that is being detected/protected? (This will determine the minimum
required light curtain resolution.)
• What is the height/length of the area (“protected field”)
to be guarded?
• What is the maximum distance (“range”) that will separate the emitter and the receiver in the application?
• How quickly must I stop the machine or process after
interruption of the light curtain, and will the light curtain
safety system have a fast enough “response time” to
do so based on its intended location?
• What type of load will the light curtain safety outputs
control, and are they sufficient for the application? (This
will help determine the current capability required of the
safety signals … e.g. semiconductor outputs for controlling a safety PLC or solid state relay vs. relay outputs for direct control of a motor contactor).
• What safety level or safety control category does the
application’s risk assessment indicate is required?
395
IV. Standards & Certifications
30
Does OSHA or ANSI certify Safety Light
Curtains?
No, neither OSHA or ANSI certifies any safety device or system.
However, there are many independent third-parties (notified bodies such as UL, CSA, or TUV) that can test and certify safety
devices for compliance to industry standards.
31
32
What is IEC 61496 and why is it important?
IEC 61496 is the European standard that defines the performance
requirements for electro-optic safety devices. It is important
because it addresses both the hardware and software requirements, and must be satisfied if light curtains are to meet the CE
requirements of the European Economic Community.
Is third-party certification of light curtains
required, or may the manufacturer self-certify?
Safety light curtains must be certified for their compliance to relevant standards by an independent, recognized third-party. They
may not be self-certified by the manufacturer.
396
V. Glossary of Selected Light Curtain Terminology
AOPD:
“AOPD” is the abbreviation for Active Optoelectronic Protective Device… such as a
light curtain, light grid, and single light beam.
Alignment:
Positioning of a light curtain beam so that the maximum amount of emitted light energy reaches the receiver element.
Alignment Aid:
Typically a built-in light curtain feature that facilitates alignment of the emitter (transmitter) and receiver during installation. For long-range sensing, or when using deflecting
mirrors, an external alignment aid (such as a laser aligning tool) may be used during
installation.
Ambient Conditions:
The environmental conditions in the area in which the light curtain is installed (e.g.
humidity, temperature, light level, etc.).
Angle of Acceptance:
The included angle of the field of view within which the receiver will respond to the
emitter’s (transmitter’s) transmitted light energy.
Angle of Divergence:
The included angle of the field of light energy transmitted by the emitter element of the
light curtain.
Attenuation:
A reduction in the energy level of the emitted light caused by environmental elements
such as dirt, moisture, or other contaminants in the ambient.
Beam Spacing:
The distance between the centerline of each of the beams of light energy transmitted
by the emitter.
BG:
“BG” is the abbreviation for “Berufgenossenschaft”… an independent German insurance agency whose legislative arm recommends industry safety practices. The BG is
one of many independent, recognized test agencies (also known in Europe as “notified
bodies”) authorized to certify that safety products comply with all relevant standards.
397
Blanking (Fixed Blanking):
“Fixed Blanking” is when a fixed set of adjacent light beams are rendered permanently
inactive for the purpose of allowing product or part of the process to enter the sensing
area without deactivating the light curtain safety outputs. An example would be the
“blanking” of a small segment of the light curtain to allow finished parts to eject from a
machining operation through this specific “opening” in the protected field.
Blanking (Floating Blanking):
“Floating blanking” is when a set number (one or more) of adjacent beams is allowed
to ignore the presence of an object within their portion of the protection field. However,
unlike fixed blanking (where the inactive beams are fixed), “floating blanking” allows the
set number of adjacent beams to “float” within protected field … thus allowing the
object to be ignored to move within the protected field without deactivating the light
curtain safety outputs.
As long as no more than the selected number of adjacent beams is interrupted, the
system remains operational and does not initiate stoppage of the machine. If one or
more additional beams are interrupted, the light curtain system will initiate machine
stoppage. An example would be similar to the ejected parts example above, but
where the parts eject through a “moving opening”… that is, at different points
through the protected field.
“CE” Mark:
The “CE” mark (for Conformite Europeene) is a symbol applied to finished products
(including components such as light curtains, safety mats, safety interlock switches,
safety controllers and machinery) which meet all applicable European Directives.
CSA:
Abbreviation for Canadian Standards Association. An independent testing agency similar to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) in the United States. A product that is “CSA
certified” has been type-tested and approved by the Canadian Standards Association
as meeting relevant electrical and safety codes.
Emitter (photoelectric):
The light generating member of a light curtain pair. Also called the “transmitter”.
IEC:
The International Electrotechnical Commission, headquartered in Europe. This organization writes and distributes recommended safety and product performance standards
for electrical products and components … many of which become reference models
for U.S. standards.
IP Rating:
A rating system established by the IEC. The “IP” rating defines the environmental suitability of light curtains and other component/system enclosures for various ambient
conditions. Similar to NEMA ratings for electrical enclosures.
398
LED (Light Emitting Diode):
A semiconductor that emits a small amount of light energy when current flows through
it in the forward direction.
Light Curtain (light screen):
An array of photoelectric sensing beams configured to sense objects present in their
sensing area. “Safety light curtains” are used to detect personnel who enter into an
unsafe area around or within a machine or work cell.
Minimum Object Sensitivity:
Minimum object sensitivity refers to the smallest object (diameter) that the light curtain
can detect. It is commonly stated as the “resolution” of the light curtain, and is also
called the detection capability.
MPCE:
”MPCE” is an abbreviation for Machine Primary Control Element. An MPCE is the final
device controlling the power to a machine (e.g. a control relay or motor contactor).
MSCE:
“MSCE” is the abbreviation for Machine Secondary Control Element. An MSCE is a
control element other than the MPCE capable of removing power from a machine (e.g.
a safety controller, safety PLC).
Modulation (photoelectric):
Modulation of a light source refers to the repeated turning of it “on” and “off” at a
high frequency (typically several kilohertz). The secret of a modulated photoelectric
sensor’s superior performance is that the emitter and receiver are tuned to the frequency of modulation. Only the modulated light is amplified, with all other light
reaching the receiver ignored.
Muting:
“Muting” is the provisional and automatic overriding of the light curtain safety output
function during normal, uninterrupted machine cycle operation. This is an important
function in applications in which the light curtain or light grid must be interrupted by
some part of the machine or the materials being processed without stopping the operation or process.
Nanometer (nm):
Unit of measurement used to specify the wavelength of light energy.
1 nm = 0.000000001 meter (10 -9 meter).
Optical Pitch:
“Optical pitch” is the distance from the centerline of one beam to the centerline of the
next beam in a transmitter-receiver beam array. It is also known as “beam spacing”.
399
OSSD:
“OSSD” is the abbreviation for “Output Signal Switching Device” (also known as the
light curtain’s safety outputs).
Protected Height:
“Protected height” is the length of the light curtain’s active sensing area … that is the
distance from the center of the first beam to the center of the last beam in the light
curtains transmitter-receiver beam array.
PSDI:
“PSDI” (Presence Sensing Device Initiation) refers to the use of the sensing device (e.g.
light curtain) to activate the machine and/or manufacturing process once it has been
determined that a human is no longer in the hazard area.
Range (sensing range):
The specified maximum operating distance between the light curtain emitter (transmitter) and receiver (without use of deflecting mirrors). Use of deflecting mirrors typically
reduces the maximum range of a light curtain.
Receiver:
The light curtain element that responds to the emitted light energy.
Resolution:
The smallest object profile dimension that will be reliably sensed or detected by a
given light curtain transmitter-receiver pair.
Response Time (response speed):
The time required for the output (OSSD) of the light curtain/beam to change state in
response to a change of the input signal (e.g. sensing event). Response time of a sensor becomes extremely important when calculating a suitable safety distance for a
given light curtain pair.
Safety Distance:
“Safety distance” is the minimum distance from the safety light curtain to the point-ofhazard that must be respected to insure that a person will not be exposed to the hazard. It is a function of the speed of approach, and the cumulative response times of
the
safety light curtain, any interposing safety interfaces (such as a safety controller
or safety PLC), the machine primary control element (such as a motor contactor or
control relay), and the stop time of the machine.
Transmitter (photoelectric):
The light generating member of a light curtain pair. Also called the “emitter”.
UL:
Abbreviation for Underwriters Laboratories Inc. An independent testing agency for
products sold in the United States. A device that is “UL listed” has been type-tested
and certified to meet required electrical and/or safety standards.
400
GLOSSARY OF
MACHINE SAFEGUARDING TERMINOLOGY
401
SELECTED MACHINE SAFEGUARDING
TERMINOLOGY
Authorized Output: an output from a safety controller’s
positive-guided relays (used to “authorize” or “enable” a
machine’s start circuit when safety system conditions
exist). Also known as “safety output.”
Automatic Reset: a safety controller reset circuit that
automatically resets the safety controller when safe
system conditions (no system faults) exist. A manual
reset button is optional.
Auxiliary output: a non-safety related contact closure
or semiconductor output primarily used for signaling
component or system status to a PLC, audible alarm
or visual indicator (such as a stack light). Also called a
“signaling contact” or “auxiliary monitoring contact”.
CSA (Canadian Standards Association): an independent Canadian testing and standards-making
organization similar to Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) in the U.S. “CSA-certified”
products meet relevant CSA electrical and
safety standards.
Declaration of Conformity: a manufacturer’s self-certified document, signed by a highly-positioned technical
manager, which lists all the Standards and Directives to
which a product conforms. A Declaration of Conformity
is mandatory for all CE-marked products, and for
machine components which, if they fail, could lead to a
dangerous or hazardous situation on a machine.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute): an
association of industry representatives who, working
together, develop safety and other technical standards.
Defined Area: a predetermined area scanned by a light
beam within which the presence of an opaque object of
specified minimum size will result in the generation of a
control signal.
Auxiliary monitoring contact: See “auxiliary output”.
Direct-Action Contacts: See “positive-break” contacts.
BG (Berufgenossenschaft): an independent German
insurance agency whose legislative arm
recommends industry safety practices.
One of many “notified bodies” authorized
to certify that safety products comply with
all relevant standards.
Diverse Redundancy: the use of different components
and/or different microprocessor instruction sets written
by different programmers in the design and construction
of redundant components/circuits. Its purpose is to
increase system reliability by minimizing the possibility
of common-mode failure (the failure of like components
used in redundant circuits).
CE (Conformité Europeéne) mark: a symbol (CE)
applied to finished products and machinery indicating
it meets all applicable European Directives. For electrical
and electronic “finished products”, such as a safety relay
module, these include the Low Voltage
Directive and, where relevant, the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Directive.
Coded-Magnet Sensor: a two-piece position sensor
consisting of an array of reed switches and a multiple
magnet array-actuating element. Such devices will only
deliver an output signal when the reed switch element
is in the presence of a matched, multiple-magnetic
field array. Coded-magnet sensors cannot be actuated
using a simple magnet. Hence they are far more difficult
to defeat/bypass than a simple magnetic switch or
proximity sensor.
Control Reliability: A term applied to safety devices or
systems which are designed constructed and installed
such that the failure of a single component within the
device or system does not prevent normal machine
stopping action from taking place…but does
prevent
a successive machine cycle from
402
being initiated.
Dual-Channel Safety System: a safety control system
characterized by two inputs; each connected to one of
two independent safety circuits. Dual-channel systems
are typically capable of detecting interconnection wiring
faults such as open circuits, short-circuits and ground
faults. As such they provide a higher level of safety than
single-channel systems.
E-Stop (Emergency Stop): the stopping of a machine
by actuation of an “emergency stop” switch (such as a
safety interlock switch, emergency push button switch,
rope-pull switch, foot switch, or other actuating device.
European Machinery Directive (EMD) 98/392/EEC:
a set of machine safety design requirements which must
be satisfied to meet the Essential Health and Safety
standards established by the European Economic
Community. This Directive, and other relevant European
Directives (such as the Low Voltage Directive, EMC
Directive, et al) must be satisfied for the machine to
bear the CE mark.
Fail-to-Danger: a component or system failure which
allows a machine to continue operating, exposing
personnel to a hazardous or unsafe condition.
Fail-to-Safe: “Fail-to-Safe” safety devices are designed
such that a component failure causes the device/system
to attain rest in a safe condition.
Fault Detection: the monitoring of selected safety system components whose failure would compromise the
functioning of the safety system. The detection of such
failures is known as “fault detection.” Examples are:
• a short-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection
wiring
• an open-circuit in the safety circuit’s interconnection
wiring
• a welded contact in the safety controller’s positiveguided relays
• an open machine guard
Fault Exclusion: the ability to minimize known possible
component failures (“faults”) in a safety system by
design criteria and/or component selection. Simple
examples of “excluded faults” are:
• The use of an overrated contactor to preclude the
possibility of contact welding.
• Design of a machine guard such that the safety
interlock switch actuator cannot be damaged.
• Selection of a suitable safety interlock switch.
• Use of positive-break safety interlock switches
together with a self-monitoring safety relay module,
such that the possibility of a contact weld resulting
in the loss of the safety function is eliminated.
The elimination of such faults are generally a compromise between the technical safety requirements and
the theoretical probability of their occurrence. Design
engineers are permitted to exclude such faults when
constructing the machine’s safety system. However,
each “fault exclusion” must be identified, justified, and
documented in the Technical File submitted to satisfy
the European Machinery Directive.
Feedback Loop: an auxiliary input on a safety controller
designed to monitor and detect a contact weld in the
primary machine-controlled device (e.g. motor contactor,
relay, et al) having positive-guided contacts.
Force-Guided Contacts: See “Positive-Guided
Contacts”.
Fixed Barrier Guard: See “Hard Guarding”.
Guard: a barrier that prevents entry of an individual’s
hands or other body parts into a hazardous area.
Hard Guarding: the use of screens, fences, or other
mechanical barriers to prevent access of personnel to
hazardous areas of a machine. “Hard guards” generally
allow the operator to view the point-of-operation.
Hazardous Area: an area of a machine or process
which presents a potential hazard to personnel.
Interlock: an arrangement in which the operation of
one device automatically brings about or prevents the
operation of another device.
Interlocked Barrier Guard: a fixed or movable guard
which, when opened, stops machine operation.
Machine Primary Control Element (MPCE): an
electrically powered component which directly controls
a machine’s operation. MPCE’s are the last control
component to operate when a machine’s motion is
initiated or stopped.
Machine Secondary Control Element (MSCE): a
machine control element (other than an MPCE) capable
of removing power from the hazardous area (s) of a
machine.
Manual Start-Up Test: a term applied to safety controllers designed such that at least one of the system’s
interlocked machine guards must be manually-opened
and closed (after applying power) before machine operation is authorized. All SCHMERSAL’S even numbered
Series AES microprocessor--based safety controllers
(e.g. AES 1136, AES 1146, AES 1156, AES 3366, et al)
are designed to require a manual start-up test.
Manually-monitored Reset: a safety controller reset
circuit requiring the presence of a discrete “trailing-edge”
signal (24V to 0V) to activate the controller’s authorized
outputs. A reset button is mandatory.
Muting: the ability to program a monitoring and/or
control device to ignore selected system conditions.
Negative Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singlepiece safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such
that the force applied to open the normally closed (NC)
safety contact is provided by an internal spring. (See
Figure 1.)
In this mounting mode the NC contacts may not open
when the safety guard is “open”. Here welded/stuck
contacts, or failure of a contact-opening spring,
may result in exposing the machine operator to a
hazardous/unsafe area.
When mounted in the “negative-mode”, single-piece
safety interlock switches can be easily circumvented/
defeated by the operator…simply by taping down the
switch actuator when the safety guard is open.
403
Point-of-Operation: the area(s) of a machine where
material or the workpiece is positioned and a process is
performed.
Point-of-Operation Guarding: a device or guard
installed at the interface between the operator and the
point-of-operation which is intended to protect personnel
from hazardous areas.
Figure 1
NEGATIVE-MODE INSTALLATION
OSHA (Occupational Safety Health Administration):
a U.S. Department of Labor Federal agency responsible
for monitoring and regulating workplace safety. OSHA
enforcement may reference their own regulations, as
well as those of other industry standards-making groups
(e.g. ANSI, NFPA, UL, et al).
Positive-Break Contacts: normally-closed (NC) contacts which, upon actuation, are forced to open by a
non-resilient mechanical drive mechanism. Also called
“positive-opening” or “direct-action” contacts. (See
Figure 2.)
Positive-Guided Contacts: Normally-open (NO) and
normally-closed (NC) contacts which operate interdependently such that the NO and NC contacts can never
be closed at the same time. They are designed such
that if one of the contacts welds/sticks closed,
CONVENTIONAL SPRING-DRIVEN
CONTACTS
Figure 3
CONTACTS
the other contacts cannot change state. (See Figure 3.)
The interdependent operation between NO and NC
contacts permits self-checking/monitoring of the functioning of relays and contactors featuring positive-guided
contacts. Hence they are desirable in machine safety
circuits where “fail-to-safe” or “control reliability” is
desired. Also called “force-guided contacts”.
Positive Linkage: a term applied to roller lever, rocking
lever and other switch actuating members designed
such that the integrity of the linkage between the actuator and the shaft is heightened (beyond a set screw on a
smooth shaft) by its mechanical design. Examples of
positive-linkages are pinned, square and serrated
shafts. (See Figure 4.)
Figure 2
CONVENTIONAL VERSUS POSITIVE-OPENING
CONTACTS
404
hazards present to the machine operator and/or maintenance personnel. This assessment is usually done in
the early stages of the machine’s design to permit such
hazards to be designed-out or alternatively determine
the scope of the safety system needed to protect personnel from possible injury. One approach suggested in
EN954-1 is summarized in Figure 6.
Figure 6
Pinned
Square
Actuator
Serrated
Positive Linkage
Figure 4
Positive-Mode Mounting: the mounting of a singepiece safety interlock switch (e.g. a limit switch) such
that the non-resilient mechanical mechanism which
forces the normally-closed (NC) contacts to open is
directly driven by the interlocked machine safety guard.
In this mode (as opposed to “negative-mode mounting”)
the safety guard physically forces the NC contacts to
open when the guard is opened. (See Figure 5.)
Selection of the Safety Category:
A brief overview of these safety categories is provided in Figure 7.
Preferred categories
Possible categories, which require additional
measures
Over-dimensioned measures for the relevant risk
Here the safety
category is
determined by the
following parameters:
• S Severity of injury
• ■ S1 Slight injury
• ■ S2 Serious injury
• F Frequency
and/or exposure
time to the hazard
• ■ F1 Seldom to
quite often
• ■ F2 Frequent to
continuous
• P Possibility of
avoiding the
hazard
• ■ P1 Possible
under specific
conditions
• ■ P2 Scarcely
possible
Safeguarding: protecting personnel from hazards using
guards, barriers, safety devices and/or safe working
procedures.
Figure 5
Positive-Opening Contacts: See “Positive-Break
Contacts”.
Push/Pull Operation: a term applied to emergency
rope-pull switches designed to actuate when the
rope/trip-wire is pulled and when it is pushed (goes
slack). Such rope-pull switches provide a higher level
of safety than units which only actuate when the tripwire/rope is pulled.
Redundancy: the duplication of control circuits and/or
components such that if one component/circuit should
fail the other (redundant) component/circuit will ensure
safe operation.
Risk Assessment: a systematic means of quantifying
the relative level of danger different types of machine
Safety Controller: an electronic and/or electromechanical device designed expressly for monitoring the integrity of a machine’s safety system. Such controllers are
designed using positive-guided (force-guided) relays.
Depending upon the model, SCHMERSAL’s safety
controllers are capable of detecting the following types
of potential safety system faults:
• Machine guard(s) open
• Guard monitoring switch/sensor failure
• Interconnection wiring “open circuit”
• Interconnection wiring “short circuit”
• Interconnection wiring “short-to-ground”
• Welded contact in controlled output device
• Failure of one of the safety controller’s positiveguided relays
• Fault in the safety controller’s monitoring circuit
• Insufficient safety controller operating voltage
Upon detection of a system fault, the safety controller will
initiate a “machine stop” command and/or prevent the
restarting of the machine until the fault has been
corrected. The “stop” command may be immediate
or time-delayed depending upon the model safety 405
controller selected.
Safety Enable: (See “Authorized Output.”)
Safety Interlock Switch: a switch designed expressly to
safely monitor the position of a machine barrier guard.
Such switches typically feature positive-break contacts
and are designed to be more tamper-resistant than conventional position/presence-sensing switches.
Safety Output: (See “Authorized Output.”)
Safety Relay: an electromechanical relay designed with
positive-guided contacts.
Self-Checking: the performing of periodic self-diagnostics on the safety control circuit to ensure that critical
individual components are functioning properly.
Stop Categories:
“0” Requires immediate removal of power from the
controlled devices.
“1” Allows for a time delay up to 30 seconds for removal
of power. This is commonly used with drive systems
where immediate removal of power may result in a
longer stop time.
Tamper-Resistant: a term applied to safety interlock
switches referring to their relative ability to be defeated
or bypassed using simple, readily available means such
as a screwdriver, paper clip, piece of tape or wire, etc.
Switches and sensors designed expressly for use as
machine guard safety interlocks are designed to be
more “tamper-resistant” than conventional switches/
sensors (e.g. proximity switches, reed switches, conventional limit switches).
Self-Monitoring: see “Self-Checking”.
Single-Channel Safety System: a safety control system characterized by one safety interlock switch whose
normally-closed contact is the sole input to a safety controller or a motor contactor. Such systems are unable to
detect a short circuit failure in the interconnection wiring
and are only recommended for addressing Safety
Categories B, 1 and 2 (see “Risk Assessment”).
Solenoid-Latching Safety Interlock Switch:
a two-piece safety interlock (actuating key and switch
mechanism) whose design prevents the removal of
the actuating key until released by an integral latching
solenoid. Solenoid latching is typically controlled by a
time-delay, motion detector, position sensor or other
control components.
406
Time-delayed Authorized Outputs: a safety controller’s
authorized outputs whose activation is delayed (up to 30
seconds) to satisfy Stop Category 1 requirements.
Trailing-edge Reset: (See “Manually-monitored Reset.”)
Two-Hand Control: a machine control system which
requires “simultaneous” use of both of the operator’s
hands to initiate a machine cycle.
UL (Underwriters Laboratories): an independent testing and standards-making organization.
UL tests products for compliance to
relevant electrical and safety standards/
requirements.
MACHINE SAFETY STANDARDS
European Machinery Directive & CE Marking
The European safety requirements for man and machine
are established in the European Machinery Directive
(EMD). According to the EMD, machinery must be
designed and built to meet the Directive’s requirements
as defined by existing and emerging European standards. These “European Norms”, prepared by representatives of the European Economic Community (EEC)
member states and produced by the European standards committees CEN and CENELEC, provide a harmonized baseline for the design and construction of safe
machinery.
As of January 1, 1997, machinery sold into or within the
EEC must comply with the requirements of the
European Machinery Directive. Equipment which complies may be affixed with the CE mark (for “Conformité
Europeene”). The CE mark on a machine signifies that it
conforms to the essential health and safety requirements defined by the relevant European Norms.
EUROPEAN STANDARDS
These “Norms” form a hierarchical structure which
include:
Type A Standards: Fundamental Safety Standards
which contain basic concepts, principles of design, and
general aspects applicable to all machinery.
Type B Standards: Group Safety Standards, each of
which focuses on a specific subject applicable to a
range of machinery types. “B1 Standards” cover a specific safety aspect defined in the Fundamental
Standards. “B2 Standards” cover the requirements of
specific safety related devices such as two-hand controls, interlocking devices, movable guards, etc.
Type C Standards: Specific Machine Safety Standards,
each of which define protective measures required for
hazardous areas of a specific machine or group of
machines.
Type A and Type B Standards are intended to assist in
the machinery design process, and eliminate the need
to repeat these general requirements in the machinespecific (Type C) Standards.
Many product standards are still in the planning stage
and the number of Type C Standards is continuously
increasing. Some are still in draft form (designated as
“prEN” standards). Others exist as finished (“EN”) standards.
Where no machine-specific standard exists, the requirements of the Machinery Directive can be satisfied by
observing existing European Standards and relevant
national standards/specifications. Draft standards (prEN)
published by the European Union are also accepted and
used as a basis for evaluating products for compliance
to the Directives. It is important to note that such draft
standards may change before being finalized and adopted as EN standards.
SELECTED EUROPEAN STANDARDS
Type “A” Standards:
EN292, Safety Machinery – Basic Concepts, General
Principles of Design, Parts 1 & 2.
Type “B1” Standards:
EN294 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances to
Prevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by Upper
Limbs.
EN349 Safety of Machinery – Minimum Gaps to Avoid
Crushing of Parts of the Human Body.
EN954-1 Safety of Machinery – Safety-Related Parts of
Control Systems – Part 1. General Principles of Design.
EN999 Safety of Machinery – The Positioning of
Protective Equipment in Respect of Approach Speeds of
the Human Body.
EN1050 Safety of Machinery – Principles of Risk
Assessment.
prEN811 Safety of Machinery – Safety Distances to
Prevent Danger Zones from Being Reached by Lower
Limbs.
Selected Type “B2” Standards:
EN418 Safety of Machinery – Emergency Stop Devices,
Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.
EN547 Safety of Machinery – Two –Hand Control
Devices, Functional Aspects – Principles for Design.
EN1088 Safety of Machinery – Interlocking Devices
Associated with Guards – Principles for Design &
Selection.
prEN953 Safety of Machinery – General Requirements
for the Design and Construction of Guards.
407
prEN1760-1 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive
Safety Devices – Mats & Floors.
ISA S84.01
Safety Instrumented Systems
prEN1760-2 Safety of Machinery – Pressure Sensitive
Safety Devices – Edges & Bars.
ANSI B11.1
Machine Tools - Mechanical Power Presses - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
prEN61496 Safety of Machinery – Electrosensitive
Protective Equipment.
Type “C” Standards:
prEN415 Packaging Machines
prEN692 Mechanical Presses
prEN693 Hydraulic Presses
prEN746 Thermoprocessing Machines
prEN931 Footwear Manufacturing Machines
prEN1114-1 Rubber & Plastics Machines
prEN1762 Food Processing Machines
Domestic Standards:
Concern for worker safety is not limited to the European
community. Domestically machinery builders, machine
users, and industrial safety professionals have each recognized the importance of providing safe workplaces.
Several standards-making organizations have developed, and continue to develop, more stringent machine
safety guidelines and standards. These include:
Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA)
ANSI B11.2
Hydraulic Power Presses - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.3
Power Press Brakes - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.4
Shears - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care,
and Use of
ANSI B11.5
Machine Tools - Iron Workers - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.6
Lathes - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care,
and Use of
ANSI B11.7
Cold Headers & Cold Formers - Safety Requirements
for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.8
Drilling, Milling , and Boring Machines - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.9
Grinding Machines - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Robotics Industry of America (RIA)
Instrument Society of America (ISA)
National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
A number of selected domestic standards are listed
below.
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.212
General Requirements for (Guarding of) All Machines
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.217
(Guarding of) Mechanical Power Presses
ANSI B11.10
Metal Sawing Machines - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.11
Gear Cutting Machines - Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.13
Machine Tools - Single- and Multiple- Spindle Automatic
Bar and Chucking Machines -Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.14
Coil Slitting Machines/Systems — Safety Requirements
for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.15
Pipe, Tube, and Shape Bending Machines - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
408
ANSI B11.16
Metal Powder Compacting Presses - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.17
Horizontal Extrusion Presses-Safety Requirements for
Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B11.18
Machinery and Machine Systems for the Processing of
Coiled Strip, Sheet, and Plate - Safety Requirements for
ANSI B11.19
Performance Criteria for the Design, Construction, Care,
and Operation of Safeguarding when Referenced by
Other B11 Machine Tool Safety Standards
Sources for Standards:
EN & IEC Standards are available from:
Global Engineering Documents
15 Inverness Way East
Englewood, CO 80112
Telephone: (800) 854-7179
and
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
11 West 42nd Street
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: (212) 642-4900
ANSI & NFPA Standards are available from:
ANSI B11.20
Machine Tools - Manufacturing Systems/Cells - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI B183
Roll Forming and Roll Bending Machines - Safety
Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of
ANSI/RIA 15.06
Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and Robot
Systems
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
11 West 42nd Street
New York, NY 10036
Telephone: (212) 642-4900
OSHA Regulations are available from:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402-9371
Telephone: (202) 783-3238
NFPA 79
Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 1994 Edition
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
Each SCHMERSAL safety product has been
certified to conform to all relevant Standards and
Directives. Copies of the Declaration of Conformity
for any product in this catalog are available upon
request.
409
Safer
by
Design
410
SELECTED CONVERSION FACTORS
TO CONVERT
Parameter
To
Multiply by
Parameter
From
To
Multiply by
Temperature °C
°F
(°C × 9/5) + 32
centigrams
grams
0.01
°F
°C
(°F–32) × 5/9
Force
dynes
grams
0.00102
°C
°K
°C + 273.18
dynes
newtons
dynes
kg
Distance
Energy
From
TO CONVERT
1.0 × 10-5
1.02 × 10-6
2.248 × 10-6
cm
inches
0.3937
dynes
pounds
mm
inches
0.03937
grams
kilograms
cm
feet
0.03281
grams
milligrams
inches
mm
25.4
grams
oz (avdp)
feet
cm
30.48
grams
oz (troy)
meters
feet
3.281
grams
pounds
meters
inches
39.37
kilograms
dynes
kilograms
grams
1.0 × 103
kilograms
newtons
9.807
kilograms
pounds
2.2046
kilograms
oz (avdp)
newtons
dynes
4.448 × 105
newtons
pounds
0.2248
pounds
dynes
pounds
grams
4.5359 × 102
pounds
newtons
4.448
pounds
kilograms
pounds
oz (avdp)
pounds
oz (troy)
btu
gram calories 2.52 × 102
btu
hp-hours
btu
joules
btu
kW-hours
btu
ergs
ergs
btu
ergs
joules
ergs
watt-hours
foot pounds
btu
3.927 × 10
-4
1.055 × 10
3
2.928 × 10-4
1.055 × 1010
9.486 × 10
-11
1.0 × 10-7
2.773 × 10-11
1.286 × 10
-3
foot pounds
gm-calories 3.241 × 10-1
foot pounds
hp-hours
5.05 × 10-7
1.0 × 10-3
1.0 × 103
3.527 × 10-2
3.215 × 10-2
2.205 × 10-3
9.80665 × 105
3.5274 × 101
1.0 × 105
4.536 × 10-1
1.6 × 101
1.458 × 101
411
NEMA, UL, CSA & IEC
INGRESS PROTECTION RATINGS
TABLE 1, NEMA, UL and CSA Enclosure Ratings
ENCLOSURE TYPES FOR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Type
Designation
National Electrical Manufacturers
(NEMA Standard 250)
NEMA Association
and Electrical and Electronic
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(UL 50 and UL 508)
Canadian Standards Association
(Standard C22.2 No. 94)
Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC)
1
Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against contact with
the enclosed equipment or location where unusual
service conditions do not exist.
Indoor use primarily to provide protection against
contact with the enclosed equipment and against a
limited amount of falling dirt.
General purpose enclosure. Protects against accidental contact with parts.
2
Enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against limited
amounts of falling water and dirt.
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection against
limited amounts of falling water and dirt.
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection against
dripping and light splashing of noncorrosive liquids
and falling dirt.
3
Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against windblown
dust, rain, and sleet; undamaged by the formation of
ice on the enclosure.
Outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against
windblown dust and windblown rain; undamaged by
the formation of ice on the enclosure.
Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of
protection against rain, snow, and windblown dust;
undamaged by the external formation of ice on the
enclosure.
3R
Enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against falling rain and
sleet; undamaged by the formation of ice on the
enclosure.
Outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against
falling rain; undamaged by the formation of ice on the
enclosure.
Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protection against rain and snow; undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure.
4
Enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hosedirected water; undamaged by the formation of ice on
the enclosure.
Either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of
protection against falling rain, splashing water, and
hose-directed water; undamaged by the formation of
ice on the enclosure.
Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protection against rain, snow, windblown dust, splashing
and hose-directed water; undamaged by the external
formation of ice on the enclosure.
4X
Enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and
hose-directed water; undamaged by the formation of
ice on the enclosure.
Either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of
protection against falling rain, splashing water, and
hose-directed water; undamaged by the formation of
ice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.
Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protection against rain, snow, windblown dust, splashing
and hose-directed water; undamaged by the external
formation of ice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.
Enclosures are intended for use indoors or outdoors
where occasional submersion is encountered.
Indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against entry of water during temporary submersion at a limited depth; undamaged by the formation
of ice on the enclosure.
Indoor or outdoor use; provides a degree of protection against the entry of water during temporary submersion at a limited depth; undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure; resists corrosion.
Enclosures are intended for use indoors or outdoors
where occasional submersion is encountered.
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection against
dust, dirt, fiber flyings, dripping water, and external
condensation of non-corrosive liquids.
Indoor use; provides a degree of protection against
circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings; dripping and
light splashing of non-corrosive liquids; not provided
with knockouts.
Enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to
provide a degree of protection against dust, spraying
of water, oil, and non-corrosive coolant.
Indoor use to provide a degree of protection against
lint, dust seepage, external condensation and spraying of water, oil, and non-corrosive liquids.
Indoor use; provides a degree of protection against
circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings; seepage and
spraying of non-corrosive liquids, including oils and
coolants.
This material is reproduced with permission from
NEMA. The preceding descriptions, however, are not
intended to be complete representations of National
Electrical Manufacturers Association standards for
enclosures nor those of the Electrical and Electronic
Manufacturers Association of Canada.
This material is reproduced with permission from
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Standard for Safety for
Cabinets and Boxes, UL 50, Copyright 1985 and
Industrial Control Equipment, UL 508, Copyright 1984
by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
This material is reproduced with permission from the
Canadian Standards Association.
6
12
13
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall not be
responsible to anyone for the use of or reliance upon
a UL Standard by anyone. UL shall not incur any obligation or liability for damages, including consequential damages, arising out of or in connection with the
use, interpretation of, or reliance upon a UL
Standard.
NEMA, UL, CSA and IEC have each established ratings
systems intended to identify an enclosure’s ability to repel
elements from the outside environment. These rating systems address the enclosure’s ability to protect against a
variety of environmental conditions. These include:
• Incidental contact
• Rain, sleet and snow
• Windblown dust
• Hosedown and splashing liquids
• Falling dirt
• Oil or coolant spraying/splashing
• Corrosive agents
• Occasional temporary submersion
• Occasional prolonged submersion
412
While these ratings are intended to help you make a
more informed product selection, there are some differences between each organization’s system.
As shown in Table 1, the NEMA, UL and CSA ratings
most commonly used in North America are based on similar application descriptions and expected performance.
However, while UL and CSA require testing in the laboratories (and periodic manufacturer site inspections to
ensure continued adherence to prescribed standards),
NEMA leaves compliance and certification up to the manufacturer.
While the European IEC (IP) ratings summarized in
Table 2 are based on similar test methods, their performance has some slight and subtle differences in interpretation. For example, selected IP ratings permit limited
TABLE 2, IEC (IP) Enclosure Ratings
IP
Tests
IP
Tests
0
No protection
0
No protection
1
Protected against
solid objects up to
50mm, e.g. accidental touch by hands
1
Protected against
vertically falling
drops of water, e.g.
condensation
2
Protected against
solid objects up to
12mm, e.g. fingers
2
Protected against
direct sprays of
water up to 15° from
vertical
3
Protected against
solid objects over
2.5mm, e.g. tools
and wires
3
Protected against
sprays to 60° from
vertical
4
Protected against
solid objects over
1mm
4
Protected against
water sprayed from
all directions (limited
ingress permitted)
5
Protected against
dust (limited ingress,
no harmful deposit)
5
Protected against
low pressure jets of
water from all directions (limited ingress
permitted)
6
Totally protected
against dust
6
Protected against
strong jets of water
7
Protected against
the effects of immersion between 15 cm
and 1 m
ingress of water, while UL/CSA ratings do not.
For your reference and convenience we have attempted to provide an approximate cross-reference between
North American enclosure ratings (NEMA, UL and CSA)
and selected IEC (IP) enclosure ratings (Table 3). Please
recognize that these are nearest-equivalents only and
should not be considered as direct comparisons.
Example:
IP
2
3
Characteristic letters
1st characteristic numeral
(Protection against solid objects)
2nd characteristic numeral
(Protection against liquids)
An enclosure with this designation is protected against
the penetration of solid objects greater than 12mm and
against spraying water.
TABLE 3, NEMA, UL & CSA vs. IEC (IP) Ingress Protection Ratings*
NEMA,
UL,
CSA
Rating
1
2
IEC Rating
IP23
IP30
IP32
3S
IP65
*
*
*
*
*
4X
*
6
13
IP67
*
4
12
IP66
*
3
3R
IP64
*
*
*These are nearest equivalents only, and should not be used to make direct conversions from IEC to NEMA classifications.
413
GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF SALE
ORDERS & BLANKET ORDERS
All orders must include proper description, pricing, quantity and
shipping requirements. Buyer must contact the Seller’s headquarters for terms and conditions associated with blanket
orders.
Seller, orders for non-standard and special items made to the
Buyer’s specifications are non-cancelable. Seller reserves the
right to bill Buyer for materials purchased for the production of
such items, and for all goods fully or partially manufactured at
the time of notice of the Buyer’s desire to cancel the order.
PRICES
Unless otherwise stated, prices are firm for thirty days. Seller
reserves the right to revise price if there is a change in quantity,
size, finish, or method and time shipment differing from those
indicated herein. Prices and terms on this quotation and/or
acknowledgement of order are not subject to verbal changes or
other agreements unless approved in writing by the Seller’s
headquarters’ staff. Unless otherwise negotiated, prices for
orders for future delivery will be invoiced at the prevailing price
at the time of shipment.
SPECIAL TOOLING
Special tooling required and paid for by the Buyer shall become
the property of the Buyer. Where such tooling incorporates trade
secrets, it shall be held in perpetuity at the manufacturer’s premises for the exclusive use of the Buyer.
DELIVERY
All material is sold and priced F.O.B. Tarrytown, NY, USA.
Unless otherwise specified by the Buyer, all shipments will be
made via UPS Ground.
MINIMUM ORDER & PACKAGING CHARGES
Unless otherwise agreed upon, the minimum order billing is
$100 per shipment exclusive of shipping, insurance or other
miscellaneous charges.
PAYMENT TERMS
Payment terms are net 30 days. Seller reserves the right to hold
shipments to firms with unpaid past due balances. Seller also
reserves the right to charge interest at the rate of 11⁄2% interest
per month for accounts in arrears more than 30 days. This interest will never be greater than that allowed by local law.
TITLE
Title to material, priced at Seller’s shipping point, shall pass to
Buyer upon shipment. Any charges by carrier for switching,
demurrage or other services shall be paid by the Buyer.
CHANGES & CANCELLATIONS
Should Buyer desire to cancel, revise or suspend this order for
reasons beyond the Buyer’s control, Seller shall discuss the
matter promptly with the Buyer and do all possible to make a
mutually satisfactory agreement. In cases where the material
has been manufactured partially or completely for Buyer’s
requirements, Seller will advise Buyer of charges incurred to
Buyer’s account.
CLAIMS FOR DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
All material is warranted to be free from defects in quality and
workmanship, and to meet the specifications to which ordered.
The Seller’s obligation under this warranty is limited to repairing
or replacing defective material, or crediting the Buyer with the
price of the defective material. If Buyer believes the material to
be defective, Buyer must notify Seller within 30 days after delivery. Seller has the right to reinspect any goods before determination of a reasonable settlement. Toward this end, Buyer must
contact Seller’s headquarters requesting a formal Return
Material Authorization (RMA). Seller will not accept any material returns without reference to the RMA number of the Buyer’s
returned goods packing list.
ORDERS FOR NON-STANDARD/SPECIAL ITEMS
Unless otherwise negotiated and confirmed in writing by the
414
GENERAL
All agreements are contingent upon strikes, accidents, fires,
availability of materials and all other causes beyond the Seller’s
control. Typographical, accounting and other administrative
errors are subject to correction. Buyer assumes the liability for
patent and copyright infringement for goods made to Buyer’s
specifications. When Buyer furnishes material for use in production, ample allowance must be made for reasonable
spoilage. Such materials must be of suitable quality to facilitate
efficient production. Conditions not specifically stated herein
shall be governed by established trade customs. Terms inconsistent with those stated herein that may appear on the Buyer’s
formal order will not be binding on the Seller.
SUSPENSIONS & CANCELLATIONS
Unless otherwise negotiated and agreed to by the Seller, the
Buyer must accept final and/or complete delivery on all orders
within 90 days from date of first shipment. Should the Buyer fail
to accept the complete order within this or the negotiated period for order, the Seller reserves the right to cancel the order and
re-bill the Buyer at the price schedule covering the total quantity of parts shipped through the date of cancellation.
WARRANTY AND LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTY:
SCHMERSAL INC agrees to replace or repair products which
have been found defective due to workmanship or material.
This warranty is made only for a period within one year of the
date of the invoice to the Buyer. This warranty applies to
products which have been subjected to normal and proper
usage, and to which inspection of the product by the
SCHMERSAL INC shows it to be thus defective. THE AGREEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE SUCH PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO F.O.B. SHIPPING POINT AND IS IN NO WAY A
LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL,
OR FOR DELAYS, INSTALLATION, TRANSPORTATION,
ADJUSTMENT OR OTHER EXPENSES ARISING IN
CONNECTION WITH SUCH PRODUCT. SCHMERSAL INC is
not responsible in this warranty for product which is repaired or
altered. Nor is SCHMERSAL INC responsible in this warranty
for products subject to misuse, negligence, or accident.
SCHMERSAL INC IS IN NO WAY LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE
FOR INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY ARISING FROM OR OUT OF USE OF THE PRODUCT
WITHIN DESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS. Except for the
warranty hereinbefore stated, THERE ARE NO EXPRESS
WARRANTIES AND NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OTHER THAN THOSE EXPRESSLY SET FORTH
ABOVE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND
EXCLUDES ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE, BOTH
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, UNLESS SET FORTH IN WRITING
AND SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED EXECUTIVE OF THE
SCHMERSAL INC.
NOTES
415
NOTES
416